Home

DC100 Data Collector Instruction Manual

1. 145 CO ce e ze os EXC CC 221 ad If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm IM DC100 01E 14 35 suoneoyioodsg 14 13 Dimensional Drawings Subunit DS600 unit mm 422 100 55 176 168 20 Subunit DS400 336 100 8 320 22 ello lello lelo e i e i e t 1 el If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm 14 36 IM DC100 01E 14 13 Dimensional Drawings 10 ch Universal Input Module 10 ch DCV TC DI Input Module Digital Input Module unit mm 137 4 L 20 ch Universal Input
2. Resistors Jumper setup switches T B cH2 T Ij 0 IL Ij i 1 i E Ij 5 Tm o E Ij o I Ij I Ij 5 I 7 I c T O O Wiring Diagrams Single gauge method DU500 12 DU500 13 Jumper setup switch Y S C c c f ae AT No 1 Rg No 2 BOTNI No 3 No 4 No 5 D H OFF ON No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 ON ON ON OFF OFF CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7 CH9 Model with External Bridge Resistors NDIS terminal O CH1 CH4 CH5 CH8 CH9 R fixed resistor r resistance of leadwire Rg resistance of strain gauge e output voltage developed across bridge E voltage imposed across bridge 00500 14 IM DC100 01E 3 17 pue uonejeisu 3 6 Connecting the Signal Lines Rg Single gauge three wire method R fixed resistor r resistance of leadwire Rg resistance of strain gauge e output voltage developed across bridge E voltage imposed across bridge E DU500 12 DU500 13 00500 14 Jumper setup switch A No 1 No 2 Rg No 3 No 4
3. gt Select Setting Parameter lH TAG MEM SET MATH MEDIA REPORT OUTPUT sm SA mem se ser Enter Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu according to the following procedure 1 If a menu other than the operation display mode or SET UP menu is being displayed turn OFF the power switch 2 Turn ON the power switch while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear However the new settings selections are canceled New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SETUP Lower menu OUTPUT ENTER FILTER 0 ENTER 0123456789 4 OUTPUT SET End of setting ESC Explanation When the voltage or current output from the retransmission module changes drastically set a time constant Select the value in the range from 0 to 9 The relationship between the specified value and the time constant is as follows Value Time Constant ms Value Time Constant ms 0 4 5 250 1 12 6 500 2 28 7 950 3 60 8 1750 4 125 9 3000 Note The time constant is the value that is applicable when the voltage or current changes from 1 V to 5 V or from 4 mA to 20 mA respectively If the amount of ch
4. 1 8 IM DC100 01E 1 3 Names of Parts Terminal Modules DI DO module DT100 11 d o ELIT FCF ds 0 N Md RS So So 90 Se M So M VS M Sg 4 O Cover Alarm module DT200 11 DT200 21 DT200 11 Screw terminal GP IB connector RS 232 C module DT300 21 RS 232 C connector Screw terminal DT200 21 oe Screw terminal 2 fiff 2 2 o o o o o oe Of Cover Switch to set the address Switches to set communication parameters IM DC100 01E uiejs S 1 3 Names of Parts RS 422 A RS 485 Module DT300 31 ON OFF switch of built in terminating resistor LED a RS 422 A RS 485 terminal Switches to set communication parameters Ethernet Module DT300 41 Status indicator Switch to set mode 10BASE T port Retransmission Module 1 5 V Retransmission Module DT500 11 Screw terminal Screw t
5. 4 12 IM DC100 01E 4 9 Using the RELAY STATUS Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation DISP MODE C START ESC FUNC CLOCK CO STOP INS DEL RANGE ALARM ww FD COPY MEM SET SET ENTER M FUNC RELAY STATUS Display for Sub display 1 1 Select the sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select RLY using the MODE key Sub display 1 1501 4 RLY 3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels using the S keys Sub display 1 1911 RELAY STATUS Display for Sub display 2 1 Select the sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select RLY using the MODE key Sub display 1 and 2 S01 WRLY 501 3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels using the e keys
6. 6 2 Setting a Writing Channel or Writing Operation Example of setting when measured data are saved continuously Measured data are continuously saved Operation flow 1 Set file cancellation to be executed when copying files in the SET UP menu Power ON DISP key enters the SET UP menu MEM SET in SET UP menu FILE COPY amp DELETE ON Terminate SET UP menu END STORE 2 Set to execute copying when the file is ended in the event action setting LOGIC in SET menu LOGIC BOX No EVENT FILE END ACT EDGE MEMRY CP_FDD 3 Set the writing operation WRITE MODE in MEM SET menu WRITE MODE REPEAT WRITE TRIG FREE WRITE DATA ALL WRITE NAME DATE WRITE MEMORY DIV2 4 Start by pressing the START key Either step 2 or step 3 of the setting operation can follow step 1 Operation flow Internal RAM Disk 1 2 1 2 After one side file has been created another side file is created to continue writing At the same time the first file is copied to a floppy disk FDD lt The first file is cancelled at the same time as the copy is completed Delete d 4 After the second file has been created N a third file is started to be created in the area where the first file was cancelled At the same time the second file is copied onto the floppy FDD disk 6 8 IM DC10
7. 12 IM DC100 01E List of Menus and Set up Data The following is a list of set up data procedures to switch to different setting modes and setting menu Measurement Condition Settings Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Input type span linear scaling RANGE key 001 01 VOLT 2V Chapter 5 Units SET key SET UNIT Section 8 3 Moving average Press the SET key for SET MOVE AVE Section 8 6 Measurement cycle A D integration time Filter about three seconds Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UPZSCAN INTVL SET UP A D INTG SET UP FILTER Section 10 1 Section 10 3 Section 10 3 Make sure that the total number of setting changes including calibrations and restructuring does not surpass 100000 2 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Settings for Saving Measured Computation Data Built in RAM disk Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Start Resume writing measured dataSTART key Section 6 1 Stop writing measured data STOP key WRITE STOP YES Section 6 1 Suspend writing measured data STOP key WRITE STOP PAUSE Section 6 1 Write one scan of data FUNC key DATA WRITE Section 6 1 Select channel for writing MEM SET key MEMORY CH SET Section 6 2 Set writing operation MEM SET key MEMO
8. Operating Procedure Main menu ISET WR_MODE FL INFO DIR DELETE CONVERT ur UIDBOZIDEM QUID mem ser Enter Lm runc Press the MEM SET key to enter the MEM SET menu Select set using the GS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting MEMORY NER m Lower menu CONVERT ENTER A CODE NUMBER IENTER 4 CONV FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC DDD i CONV CH 001 A05 gt Select Channel No i CONV CH 001 A05 ENTER gt Select Channel No 4 CONV DAT 1 200 D gt Start limit 1 200000 4 CONV DAT 1 200 ENTER gt End limit 1 200000 i CONVERT DRIVE FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SCSIO SCSI1 SCSI2 SCSI3 SCSI4 SCSI5 SCSI6 SCSI7 4 Copying CONV COPY OK End of setting ESCH Displayed when copy lock is set at the SET UP menu 2 Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed IM DC100 01E 7 3 H peinduio2 Jo painseayy Buon 7 2 Copying after Conversion of the Data to ASCII Data Explanation Measured computed data or periodic file in the internal RAM disk is converted to ASCII data then copied to a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD Report files cannot be c
9. 3 22 IM DC100 01E 3 7 Connecting an Extension Module to Extension Bases Using an extension module and extension bases you can install input modules at a location distant from the subunit s The module and bases are powered from the subunit and therefore can be located even in a place where there is no power source nearby Installing an Extension Base A e For fire prevention use extension bases in an upright position Do not cover up the extension base s module allow a clearance of at least 3 cm around the module To prevent electric shock connect an extension base after checking that the power switch of the subunit is turned off Ambient Temperature and Humidity Use an extension base under the following environmental conditions Ambient temperature 10 to 60 C Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH at 10 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH at 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH at 50 to 60 C Use the extension base in a condensation free condition Note Condensation may occur if you move the extension base from an area of low humidity to an area of high humidity or if any drastic temperature variation takes place In addition a measurement error will result if the instrument is in the thermocouple input mode In that case allow at least one hour for the extension base to adjust to the ambient atmosphere before using it Do not install the extension base where it is expos
10. 3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels using the e keys Sub display 1 and 2 001 WALM 011 Explanation Alarm Status Display The status of alarms can be displayed on sub display 1 and 2 On each sub display the alarms of maximum 30 channels can be monitored which also depends on the number of input channels The display shows L for channels where no alarm has occurred and shows W for channels where an alarm has occurred The relation between the alarm status display and channel number is as shown below 001 Xue n ew seen eee EN Channel 30 Channel 21 20 12 Channel 11 10 Alarm status of channel 3 Alarm status of channel 2 Alarm status of channel 1 r Channel No fixed to 1 in units of 1 Slot No Unit No A will be displayed in the case of optional computation channels B Channel 30 Alarm status of channel 22 Alarm status of channel 21 021
11. ALARM SEARCH Display for the Main Display 1 Select the main display using the DISP key 2 Select SER using the MODE key Sub display 1 003 0 0054V 004 0 0319V A SER ALARM SEARCH Display for Sub display 1 1 Select sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select SER using the MODE key Sub display 1 004 H 0 0269V 005 RH 0 0248V SER ALARM SEARCH Display for Sub display 2 1 Select sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select SER using the MODE key Sub display 1 005 0 2108V 006 0 0951V wSER ALARM SEARCH Display for the Main Display Only the channels in which an alarm occurred will be displayed When an alarm occurs in several channels the channels will be displayed consecutively Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms Measurement Values and Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 Others When the input types of all channels are set to SKIP or no alarms occur NO ALARM will be displayed ALARM SEARCH Display for the Sub display 1 and 2 Only the channels in which an alarm occurred will be displayed Two channels will be displayed on each sub display Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms Measurement Values Engineering Units and Selected Display Mode Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 IM DC100 01E 4 7 Aejdsiq spo 34 6umes 4 4 Usin
12. SET 1 S O Lower menu MEDIA ENTER MEDIA FLOPPY ENTER Fores SCSIO IDENTIFY FLOPPY LOAD ENTER SAVE LOAD DIR DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 LOAD MODE DIRECT ENTER DIRECT TRIG_1 TRG_2 TRG_3 4 LOAD FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 Loading 4 Operation status displayed Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed SCSILI is the SCSI ID number that is connected IM DC100 01E epo dN LAS 10 LAS e YUM 11 2 Reading Set up Data Reading set up data for the SETUP mode Relevant Keys RECORD ESC SETUPZMEDIA m ZI CGD stop gt Select Setting Parameter SCAN_INTVL_CH TAG MEM SET MATH MEDIA AT EVLOGI ser ser Enter Operating Procedure 2 Main menu SETUP Ely Ewa MEDIA ENTER MEDIA FLOPPY ENTER Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept Lower menu FLOPPY SCSIO IDENTIFY 4 FLOPPY LOAD E
13. gt Select Setting Parameter SCAN_INTVL CH TAG MEM_SET MATH MEDIA 1 TOT C E mem ser ser LEwrER mrunc Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established Main menu SETUP Lower menu SCAN INTVL ENTER SCAN INTERVAL 0 5 sec ENTER 0 5 123456 10 12 15 20 30 60 5 INTVL of setting ESC Selection of Scan Interval SCAN INTVL e Select 0 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 20 30 and 60 seconds as the interval The default setting is 0 5 seconds The shortest selectable scan interval varies with the setting of the number of input channels A D converter integration time or filter ON OFF For details see chapter 14 Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents mu
14. No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON To R1 to R4 connect resistors with the specifications described below Calibration Resistors R1 R2 and R3 Resistor 4 Accuracy ZERO 120 000 120 000 0 005 0 3 ppm C 2k SPAN 120 000 119 521 0 005 0 3 ppm C 20 k SPAN 120 000 115 294 0 005 0 3 ppm C 200 k SPAN 120 000 80 000 0 005 0 3 ppm C Voltage or Current Output Using Retransmission Module When clibrating the retransmission module by confirming the output value connect a DMM a product corresponding to HP3458A to the terminal to be calibrated 13 8 IM DC100 01E 13 5 Calibration Operating Procedure Entering the calibration mode 1 While pressing and holding the MODE key turn on the power Selecting the subunit and module numbers 2 With 5 select the subunit number S UNITO MODULE No 0 gt 012345 3 With GS move the cursor 4 With ZS 2 select the module number S UNITO MODULE No 0 012345 5 Press the ENTER key Universal input DCV TC DI input mA input or Strain input module Calibrating in CAL EXEC mode 6 With GS select the CAL EXEC mode ADJUST MODE CAL EXEC S UNITO MODULE No 0 DISPLAY CAL EXEC END 7 Press the ENTER key Selecting the calibration range 8 With GS select the calibration range ADJUST RANGE 20mV S UN
15. INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter SCAN INTVL CH TAG MEM_SET MATH MEDIA 1 Imm mem ser ser LEwrER Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the GS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept Main menu SETUP CSKA Lower menu MEDIA ENTER MEDIA FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SCSIO IDENTIFY 4 FLOPPY SAVE ENTER SAVE LOAD DIR DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 SAVE file ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 SAVE FILE AAA ENTER 4 Saving i S AVE OK End of saving ESC Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed SCSILI is the SCSI ID number that is connected Set up data for the SET mode or SETUP mode except for date time is saved to a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD Data is always saved in ASCII format The file name must consist of up to 8 characters The following identifier is used Set up data file for SET mode PNL Set up data file for SETUP mode SET Data capacity For the stand al
16. Ferrite core 7 9 9 oN loj IM DC100 01E 3 43 Bum pue uonejeisu 4 1 Using the AUTO Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation DISP MODE C START ESC FUNC CLOCK CO STOP INS DEL RANGE ALARM CP FD COPY MEM SET SET ENTER M FUNC AUTO Display for the Main Display 1 Select the main display using the DISP key Direct the arrow mark on the Sub display upward 2 Select AUT using the MODE key Sub display 1 003 0 0045V 004 0 0931V AAUT AUTO Display for Sub display 1 1 Select sub display 1 using the DISP key Direct the arrow mark on the Sub display leftward 2 Select AUT using the MODE key Sub display 1 004 0 0926V 005 0 0824V AUT AUTO Display for Sub display 2 1 Select sub display 2 using the DISP key Direct the arrow mark on the Sub display downward 2 Select AUT using the MODE key Sub display 1 005 0 8210V 006 0 0095V WAUT AUTO Display for the Main Display Channel No Seven characters are used for the channel No display The first three characters are used for displaying the channel number A will be displayed in the case of optional computation channels If you select TAG at the channel No TAG setting in the set up mode refer to 10 2 on page
17. established Main menu SETUP OQ Lower menu r MEM SET ENTER FILE ALARM 0h ENTER Oh 1h 2h 3h 4h 5h 4 FILE OVERWRITE ON ENTER OFF ON 4 FILE ROTATE OFF ENTER OFF ON 4 FILE COPY amp DELETE ON ENTER OFF ON COPY LOCK NOT ENTER a NOT USE MEMORY SET ESC _ COPY LOCK USE ENTER COPY NUMBER 0 ENTER MEMORY SET ESC 10 10 IM DC100 01E 10 6 Setting File Alarm Time File Overwriting or File Cancellation Explanation Setting the File Alarm Time FILE ALARM This outputs a file alarm from a relay when the remaining file capacity becomes below the one corresponding to the specified time while the measured computed data are being written in the built in RAM disk Select the remaining time from the following Oh Outputs an alarm when file has been created file is closed Ih 2h 3h 4h or 5h Outputs an alarm when the remaining time reaches the specified time The default setting is 1h Overwriting a File with the Same Name FILE OVERWRITE When measured computed data are written if there is a file with the same name in the built in RAM disk set whether to overwrite the file or not ON Overwrites the file OFF Stops writing Continuing of saving operation when saving with division method FILE ROTATE If saving with the division method and the saving operation is REPEAT and if m
18. pue uonounJ uonoy ueA 3 9 4 Displaying Module Communications Information and Initializing Information Relevant Keys MODULE_INF gt Select Function item MODULE_INF _RE_SYSTEM RAM_INIT Operating Procedure 2 Gare JD INS DEL ser ser enter mrunc Press and hold the FUNC key for about three seconds to enter the FUNC3 menu To enter the FUNC menu from the RANGE ALARM MEM SET or SET SET3 menu press the DISP key Select set using the O keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept There may be some menus that are not displayed by basic settings in Chapter 10 Main menu OV MODULE INF O O COMM INF OQ RAM INIT Lower menu ENTER S UNITO INF SYSTEM 1 S UNITO INFZSYSTEM SYSTEM REAL For GP IB interdface ENTER MODULE GP IB gt ADDR 01 For RS 232 C interface MODULE RS 232C gt BIT RATE 19200 LENGTH 8BIT PARITY NONE HANDSHAKE OFF OFF gt STOP 1BIT For RS 422 A RS 485 interface MODULE RS 422A 485 gt ADDR 01 gt PARITY NONE STOP 1BIT ENTER RAM INIT NO NO YES CSKA RAM INIT YES 4 BIT RATE 19200 LENGTH 8BIT D ENTER Operating status ENTER
19. A 7 mem ser set Enter f mrunc Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the CS keys escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept Main menu SETUP Lower menu ENTER ERROR OVER ENTER OVER OVER 4 TLOG TIME SCALE SEC ENTER OFF SEC MIN HOUR 4 TLOG CH ERROR SKIP ENTER ERROR SKIP 4 TLOG CH OVER ERROR ENTER ERROR SKIP LIMIT 4 TLOG PSUM OVER OVER OVER ROTATE 4 MATH SET End of setting ESCI 12 14 IM DC100 01E 12 6 Setting Actions to be Carried out in Case of Computation Error and Setting the Time Axis for TLOG SUM Explanation Displaying in case of computation error MATH ERROR Used to determine whether OVER or OVER be displayed saved in case of computation error Time axis scale for TLOG SUM TLOG TIME SCALE For TLOG SUM of time series data is added at each measurement interval However in the case of an input having unit of s min or h like flow rate
20. ESC MEMORY DELETE runc CD stop INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CH_SET WR_MODE FL_INFO DIR DELETE CONVT QO mem ser ser Enter Lmrunc Press the MEM SET key to enter the MEM SET menu Select set using the GS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu CSKA Lower menu ie DELETE ENTER DELETE TYPE DAT DAT DAS RBI 4 DELETE FILE AAA AAA BBB CCC 4 DELETE YES NO YES 4 DELETE END Ena of setting Displayed when the report option M3 is installed Explanation Files saved in the built in RAM disk are deleted File Type DAT Measured Computed data file DAS Periodic file RBI Report file Acknowledging File Deletion YES The file is deleted NO The file is not deleted Note The communication function is suspended during deletion H Va peinduio2 Jo painseayy Buon IM DC100 01E 7 6 Initializing RAM Disk MEMORY INIT zm Glas OD GA INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter iR MODE FL_INFO DIR DELETE CONVERT INITT A
21. ESC Setting the Channel No This setting specifies the channels to which the type of input and span apply Set a range of channels in the same unit whether you specify from what channel the first channel to what channel the last channel First Channel No Begin The first three characters on the main display show the number of the first channel to which settings apply A numeral in the first character position shows a unit number A numeral in the second character position represents a module number slot number Setting range Determined by the positions in which the input modules are connected For details see page 3 8 Last Channel No End The two characters following the first channel number show the number of the last channel to which settings apply Setting range See description of the above The first channel number The number of the last channel cannot be smaller than the number of the first channel When both channel numbers are equal settings will only apply to that particular channel When you have set the first channel number and you move the cursor to the last channel setting the channel number of the first channel setting will appear here IM DC100 01E 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Span Selecting the Type of Input The following types of input can be selected The default setting is VOLT SKIP Measurement data saving and display except for page display will not
22. ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Selects match time 1 Provides the setting for clearing computed values Selects match time 1 Provides the setting for starting computing Selects match time 2 Provides the setting for ending computing If in the event action functions you have assigned the same event to more than one LOGIC BOX number at the same time the instrument executes computing beginning with the smallest LOGIC BOX number In the above configuration the instrument clears computed values at 8 00 and starts computing The values and behaviors of the event action functions when computing is done with the above configuration are as follows 12 12 IM DC100 01E 12 5 Starting Stopping Computation Results of ti a al 8 00 9 00 ds the 9 00 of the next day Time UNS A N A Logic box 1 Resetting of computed value Resetting of computed value Logic box 2 Start of computing Start of computing Logic box 3 End of End of computing computing Sum the values measured on channel 001 every hour Setting the TIMER field Configure the instrument so an event occurs every hour with reference to the hour 00 00 Main menu SET Lower menu TIMER ENTER TIMER No 1 ENTER 123456 4 1 TIMER MODE ABSOLUTE ENTER
23. pue 13 4 Error Codes First confirm that the system is properly constructed In particular if you have newly purchased our product thoroughly read Structuring System Modules page 3 32 to construct the system If servicing is necessary or if the instrument does not operate correctly even though the following corrective actions have been taken contact your nearest Sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Error Code Error Corrective Action 001 System error Contact your nearest representaive 002 Set data out of range Set numeric data correctly 003 Time set incorrectly Set time correctly 004 Channels set incorrectly Set channels correctly 005 Invalid setting function parameter Set parameter correctly 006 Invalid character string Set character string correctly 007 Invalid type of input for input module Set the type of input correctly 008 Invalid range setting for input module Set range correctly 009 Numeric values out of range Set numeric values correctly 030 There may be a module that cannot be set Re set ranges or channels with in channels with continuous ranges continuous ranges 031 There may be an invalid module in channels Change channels in which with continuous ranges continuous ranges are set 040 Reference channel number greater than Change the reference channel number that of the
24. DC Voltage Generator Short circuit between and terminals in channel 2 amp CH2 Input terminal Temperature Measurement Using RTD Apply the 100 Q resistance to channel 5 b B A Input terminal Decade Resistance Box Short circuit the resistance input terminals A B and b in channel 4 b B A Input terminal IM DC100 01E 1 3 7 eoueuejure y pue 13 5 Calibration DU500 12 DU500 13 DU500 14 Ri Jumper setting switch No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 OFF ON DC Current Measurement Apply the 20mA to channel 3 gt gt 00000 cce 0209030307 cocococ gt WI Input terminal DC Current Generator Short circuit between and terminals in channel 2 S9 CH2 Input terminal Strain Measurement Perform calibrations using 4 gauge method Use a 319300 bridge box for the DU500 14 s bridge box Wire the strain gauge or the bridge box to the channel 2
25. ENTER To the previous page From the following page IM DC100 01E 9 3 pue uonounJ uonoy ue 3 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event RELAY actions The MATH menu is displayed only on models with the M1 option or when the pulse module is installed The REPORT menu is displayed only on models with the M3 option The FLAG menu is displayed only on models with the M1 option The SCSIO to SCSI7 menus are displayed only on models with the C5 option From the previous page EVT RELAY S01 EVT RELAY 80i ACT EDGE m EMRY DATA_WR _ we 4 es ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR DATA WR WR TRIG START PAUSE CP FDD CP SCSO CP SCS1 CP SCS2 CP SCS3 CP SC84 CP SCS5 CP_SCS6 CP SCS7 ACT EDGE ALARM ACK eK 4 ACT EDGE ALARM RST L ACT EDGE TIMER RST qe DISP 01 4 yo ACT EDGE MSG 015 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START 4 avo ACT EDGE MATH START ACT EDGE FLAG F01 i av ACT EDGE FLAG FO1 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE REPORT START 4 avo ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 4 c2 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE SCSIO LD TRG1 4 ACT EDGE SCSIO LD TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 L ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE 4 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUS
26. Sub display 1 and 2 19501 YRLY 1041 Relay Status Display The status of relays can be displayed on sub display 1 and 2 On each display the status of maximum 30 relays can be monitored The display shows L for relays which are currently not operated by internal switch alarm output relay and shows II for relays which are currently operated by internal switch alarm output relay IM DC100 01E 4 13 Aejdsiq spo 34 6umes 4 9 Using the RELAY STATUS Display Relation between the Relay Status and Internal Switch If the relay status of the internal switches is being displayed an S will be displayed as the first character The next two characters show the number of the internal switch which corresponds to the first batch of the display and range from 01 to 51 There are 60 internal switches S01 Internal switch 21 Internal switch 20 Internal switch 12 Internal switch 11 Internal switch 10 Relay status of internal switch 3 Relay status of internal switch 2 Relay status of internal switch 1 EVE WS M
27. ENTER RESPONSE OFF ENTER RAM INITIALIZING After about 10 seconds 9 16 IM DC100 01E 9 4 Displaying Module Communications Information and Initializing Information Explanation Any of the following functions are executed and displayed by pressing the ENTER key the last key of the lower menu After that the instrument returns to the operation mode Displaying information set in the modules MODULE INF Selection of unit numbers S UNIT Select I from the main unit or 0 to 5 from the subunit For the stand alone model the unit number is fixed at 0 The unit number that is not recognized for the system cannot be selected Module information INF Displays the information in the module installed in the slot SYSTEM Displays the information recognized as the system module REAL Displays the real module information when the recognized system module is replaced by another one or removed If the SYSTEM displays information different from that of REAL module the system must be configured see page 3 32 Otherwise an operation error may occur or the instrument may display measured values incorrectly The information on individual modules is displayed as follows Module Display ID inside the display Description Input module INPUT 00 to 3F DI DO module REMOTE 57 Alarm module RELAY 5C to 5F Communication module COMM 48 to 4F
28. SET MATH RECORD gt Select Setting Parameter MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC CH C1 KEYLOGI Operating Procedure Main menu sET Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the O keys MODE ES START ESC Func ID L sro INS DEL RANGEJALARM E FD COPY ser SET To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Lower menu A01 01 MODE ON gt Select Channel No 4 A01 01 MODE ON gt Select Channel No 4 A01 60 MODE ON OFF ON 4 CALC 001 002 9 23456789 CGMA NE CALC 001 002 passe 788 0 OMANE CALC 001 002 0123456789 CGMA NE 4 LEFT 3000 000Kg gt Span limit 9999 999 9999 999Kg 4 RIGHT 3000 000Kg gt Span limit 9999 999 9999 999Kg H GET OK End of setting ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ESC IM DC100 01E 12 5 uoneinduio2 Iepoi LIN 24 eiqermeAv 12 2 Setting a Computation Equation Explanation For the stand alone model a computation equation can be set for up to 30 channels A0
29. 891 86 V N 8 Writing Measured or Computed Data lt dn x 9 sjauueyo 1equinu Z sjeuueuo Buunseeui jo Jequinu x t9 9 6 ezis 9 I4 seiAq 826219 seq pOLZv vs V N 4 s q 09219 gz V N Y N ezis aq ued yey sjauueuo jo seiq 070201 00 Sel q 917268 Se1 q ZG6ZE01 00 6 sei Aq 070 01 00 seikq 826818 sei q 891616 Sel q 00 01 00 say q 216966 v8 V N 218 panes yey jo JequinN S9Mq ZL vez 00 sei q 9 195 S 4 q vZ9vv0L 00 282 Se1 q 9 Zrr01 seMq 2152 00 seai q 96196 s q 249026 00 6 1 sei q 9LZLZS s q 2172 00 se1 q 96196 se1Aq 7989892 00 s q 82869 29 218 panes yey jo JequinN pon d Burdues ezis uinuiely s q 008962 og seq N t s q 88286 8 V N seq NZ Se1Aq IN yoedeo VY uying J440 NO 31V LOH Alsnooueynuis pares osje pajndwoy painseayy ed pepueix3 poued Burduies euim dn 9 sjauueyo Bunnseeui jo x Z sjeuueuo Buunseeui jo x t9 9GZ ezis se1 q 008962 0 Seq vr9Z9vv z V N Sel Aq 0819 Sc ezis alld panes
30. DU200 11 DU200 12 1D es O od Clamp terminal Screw terminal feed fed feza fea WW ii p ed c HSS 84 HSS O ccdg cc 0g ooog ooog ooog Cover The 20 ch DCV TC DI input modules DU200 21 DU200 22 and the 30 ch DCV TC DI input modules DU200 31 DU200 32 are similar to the ones shown above mA input module DU300 11 DU300 12 DU300 11 DU300 12 S SONE 9 Ts BIDS res QF bo cl Screw wee be amp terminal DES Ne terminal St B MES os Yan 3 S Cover Wire clip Y 7 Clamp terminal IM DC100 01E 1 7 uiejs S 1 3 Names of Parts Strain input module DU500 12 DU500 13 DU500 1 4 DU500 12 DU500 13 DU500 14 NDIS terminal Clamp terminal Pulse input module DU600 11 Screw terminal Cover d Digital input module DU700 11 DU700 11 Screw terminal
31. IM DC100 01E Unsupported Functions As Classified by the Style Number Products with style numbers S1 to S5 and S9 are not sold The following functions are available for DC100 with style number S7 Report function M3 optional SCSI interface C5 optional Flag function in computation function M1 optional Group reset function in computation function M1 optional The following functions are available for DC100 with style number S8 Ethernet module Digital input module Measurement of active power and apparent power on ch3 to ch6 for power monitor module The following function is available for DC100 with style number S10 Retransmission module 2 IM DC100 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Main Unit DC100 Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument In case the wrong instrument or accessories have been delivered or if some accessories are not present or if they seem abnormal contact the dealer from which you purchased them Furthermore please contact a Yokogawa representative to order any of parts as follows Check that the model and suffix code given on the name plate are according to your order Model and Suffix Codes Model Suffix Code Description DClO0 nues Main unit DC100 Type 3d ans Stand alone model Expandable model Software De DAQ 32 Memory Internal memory MB standard specification v
32. Subunit ps400 6 O 9 IM DC100 01E 1 3 uiejs S 1 3 Names of Parts DC100 Stand alone Model DC100 1 Front Main display See chapter 4 Sub display 1 See chapter 4 Sub display 2 See chapter 4 Status indicator Gey OC G EES up CD fee ser j C zem C DEOD Ahero Ex Floppy disk drive Rear Power switch See page 3 26 AC power supply model SCSI Connector e SUB UNIT VF A WARNING CLC CLI 1 Q YOKOGAWA Operation panel See chapters 3 to 12 Function grounding terminal Terminals DC power supply model SCSI Connector SUB UNIT VF e AX WARNING Power connector A See page 3 27 Power fuse A See page 13 2 Function grounding terminal oo B EXTR Li CL Terminals DC power fuse A See page 13 2 DC power connector A See page 3 29 IM DC100 01E 1 3 Names of Parts DC100 Expandable Model DC100 2 Front Main display See chapter 4 Sub display 1 See c
33. Alarm Hysteresis You can set the width between the value of alarm occurrence and its release This setting prevents frequent alarm occurrences releases in an unstable environment Hysteresis values can be set in the 0 196 percentage range of the span The hysteresis setting is used for high and low limit alarms High limit alarm Low limit alarm Alarm occurrence Set alarm Measurement values Alarm release value 1V Hysteresis Approx 0 5 1V Hysteresis Approx 0 5 Alarm release Set alarm Measurement values Alarm occurrence value Internal Switches Sixty internal switches are provided which can be operated upon alarm occurrences These switches are only for internal operations and are used in combination with the event action function refer to page 2 12 Alarm Output Relays The alarm module or the DI DO module includes an alarm output relay The contact of this relay can be output to the outside For how to mount modules see 3 3 How to Connect Input Output Modules page 3 6 2 8 IM DC100 01E 2 4 Alarm Function Operation Mode Energizing De energizing Setting The alarm output relays can be selected to be energized or de energized on alarm occurrence Using de energizing the alarm output relay will be activated when the power drops in the same way as when an alarm occurs This setting can be done for each relay individually Relay contacts in case of energizing A co
34. 14 6 Specifications of Pulse Input Module Style Number S4 Model Number of Input Channels Terminal Type and Shortest Measurement Interval Model Number of Channels Terminal Type Shortest Measurement Interval DU600 11 10 Screw 0 5 s The interval between data updates is fixed to one second Method of input Potential with reference to the shared voltage of the COMMON line within the same module Types of input Voltage free contact or open collector TTL or transistor Measurement modes RATE instantaneous count mode Outputs the prescaled value of the count of pulses imposed over the last one second interval of measurement GATE instantaneous turn on time mode Outputs the prescaled values of the contact s turn on make and turn off break times on 1 off 0 over the last one second interval of measurement Note The computing function computational expression TLOG PSUM XXX should be used when integrating an every second count or turn on time maximum count turn on time 99999999 Input range 0 to 6 000 pulses or 0 to 10 pulses per second if the filter is on for voltage free contact input Ratio of make at input 35 to 65 at the maximum frequency ratio of make closed contact time closed contact time open contact time x 100 Minimum input pulse width 60 us whether the contact is closed or open Measuring accuracies Measured under the following standards of operating conditions Ambient tempe
35. After starting writing even if the writing is stopped before the specified data length is reached the file capacity is taken by the area for the specified data length Note When using the computation channel do not write measured computed data in an application where the measurement interval is shorter than 0 5 sec the writing interval is set to INTVL or the data length is shorter than 50 if the writing action is in the REPEAT mode Doing so may result in incorrect writing When the Writing operation is set to REPEAT and there is not enough space to create a new file on the internal RAM disk the files are deleted in order form the oldest file to create the new file If the necessary space to create the new file cannot be allocated after deleting the five oldest files the writing operation stops If there are a lot of files on the internal RAM disk file switching takes time In some cases this causes drop outs in the writing operation In this case delete unnecessary files form the RAM disk or increase the measurement interval Pretrigger WRITE PRETRIG If WRITE TRIG is set to TRIGGER the data before the trigger event generation can be saved in part of the set file Setting is done as a percentage of the file capacity in 10 increments Data before the trigger generation Trigger event 20 File capacity 100 pacity Ifa pretrigger is used except 0 it is necessary to set the writing sta
36. Cs File alarm output transfer contact ric iii 2J transfer contact 1 O NS oe 215 E w Remote control signal input P REM Alarm WIS 12 contact terminals eee E iil output 6 11 C 12 2 make 6 dic contact Is 1 Alarm output Aue e e 2i Alarm output 9 2 J transfer contact ALDE e e 4J transfer contact Output contact capcacity 250 DC 0 1 A resistive load 250 AC 2A resistive load 30 V DC 2A resistive load IM DC100 01E 3 1 9 Bum pue uonejeisu 3 6 Connecting the Signal Lines Connecting the Retransmission Signal Lines Retransmission Module Processing of Faulty Data You cam set the output value that corresponds to abnormal measured balues computed values and communication input value using the dip switch of the retransmission module Output Type Output Value swi sw2 SW3 Approx 0 V 0 05 V or less ZERO OFF OFF or approx 0 mV 0 15 mA or less 5 OVER ON OFF 0 8 V or 3 2 mA 110 OVER OFF ON 5 4 V or 21 6 mA Value immediately before Previous value ON ON the faulty data occurence Data are processed as faulty data in the following cases When the power of the expanded model main unit switches OFF When the measurement channel that is retransmitting experiences the following The
37. Enter SET UP menu the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the GS keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established IM DC100 01E 10 17 195 sPunes oiseg 10 9 Setting SET SET3 Menu Main menu SET UP ___ CER OQ Lower menu d SET PARM ENTER PANEL MEDIA ENTER 4 MEDIA SET ENTER SET PARM SET iESC Cy C __ OFF PANEL UNIT ENTER 4 UNIT SET ENTER C gt SET SET3 OFF PANEL MATH ENTER 4 MATH SET ENTER gt CO SET sets OFF PANEL CONST ENTER 4 CONST SET ENTER Ol SET SET3 OFF PANEL M ENTER TAG SET3 ENTER aol SET SET3 OFF PANEL MESSAGE ENTER 4 O MESSAGE SET3 ENTER SET SET3 OFF PANEL TIMER ENTER 4 D O TIMER SET ENTER SET SET3 OFF PANEL MATCH TIME ENTER 4 C O MATCH TIME SET3 ENTER SET SET3 OFF PANEL LOGIC ENTER 4 D O LOGIC SET ENTER SET SET3 OFF PANEL MOVE AVE ENTER 4 D O MOVE AVE SET3 ENTER SET SET3 OFF PANEL GROUP ENTER 4 C O GRO
38. Index 2 IM DC100 01E INDEX A ABSOLUTE Absolute time eese 2 12 8 6 ACCOSSOIIES n xk eae y ax cua a ed e a ER n RR RN 5 6 AC input module esee 1 2 3 21 5 6 ACON E ee o ege ARR Ae Reden 2 12 setting 8 1 9 9 to 9 11 A D converter integration time cc eeseeeeeseeeeeeteeteeeeees 2 4 10 4 Alarm acknowledgment Of sese 2 10 9 15 S arch Display eec teer erre e netto 2 1 4 7 4 8 Status Display ERE n res 2 1 4 12 on See also Copying 9 12 Difference high low limit eene 2 8 8 2 high limit 2 8 8 2 low limit lower limit eee 2 8 8 2 occurrence of occurrence mark 2 8 to 2 10 output output relays siros nen a a ente See also Alarm module 2 8 to 2 10 2 13 3 19 4 13 4 14 8 3 9 9 10 5 to 10 7 rate of change high low limit of sss 2 8 8 2 REFLASH Reflashing eee 2 9 10 6 Telease a UM De ENDO 2 8 to 2 10 TGSet nce d tee eri 2 10 8 4 9 15 OMIM 8 4 Au c 2 8 8 2 upper limit high 2 8 8 2 ALARM Key eiecit teet ede dede tera eda oda dao 8 1 Alarm mod le zanesenia a aAa a a E a AAR See also Alarm output 4 1 9 3 19 4 14 8 3 9 17 ALL SKIP a
39. RECORD SET LOGIC a GO Grr INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC CH C f OQ mem ser set Enter mrunc Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET C O Lower menu Loaic ENTER LOGIC BOX No 01 ENTER EVENT AUARIM ENTER ACT BBBE ALARM ACK D war TRIG D ACT EDGE MEMRY ii TRIG ENTER i SET OK Ena of setting ESC Explanation Writing Operation Using Event Action Function When SINGLE is selected as WRITE MODE Press the START key Event Event Event Event y y y RAM disk File 001 Start of writing End of writing When REPEAT is selected as WRITE MODE Press the START key Event Event Event ineffective Event y y y y RAM disk Fics Event Start of writing of writing Start of writing of writing Start of writing End of writing Key Operation When Event Action Function is Used If a writing start START or writing starting trigger WR_TRIG is set to an action it is necessary that the status ready for
40. To prevent a fire always use the instrument in a vertical position and do not block the upper side of the modules a space of at least 3 cm is necessary Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH for 10 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C However no condensation should be present Installation location Room Installation height Altitude up to 2 000 m Note Internal condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where both the ambient temperature and humidity are higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In case of thermocouple input this might result in erroneous measurements In those cases allow the instrument to achieve equilibrium with to its new environment for at least one hour before starting operation Never install the instrument in any of the following locations in direct sunlight or near heat sources where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gases are present near strong magnetic field sources near high voltage equipment or power lines where the level of mechanical vibrations is high inanunstable place Installation Method DC100 Can be used on a desk top installed on the floor or rack mounted Always install the instrument vertically Desk top or floor installation Extend the legs underneath the rear of the unit and install the instrument upright on a level floor as shown below 3 2 IM DC100 01E
41. 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch Relevant Keys SETUP RELAY gt Select Setting Parameter MEDIA ALARM A D_INTG FILTER RELAYT TATA GO GA s ser C Cere Operating Procedure SETUP E Lx Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the GS keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled established When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are OQ Lower menu d RELAY ENTER RELAY SET REFLASH ENTER REFLASH AND ENERG HOLD REFLASH RELAY No 1 OFF 123456 REFLASH RELAY No 1 OFF ENTER REFLASH SET ESC OFF O REFLASH RELAY No 1 001 REFLASH RELAY No 1 001 ENTER RELAY SET AND ENTER AND RELAY S NONE ENTER AND RELAY S NONE ENTER A
42. 3 2 Installation Rack mounting The following fittings can be supplied for rack mounting Name Model Description Rack mounting fitting DV400 015 Conforming to ANSI EIA External dimensions and rack mounting dimensions for the DC100 are shown below To install the rack mounting fitting on the instrument remove the screws at the right and left forward of the instrument and use the mounting screws attached to the rack mounting fitting Be careful that right and left screws have different lengths The screw at the right when facing the front of the instrument is M4 of 20 mm long and the left screw is M4 of 16 mm long Appropriate tightening torque is 1 4 to 1 5 N m 14 to 15 kgf cm f another instrument is to be mounted under this instrument in an ANSI EIA rack remove the prong or brackets designated with 1 and 2 in the figure below because they may interfere with both instruments 290 e e 2 145 115 O Ese Gem mmn m C e may N A T1 Rack Mounting Dimensions 480 1 JIS 482 641 ANSI EIA 32 Panel face DEO 310 IM DC100 01E 3 3 Bum pue uonejjesul 3 2 Installation
43. 8 5 Setting Tag and Message Explanation Tag Setting A tag of up to 8 characters can be assigned to each channel If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A60 for the expandable model or A01 to A30 for the stand alone model The characters numbers for the tag can be selected by cursor from the displayed row on sub display 1 For details on the number of characters which will be displayed refer to 4 1 on page 4 2 To select whether the tag or channel number are displayed refer to 10 2 on page 10 2 The default settings are all spaces Entering a Message MESSAGE No selection of the message No Up to 20 messages can be entered 5 01 to 20 entering the message The message contents can be entered here using up to 16 characters Characters and numerals can be selected from the menu The default setting is all spaces COPY copying messages The contents of an entered message message No at the left side of the setting can be copied to another message number at the right side of the setting You cannot copy to the same message number Displaying a message A message can be displayed on the main display using the event action function Inserting Deleting a Character or Numeral Press the CLOCK DEL key to delete a set character or numeral The digit at the location of the cursor will be deleted Press the FUNC INS key to insert a charact
44. END ENTER SETUP ABORT ESC ABORT STORE ENTER SET UP end Explanation Selection of Display Update Period DISPLAY Select the display update interval when the operation display mode in the display is AUTO Select 2 3 4 or 5 seconds The default setting is 2 seconds Registration Abortion of Setting Selection Details and Termination of SET UP menu END In order to make the details set selected in the SET UP menu effective a registering operation is necessary In contrast the status can also be brought to that before setting selection without registration abort Terminate the SET UP menu after registering or aborting operation ABORT Registration is aborted and the SET UP menu is terminated STORE After registration the SET UP menu is terminated The default setting is ABORT Select the END menu then press the ENTER key The operation display mode is reached about 10 seconds after pressing the ENTER key 10 20 IM DC100 01E 10 11 Selecting the Temperature Unit from C or F option Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Main menu SETUP l RECORD FSC SETU P TEMP imn Func CO stop INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter iR LOCK FUNC PARM SET PARM DISPLAY TEMP1 Kroa DIET nv d men ser Lenten Enter SET UP menu the
45. No 5 D H OFF ON No 1 No 2 3 No 4 No 5 ON ON OFF ON OFF 0 5 C S C c Adjacent side two gauge method R fixed resistor r resistance of leadwire Rg resistance of strain gauge e output voltage developed across bridge E voltage imposed across bridge DU500 12 DU500 13 DU500 14 Jumper setup switch Rg1 A 0000 No 1 No 2 E Se 5 bun Rg2C V 5 Ret Rg2 OFF N No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 ON ON OFF OFF ON B L S C c c Opposed side two gauge method Rg1 R fixed resistor r resistance of leadwire Rg resistance of strain gauge e output voltage developed across bridge E voltage imposed across bridge SS DU500 12 DU500 13 DU500 14 Rg1 Jumper setup switch Rg1 A 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 V A No 5 Rg2 mt 0 OFF ON No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 ON OFF ON OFF ON wow Rg2 IM DC100 01E 3 6 Connecting the Signal Lines Four gauge method R fixed resistor r resistance
46. SKIP then SKIP will be displayed When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected appears Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then no engineering unit will be displayed PAGE Display for the Sub display 1 and 2 In combination with the page display of the main display data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously on each display Other display modes cannot be selected Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms and Selected Display Mode Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 Measurement Values Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then SKIP will be displayed When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected appears Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then no engineering unit will be displayed IM DC100 01E 4 4 Using the ALARM SEARCH Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation DISP MODE a START ESC FUNC CLOCK CO STOP INS DEL RANGEJ ALARM CP FD COPY MEM SET SET ENTER M FUNC
47. 9 OFF ON OFF OFF ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF 11 OFF ON OFF ON ON 12 OFF ON ON OFF OFF 13 OFF ON ON OFF ON 14 OFF ON ON ON OFF 15 OFF ON ON ON ON 16 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 17 ON OFF OFF OFF ON 18 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 19 ON OFF OFF ON ON 20 ON OFF ON OFF OFF 21 ON OFF ON OFF ON 22 ON OFF ON ON OFF 23 ON OFF ON ON ON 24 ON ON OFF OFF OFF 25 ON ON OFF OFF ON 26 ON ON OFF ON OFF 27 ON ON OFF ON ON 28 ON ON ON OFF OFF 29 ON ON ON OFF ON 30 ON ON ON ON OFF 31 ON ON ON ON ON 3 12 IM DC100 01E 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables For details on connectin the RS 422 A RS 485 connector of the RS 422 A RS 485 communication interface module to a personal computer see IM DC100 11E DC100 Communication Interface User s Manual CAUTION When dis connecting the RS 422 A RS 485 cable turn OFF the power of both the personal computer and the instrument If the power is not turned OFF malfunctions may occur and the internal circuitry may be damaged Ethernet ETHERNET I F Tx yellow QA Base T Dn Switch ON Status LINK yellow PS1 pm CEEE gt OFF Indicator LED STS1 green Lol 1234 STS2 green n 10BASE T Port Connect the RJ 45 modular jack of the twist pair cable connected to the 10BASE T network You can select the following three modes by setting the dip switch Configuration mode A mode in which the IP a
48. C E instrument 100vAc WW uu wa Note 1 Ground the noise filter and the instrument in common Note 2 Since insertion of a noise filter increases the bypass current regarded as leakage current make sure that the leakage current is within the specified value When the noise contains wide frequency components While one point grounding is effective at a low frequency it sometimes forms a loop and has an adverse effect on a high frequency Ex Connecting a power meter and the instrument grounded at one point to an inverter n lt One point Noise source High frequency noise grounding inverter etc The instrument fl lt _ reverse flow pue AC power meter The power meter leaks the high frequency noise component to the ground and that noise flows back to the DC100 side Noise lt Noise source inverter etc AC power meter blocking of reverse flow 4 The instrument Ferrite beads qmd high impedance at high frequency Reverse flow of high frequency to the instrument is thus suppressed nput noise rejection If input noise cannot be rejected by means of one point grounding or 100 ms integration insert capacitor or ferrite beads as they are effective in rejecting pulse noise Step 1 Connect a capacitor between the L input and ground lt T H
49. Equivalent to reading on 20000 full scale Integration time of A D conversion Manual or automatic selection between 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz and 100 ms 10 Hz Except auto switch does not function on the stand alone DC power supply model or the subunit DS400 DS600 of a DC power supply model Types of input Signals from strain gauge or strain gauge sensor Connection methods Single gauge opposed side two gauge adjacent side two gauge or four gauge configuration Configured with built in DIP switches for DU500 12 and DU500 13 Applicable gauge resistance 100 to 1 000 Q The DU500 12 and DU500 13 modules contain 120 Q and 350 0 resistors respectively Bridge voltage Fixed to 2 V DC 45 accuracy with a correction function Gauges 2 00 with scaling capability Balancing Automatic Range of balancing Equivalent to 210 000 ue for single gauge method Measuring ranges and accuracies Measured under the following standards of operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH supply voltage 90 to 250 V AC AC power supply 10 to 32 V DC DC power supply power supply frequency 50 60 Hz X196 AC power supply warm up time 30 minutes minimum no effect on instrument operation due to vibration etc Gauge Method Measuring Range Accuracy Resolution Single gauge 2000 to 2000 ue 0 596 of Range 0 1 pe 20000 to 20000 ue 0 396 of Range 1 pe 200000 to 200000 ug 0 396
50. If a relay contact is connectd to the input of the system components apply the the relay coil Otherwise a counter electromotive force produced across the coil may be induced on the contact side through the relay s internal coupling or coupling between the lines and may cause a malfunctioning of the equipment measure shown in the figure above to AJ Surge suppressor circuit L C 0 01 to 1 uF R 0 3Re to 1Re connect to the relay socket terminal directly Must withstand a voltage of atleast three times the operating voltage Re Relay coil s DC resistance Others isolation from noise source for hot line measurement At low temperatures Hot line Power transistor Vcc Wrap At high temperatures Anti Noise Measures for PC Connection When connecting the instrument to a PC it is recommended to apply ferrite cores e g Mylar isolation film Ly Z Adhesive copper foil tape Adhesion Soldering etc ZCAT3035 1330 from TDK to the interface cable as a noise countering measure Apply a ferrite core on both sides of the cable as shown below When the noise persists apply more ferrite cores Use a shielded cable as the communication cable and make one point grounding for both the instrument and the function ground terminal of a personal computer Personal computer Function grounding terminal
51. Measured computed data writing start Suspension restart of measured computed data writing Measured computed data writing start trigger Writing of measured computed data for one scan Copying to a floppy disk Reading setting data Starting Stopping reports Flag IM DC100 01E 2 13 suonounj 2 6 Other Functions Communication Interface Communication module required Either GP IB interface module the RS 232 C interface module or RS 422 A RS 485 interface module can be connected For details regarding operation and commands refer to IMDC100 11E Retransmission function Retransmission module required With the left span of the measurement or computation channels set to 1 V or 4 mA and the right span set to 5 V or 20 mA the voltage or current corresponding to the measured value or computed result can be output from the retransmission module In addition for values input via a personal communications the voltage or current corresponding to the value specified through the communication input can be output from the retransmission module In this case the value 0 is set to 1 V or4 mA and the value 10000 is set to 5 V or 20 mA Computation Function Option This function is available if the instrument is equipped with the computation function M model This function executes the following computations and displays and saves the results Four arithmetical operations addition subtraction multiplication division square r
52. The input terminals of the module with this input mode unlike those of modules with other input modes are not consistent with a setup screen in terms of the channel number Strain The module for this input mode supports the single gauge single gauge three wire not yet supported by the DU500 14 module adjacent side two gauge opposed side two gauge and four gauge methods If you have connected any new strain gauge or changed the measuring range go through initial balancing before starting measurement Pulses The module for this input mode can measure the number of pulses per second on a channel basis or detect the on off states by means of any variations occurring in the instantaneous value every second Once you connect the pulse input module you can sum up values without the need for the computing function Skipping Input Channels This function allows skipping measurement data saving and display of channels you are not using Measurement data saving and display will not be done for the skipped channels Reference Junction Compensation RJC This function is to be used when measuring temperatures using thermocouples The voltage generated by a thermocouple depends on the temperature of the spot of measurement and the reference junction temperature Reference junction compensation is a function which compensates the temperature at the side of the measurement instrument to 0 degrees C To compensate for the environmental temperat
53. gt Select Setting Parameter l D INT G FILTER RELAY BURN OUT RJC LOCK koa ro corr mem ser enter M FUNC Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O keys If exiting the following lower menu srtting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established Main menu SET UP L__ C O Lower menu f LOCK ENTER KEY LOCK NOT ENTER NOT USE 4 KEY LOCK SET ESC KEY LOCK USE ENTER NOT USE 4 START KEY LOCK ENTER FREE LOCK 4 STOP KEY LOCK ENTER FREE LOCK 4 CLOCK KEY LOCK ENTER FREE LOCK 4 FUNC KEY LOCK ENTER FREE LOCK 4 FD COPY KEY LOCK ENTER FREE LOCK 4 M FUNC KEY LOCK ENTER FREE LOCK 4 A CODE NUMBER 0 ENTER Set the password 4 KEY LOCK SET ESC 10 12 IM DC100 01E 10 7 Setting Key Lock Explanation Selection of Use or
54. sselecting channel number or tag indication page 10 2 aS lt clearing computed data page 12 10 ca lt MATH_STOP gt stopping computation page 12 10 MATH Setting action to be carried out in case of computation C O A error and setting the units for TLOG SUM page 12 14 MATH AC K Clearing incomplete measurement status REPORT setting report format page 10 23 C O indication page 12 10 KEY LOCK ON keylock page 9 14 ALARM selecting alarm interval hysteresis hold page 10 3 C O c INIT BALANCE gt executing initial balancing page 5 12 FILTER selecting filter page 10 3 Oo aI REPORT START starting report making page 10 23 RELAY setting operation mode of relay internal switch A lt 10 5 REPORT STOPo stopping report making page 10 23 KEY LOC K setting keylock page 10 12 O 1 FUNC3 menu BURN OUT setting burn out page 10 8 MODULE INF Displaying module information page 9 16 AD O RJC setting reference junction compensation page 10 8 COMM INF Displaying communications information Paya a page 9 16 m FUNC PARMcCSsetting FUNC FUNC3 menu page 10 14 RE SYSTEMostructuring system modules page 3 27 Cy O a SET PARML gt setting SET SET3 menu 10 17 RAM INIT nitializing RAM page 9 16 A D DISPLAY selecting display update interval page 10 20 O END Registering details set selected with set up menu and terminating set up menu page 10 20
55. 0 5 of SPAN 0 01 V rms for 25 V range 0 1 V rms for 250 V range Effective current 0 5 of SPAN 0 0001 A rms for 0 5 A range 0 001 A rms for 5 A range Active power 1 of SPAN 0 0 01 W for 12 5 W 25 and 37 5 W spans 2 5 of SPAN 0 lt 1 1 lt 30 0 1 W for 125 W 250 W and 375 W spans 5 of SPAN 30 lt I 1 lt 80 1 W for 1 250 W 2 500 W and 3 750 W spans Apparent power 1 of SPAN Oxl o Ix 80 0 01 VA for 12 5 VA 25 V A and 37 5 VA spans 0 1 VA for 125 VA 250 VA and 375 VA spans 1 VA for 1 250 VA 2 500 VA and 3 750 VA spans Reactive power 5 of SPAN 0 xl o I 60 0 01 var for 12 5 var 25 var and 37 5 var spans 2 5 of SPAN 60 xl o Ix 80 0 1 var for 125 var 250 var and 375 var spans 1 var for 1 250 var 2 500 var and 3 750 var spans Frequency 0 1 Hz 0 01 Hz Power factor 2 of SPAN Oxl o Ix 80 0 01 Phase angle 5 deg 0 lt 1 1 lt 80 0 1 deg Measuring ranges Measured Data Item 25 V 0 5A 25 V 5 A 250 V 0 5 A 250 V 5 A Effective voltage 0 00 to 25 00 V rms 0 00 to 25 00 V rms 0 0 to 250 0 Vrms 0 0 to 250 0 V rms Vi i 1 2 3 13 0 Effective current 0 0000 to 0 50000A rms 0 000 to 5 000 Arms 0 0000 to 0 5000 A rms 0 000 to 5 000 A rms Ii i 1 2 3 13 0 Active power 12 50 to 12 50 W 125 0 to 125 0 W 125 0 to 125 0 W 1250 to 1250 W P1 P2 P3 Active power 25 00 to 25 00 W 250 0
56. 131 Media writing operation error Change the media to write to 132 Attempted to format the disk while a file is open Close the file 134 Set up data saving error 135 Internal data error 136 Incorrect copy channel Set the correct copy channel 137 Computation is started while set up data is Stop Computation being saved or read 138 Floppy disk error Use another floppy disk 139 Other media related error 140 Subunits selected which are not connected Specify correct subunits or the power is not supplied 141 Disconnected modules were selected Specify correct modules 143 Modules selected which cannot be calibrated Specify correct modules 144 Calibration done improperly Check electrical connections Calibrate again If the same error occurs again contact your nearest Sales representative 145 Hardware becomes faulty during calibration Turn off the power and then on Calibrate again If the same error occurs again contact your nearest Sales representative 160 While suspending the writing of measured Change the setting computed data using a level action writing start cannot be executed 161 An attempt is made to write the data of one Press the START key to enable writing of scan while writing of the measured computed the measured computed data The scan data data has been suspended will be written 162 While suspending the writing of measured Change the setting computed data using a level action a writing suspension
57. 2 4 Alarm Function 2 5 Standard Computation Functions essent enne nnt nn 2 11 2 0 Other PUDGIIODS s dre peer rete Ie ere ne E UH Peleo de texere bh e re oes ee Ee bea eee eer 2 12 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 3 1 General Precautions for Installation oeisio seeti 3 1 ZN 33 2 IEnstall tion seiss ect RE Rote d UR D RETE 3 2 AN 33 How to Connect the Input Output Modules sese tete 3 6 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables eee tie ORO EE pee ee Re xe et 3 9 3 5 Connecting the Extension Cables only for the use with the DC100 expandable model eere 3 14 IN 3 6 Connecting the Signal Lines tere nie EH RN ERR RAE P LU e RATER TOIT 3 15 AN 3 7 Connecting an Extension Module to Extension Bases sese 3 23 3 8 Connecting SCS I Devices sz eene rg eet ne de ges PAARE aves elas cete rcge tae ee 3 25 A 3 9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON OFF esee 3 27 3 10 Structuring System Modules essere a netten tenete nennen 3 32 3 11 gt Setting the Dateand Time ette e e nes eS sna aoe AA ee 3 33 3 12 Countering NOISe nee t tete a er eie ade tee RU ade Bless 3 34 Chapter 4 Setting the Monitor Mode Display Ad UsmngtheAUTO Display oA HII DRM 4 2 Using the MANUAL Display 43 U singthe PAGE Display erroe REG GR ERE EY EG YO e erede hn E 4 4 Using the ALARM SEA
58. Buon IM DC100 01E 7 5 7 3 Displaying File Information Relevant Keys DISP MODE 22 Gar MEMORY FL_INFO E RECORD 5 ALARM Func CGD stop INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CH SET WR MODE FL INFO DIR DELETE CONV RANGE ALARM 2 Operating Procedure Main menu MEMORY C AD MEMSET ser J ENTER Press the MEM SET key to enter the MEM SET menu Select set using the O keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Lower menu i FL INFO ENTER INFO TYPE DAT DAT DAS RBI 4 INFO FILE AAA AAA BBB CCC DDD 4 gt MODEL EXPANDABLE gt 97 07 07 00 00 00 LENGTH 200000 gt SAMPLE 10 Sec TRIG DATA No 4 gt CHANNEL 001 60 1 ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER gt ON 0010000000008 gt ONM 1 FEL IN FO EN D End of setting ESC Displayed when the report option M3 is installed IM DC100 01E 7 3 Displaying File Info
59. Data save format Binary except ASCII CSV Format is also possible when saving to floppy disk or SCSI device Data capacity Same as measured computed data Writing interval of measured computed values 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 20 30 s 1 2 3 4 5 10 30 60 min Selection of the writing method of measured computed values WRITE 2 TYPE Repeat Start writing the data when the key operation occurs or the trigger condition is met Repeat the process of writing data to 1 file until there is no more area in the memory None The periodic file is not wiriten only for the M3 option Filename when saving data Fixed 14 6 IM DC100 01E 14 1 Specifications of DC100 DS400 DS600 Display Display method VED 5 x 7 dot matrix 3 rows Number of characters Main display 22 large characters 1 row Sub display 1 and 2 40 small characters 2 rows Displayed contents Digital value display data for freely selected channels can be displayed on each row 1 channel per line max 5 rows channel No or tag up to 7 characters alarm search measurement values engineering unit Bargraph display measurement data of the main display are displayed as a bargraph Auxiliary data clock alarm status alarm relay status keylock ON OFF data saving operation file utilization memory utilization Alarms when equipped with Alarm module Number of settings Up to four alarms can be set for each channel Kind of alarms selection from higher limit
60. Low pass filter ON Cut off frequency 50 60Hz 10Hz Minimum measurement interval 3s 12s Normal operating temperature humidity 20 to 80 RH for 10 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 no condensation Magnetic field 400 A m max 50 60 Hz Maximum allowable input voltage CONT Contact input 10 V DC LEVEL Voltage input 60 V DC Common mode noise voltage 250 V AC rms 50 60 Hz Maximum noise between channels 150 V AC rms 50 60 Hz Action At normal operating temperature humidity Voltage input LEVEL Off for a voltage of less than 24 V ON for a voltage 2 4 V or more Contact input CONT On Off of contact Contact resistance 2 or less OFF 100 or more Noise rejection Rejection by integration type A D lowpass filter Cut off frequency 50 60 10 Hz Input resistance CONT Min 10 MQ LEVEL Approx 1 MQ Insulation resistance Min 20 MQ at 500 V DC between the input terminal and ground Dielectric strength Between input terminals 1000 V AC 50 60 Hz for one minute Between an input terminal and ground 1500 V AC 50 60 Hz for one minute Input source resistance LEVEL 2 kQ or lower Power consumption Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed 14 24 IM DC100 01E 14 7 Specifications of Digital Input Module Dimensions Approximately 57 W x 137 H x 68 D mm Weight 0 5 kg Installation Category Overvol
61. Reference Switch display Display update interval DISP key and MODE key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP DISPLAY Chapter 4 Section 10 10 Alarm Settings Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Alarm alarm output relay Alarm interval hysteresis hold Execute alarm acknowledge Reset alarm ALARM key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key FUNC key FUNC key 001 01 1 OFF SET UP ALARM ALARM ACK ALARM RST Section 8 1 Section 10 3 Section 9 3 Section 9 3 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key see section 10 8 IM DC100 01E 13 List of Menus and Set upData Computation Settings Other Settings Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Computation equation SET key SET MATH Section 12 2 Constant SET key SET CONST Section 12 3 Perform computation FUNC key MATH START Section 12 5 Clear measured data and perform FUNC key MATH CLR START Section 12 5 computation Stop computation FUNC key MATH STOP Section 12 5 Clear incomplete measurement FUNC key MATH ACK Section 12 5 status Handling of computation error time Turn ON power while SET UP MATH Section 12 6 axis setting of TLOG SUM pressing the DISP key Group Press the SET key for SET GROUP Section 12 4 about three seconds Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Procedure varies
62. The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established Main menu SETUP SENE OQ Lower menu n ALARM ENTER ALARM RH TIME 8 ENTER 1234567891011 12 13 14 15 4 ALARM RL TIME 8 ENTER 1234567891011 12 13 14 15 4 ALARM HYS 0 5 ENTER 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 ON 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 0 4 ALARM HOLD OFF ENTER OFF ON 4 ALARM SET ESC A D INTG ENTER S UNITO A D INTG AUTO D 4 S UNITO A D INTG AUTO ENTER o AUTO 50Hz 60Hz 100ms A D INTG SET ESC FILTER ENTER FILTER OFF ENTER OFF ON 4 FILTER SET ESC IM DC100 01E 1 0 3 195 sPunes oiseg 10 3 Select Alarm Interval Hysteresis Hold A D Converter Integration Time Filter Selection of Interval for High Limit of Rate Of Change Alarm ALARM RH TIME Set the number of measurement repeats in Interval measurement interval x measurement repeats e Select 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 or 15 The default setting is 8 Selection of Interval for Low Limit of Rate Of Change Alarm ALARM RL TIME The same selection method as the above Selection of Alarm Hysteresis ALARM HYS Applied to high l
63. Wattage calculation Use of M1 computing function Insulation resistance Across input terminals and ground 100 MQ minimum Withstanding voltage Across output terminals and ground 2 300 V AC 50 60 Hz 1 min Normal operating temperature humidity range 0 to 50 C 20 to 80 RH for an ambient temperature range of 0 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C no condensation Power consumption Included in the value of a system s installed main unit or subunit Dimensions Approx 57 W x 137 H x 99 D mm Weight Approx 0 5 kg Installation category overvoltage category CAT II IEC1010 IM DC100 01E 14 19 suoneoyioodg 14 5 Specifications of Strain Input Module Style Number S5 Model Number of Input Channels Terminal Type Shortest Measurement Interval and Values of Built in Resistors Model Number of Input Terminal Shortest Measurement Built in Channels Type Interval Resistor DUS500 12 10 Clamp 0 5 5 120 Q DUS500 13 10 Clamp 0 5 s 350 Q DU500 14 10 NDIS 0 5 5 External Requires the space of two slots Recommended by the Japanese Nondestructive Inspection Association The minimum measurement interval in the case where these modules are mixed with other input modules is the measurement interval of a module having the maximum measurement interval Method of input Non balanced floating input with isolation between channels separated channels Resolution of A D conversion
64. as the input type Selecting the Input Type for Linear Scaling The input type can be selected from the following The default setting is VOLT VOLT DC voltage Refer to page 5 3 TC thermocouple Refer to page 5 3 RTD resistance temperature detector Refer to page 5 3 DI contact Refer to page 5 3 m DC current Refer to page 5 3 Setting the Span Refer to page 5 3 Setting the Scaling Values SCL The left scaling and right scaling values are set following the left and right span values of the span menu The value on the left side of the SCL menu shows the left scaling value and the value on the right side of the SCL menu shows the right scaling value The setting ranges from 30000 to 30000 The decimal point can be set in any position of the scale as shown below Set it when the left scale is set 99 66 66 66 or The default settings are 0 00 for the left span 100 00 for the right span For details on setting the engineering units for linear scaling refer to page 8 5 IM DC100 01E 1eeurqueds ed 1ndu ay 6umes 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel Relevant Keys 001 01 AC 1Ph3W RNG
65. because no change takes place on the computed data If you want the start of computing and report making enabled at the same time use the event action functions to assign both of these instructions to the same event as actions Time Relationship Between the Settings of the REPORT START STOP Menu Items and Report Making The following figure shows the time relationship between the settings of the REPORT START STOP menu items and report making Report n Report 3 Report 2 p E UNT ET Report 1 aA as AC se T Start of report Stop of report making making A A A Time to make report Time to make report Time to make report A denotes the point in time a report is created Data items included in the first round of report making after the start of report making are fewer in number than those included in the second and subsequent rounds of report making The instrument samples data before stopping report making The report created when the instrument stops making reports thus includes those data If the time when report making is started coincides with the time the report is created the start of report making precedes Thus no report is created The data sampled at the same time report making started are included in first round of report 195 sPunes oiseg making The report created when the instrument stops making reports thus incl
66. measurement accuracy digits x scaling span digits measurement span digits 2 digits Numbers below the decimal point are rounded up Example Measurement accuracy when the following settings are made Measuring range 6 VDC Measurement span 1 000 to 5 000 V Scaling span 0 000 to 2 000 Measured value 5 V 0 05 x 5 2 x 20000 4000 2 3 125 Measurement accuracy 4 digits 0 004 V Moving average Moving average results for between 2 to 64 scans are computed IM DC100 01E 14 7 suoneoyioodsg 14 1 Specifications of DC100 DS400 DS600 Communication Function Power Supply Communication interface is possible by GP IB RS 232 C RS422 A RS 485 or Ethernet Rated supply voltage AC power supply 100 to 240 VAC freely selected DC power supply 12 to 28 VDC AC adapter 100 to 240 VAC Operating supply voltage AC power supply 90 to 250 VAC DC power supply 10 to 32 VDC AC adapter 90 to 250 VAC Rated supply frequency AC power supply 50 60 Hz AC adapter 50 60 Hz Power consumption DC100 stand alone model max approx 90 VA AC power supply or AC adapter max approx 30 VA DC power supply DC100 expandable model max approx 90 VA AC power supply or AC adapter max approx 30 VA DC power supply Subunit DS400 max approx 55 VA AC power supply or AC adapter max approx 25 VA DC power supply Subunit DS600 max approx 70 VA AC power supply or AC adapter max approx 2
67. min value x 0 05 TC RTD min value of the measurement range 10 C Linear scaling 32000 or a minimum value of the span max value min value 0 05 When a measurement value exceeds the following value will be displayed DC voltage a maximum value of the measuring range max value min value x 0 05 TC RTD max value of the measurement range 10 C Linear scaling 32000 or a maximum value of the span max value min value x 0 05 If the input module is not connected properly XXXXXX will be displayed While waiting for an input signal OOOOOO will be displayed Engineering Units If the channel number has been selected to appear on the display six characters are used for displaying engineering units If TAG has been selected to appear on the display only three characters are used for displaying units Only the first three characters of the unit setting will then be displayed even if the first character of the unit setting is a space When XXXXXX OOOOOO are displayed as measurement value no engineering unit will be displayed 001 d 0 0467V Measurement value Alarm Difference between channels dChannel No 1st digit unit No will be displayed in the case of optional computation channels 2nd digit slot No 3rd digit channel No in units of 1 Others If you selected SKIP as the input type that c
68. the computation result will differ from the actual value if addition of data is carried out In this case setting TLOG TIME SCALE according to the unit of the input will cause the data measured at measurement intervals to be processed according to the unit of the input For instance if the measurement interval is 2s and input value is 100 m min the computation result will be 30000 after the elapse of one minute since 100 is added every 2 seconds Setting TLOG TIME SCALE to min will cause the measured data to be multiplied by 2s 60s at each measurement interval thus making the result close to the actual input value If this function is set to OFF simple addition of data will be carried out Process of abnormal data during TLOG or CLOG TLOG CH ERROR Used to select the process method for abnormal data obtained during TLOG or CLOG ERROR Abnormal data is processed as a computation error e SKIP Abnormal data is ignored and computation is continued Process of overflow data during TLOG or CLOG TLOG CH OVER Used to select the process method for overflow data obtained during TLOG or CLOG ERROR Overflow data is processed as a computation error SKIP Overflow data is ignored and computation is continued e LIMIT Overflow data is treated as the next data for computation Measurement channels to which linear scaling is applied Specified scaling upper lower limit Measurement channels to which no linear scaling is applied Upp
69. 00 01 00 After the above settings have been made press the M FUNC key Timer 1 will be reset according to the above steps 1 and 2 then computation starts After elapse of one hour computation results will be reset according to step 3 but computation will still continue When a further hour elapses computation results will be reset The above operations will be carried out repeatedly until computation is stopped For a detailed description of the event action function refer to 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 Refer to pages 2 11 and 8 6 for a description of timers Status display during computation The following status symbols are displayed in the sub display 2 lowest display section Computation is in progress Incomplete measurement has occurred If this status occurs frequently reduce the number of equations or make longer the measurement period The number of equations may be too large for computation to be carried out within the specified measurement period Restrictions during computation The following settings cannot be made while computation is in progress Measuring range Computation equation constant Group Inter channel copying with RANGE COPY set to on IM DC100 01E 12 11 uoneinduio2 Iepoi LIN 24 eiqermeAv 12 5 Starting Stopping Computation Main menu SET Examples of Setting Using the Event Action Functions Sum the values me
70. 1 FILE 2 Sections in which data are written Sections in which data are not written although they are measured Note If File End appears counter actions such as MEMRY DATA_WR are not executed FLOPY LD TRGI 3 Reads setup data from the floppy disk SCSIO to SCSI7 only for C5 optional model TRGI to 3 Read set up data from the SCSI device MO ZIP or PD SCSIO to SCSI7 represent the SCSI ID numbers Check the ID numbers of SCSI devices that are connected because ID numbers are displayed even if there are no devices connected to them FLAG only for M1 optional model e F01 to 16 Set the flag number F01 to F16 to 1 F01 to F16 are normally 0 Flags can be placed in computing equations to hold the computed result using a certain event as a trigger or reset to 0 REPORT available if the instrument is equiped with the M3 option START Starts making up a report STOP Stops making up a report Note If in the SETUP mode the report function is set to OFF for all data items you cannot select the action item REPORT IM DC100 01E 9 1 1 pue uonounJ uonoy AueA 3 9 2 Executing Inter channel Copying Relevant Keys SET CH COPY gt Select Setting Parameter IA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC CH COPY Operating Procedure Main menu sET 1 CY CH COPY ENTER Press the SET
71. 10 2 the assigned tag will appear for each channel The first seven characters of the TAG setting will be displayed If the TAG setting consists of only spaces the channel number will be displayed instead If the first character of the TAG setting is a space the 2nd to 8th characters will be displayed Difference between Channels delta One character is used to let you know that difference between channels delta is displayed However it will not be displayed in the case of optional computation channels Only if you selected the difference between channels delta as the input type d will be displayed here Alarms Two characters are used for displaying alarms One channel is used in the case of optional computation channels When an alarm occurs the kind of alarm will be displayed When in one channel several alarms occur at the same time the priority of display becomes gt L gt dH gt dL gt RH gt RL For details on H L dH dL RH and RL alarms refer to page 8 2 IM DC100 01E Aejdsiq spo 34 6umes 4 1 Using the AUTO Display Measurement Values Seven characters are used for displaying the measurement values The decimal point uses up one character Nine characters are used in the case of optional computation channels When a measurement value does not reach the following value will be displayed DC voltage a minimum value of the measuring range max value
72. 13 75 W 137 5 to 137 5 W 137 5 to 137 5 W 1375 to 1375 W P1 P2 P3 Active power 27 50 to 27 50 275 0 to 275 0 W 275 0 to 275 0 W 2750 to 2750 W P13 Active power 41 25 to 41 25 W 412 5 to 412 5 W 412 5 to 412 5 W 4125 to 4125 W PO Apparent power 0 00 to 13 75 0 0to 137 5 VA 0 0to 137 5 VA Oto 1375 VA VAI VA2 VA3 Apparent power 0 00 to 27 50 0 0t0275 0VA 0 0 275 0 VA 0to2750 VA VA13 Apparent power 0 00 to 41 25 0 0to 412 5 0 0t0412 5 0104125 VA VAO Reactive power 0 00 to 13 75 var 0 0 to 137 5 var 0 0to 137 5 var 1375 var Varl Var2 Var3 Reactive power 0 00 to 27 50 var 0 0 to 275 0 var 0 0 to 275 0 var to 2750 var Var13 Reactive power 0 00 to 41 25 var 0 0 to 412 5 var 0 0 to 412 5 var 0to 4125 var Var0 Power factor 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 PFi i 1 2 3 13 0 Phase 89 0 to 89 0 deg 89 0to 89 0 deg 89 0 to 89 0 deg 89 0 to 89 0 deg PHi i 1 2 3 13 0 Frequency 41 00 to 69 00 Hz 41 00 to 69 00 Hz 41 00 to 69 00 Hz 41 00 to 69 00 Hz FREQ The sign of phase values means that the current is lagging behind the voltage Output data items of each wiring method Output Data Item Single phase Single phase Three phase Three phase Three phase VA13 VA1 VA3 VA13 VA13 VAI VA3 Two wire Three wire Three wire Three wir
73. 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MMNME START ago ACT EDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET RST G01 RST G02 RST G03 RST G04 RST G05 RST G06 RST G07 ao ACT EDGE F01 ACT EDGE FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 i F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE REPORT START ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 4 avo ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 LD TRG1LD TRG2LD TRG3 ACT EDGE SCSIO LD TRG1 4 ACT EDGE SCSI0 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE 4 L ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE 4 aV ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE i ACT LEVI avo ACT LEVLIFERG F01 ACT LEVL FLAG FO F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 4 L ACT LEVL REPORT To the next page ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER To the previous page EN From the following page 9 2 IM DC100 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event ALARM actions The MATH menu is displayed only on models with the M1 option or when the pulse module is installed The REPORT menu is displayed only on models with the M3 option The FLAG menu is displayed only on models with the M1 option The SCSIO to SCSI7 me
74. 250 5A V1 002 VA1 SPAN 1250 1250W ESC RECORD oni Coce CES Ce INS DEL KEYLOCI Operating Procedure ser ser Ener Lm runc Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu Using select and or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure press the MODE ESC Key This returns to the first item of the menu Note however that your new settings and selections are canceled selections Setting the Measuring Range and Span Main menu item SKIP AC SCL 4 001 01 AC 1Ph3W D 001 01 AC 1Ph3W D 001701 AC 1Ph3W 5 001 01 AC 1Ph3W ENTER 1Ph2W 1Ph3W SPh3W 2l SPhSW 3l 3Ph4W 4 RNG 250V 5A P1 250V 0 5A 250V 5A 25V 0 5A 25V 5A 4 RNG 250V 5A P1 P1 P3 P13 4 SPAN 125 0 125 0W gt Span Limit 125 0 to 125 0W 4 SET OK configuration complete Setting Linear Scaling Main menu item 001 01 AC 1Ph3W gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 AC 1Ph3W gt Select Channel No C O D D ENTER ENTER ESC Submenu items 001 01 AC 1Ph3W 001 01 SCL AC 1Ph3W Reaching the step showing the message SET OK confirms the latest settings D Press twice um 001 01 SCL AC 1Ph3W 2k 20k 200k 4 RNG 250V 0 5A P13 250V 0 5A 250V 5A
75. 5 oS 12 5 89 8 i 54 437 Ni E ci p m C al 334 48 5 4 unit mm If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm IM DC100 01E 14 43 suoneoyioodg Main Menu Pressing the relevant key a menu the main menu appears in the main display With the instrument equipped with the M1 option pressing the relevant key will cause a menu the main menu to appear in the main display When the alarm output and communications modules are installed and system recognized the main menu indicating that alarm display hold and the relay hold functions are turned on is displayed RANGE menu 001 01 VOLT 2V selecting the type of input setting the span setting linear scaling pages 5 1 and 5 4 SET menu SET L__ CLOCK menu EDIA saving reading set up data chapter 11 97 06 16 03 36 23 setting the date and time page 3 32 CK UNIT seting the engineering unit page 8 5 STOP menu CY lt WRITE STOP sz gt computation chapter 12 C A YES stopping of writing of measured data page 6 1 CON ST setting constant page 12 8 c CO c CO PAUSE suspension of writing of measured data page 6 1 TIMER setting the timer page 8 6 CSKA FD COPY menu LOGIC gt setting event action functions page 9 1 COPY MODE ALL gt copying of measured data page 7 1 A iw MEM SET menu MEMORY CH SET selection of a
76. 8 9 provided earlier in this manual n combination with the level action the corresponding action is repeated alternately between executing and stopping for each set time Selecting edge or level action Edge action EDGE This action is executed when an event is detected Level action LEVL This action is executed when an event is detected When an event is released this action will be canceled IM DC100 01E pue uonounJ uonoy ue 3 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of actions An action that can be selected varies depending on the events and edge or level action See the individual procedures The following describe all actions available ALARM ACK This allows alarm acknowledgment For the applicable functions see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 9 ALARM RST This resets alarms When the RELAY is selected for an event this function cannot be selected For the applicable functions see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 9 TIMER RST This resets timers For the applicable functions see Section 2 6 Other Functions on page 2 11 MSG DISP Displays messages Select any message from the corresponding codes 01 to 20 To cancel the message display press any key MATH available if the instrument is equipped with the MATH function START Starts computation STOP Stops computation RESET Resets computation channel
77. Absolute time 4 1 TIME 1h ENTER One hour interval 4 00 Sets the REF TIME 00 00 ENTER time GET OK setting complete ENTER Setting the EVENT ACTION fields Configure the instrument so it clears computed values at the time set on the timer Main menu SET Lower menu LOGIC ENTER LOGIC BOX No 01 ENTER 01 to 30 4 EVT TIMER 1 ENTER Selects timer 1 i ACT EDGE MATH CLEAR ENTER Pesestne computed value SET OK setting complete ENTER Computation equation CALC TLOG SUM 001 To start computing press the FUNC key and select MATH START from the FUNC menu The values and the behaviors of the event action functions when computing is done with the above configuration are as follows Results EN a aid dp di pad of computing 8 00 9 00 10 00 11 00 00 00 13 00 14 00 15 00 16 00 17 00 Reference time Resetting of computed value Time End of setting Start of computing IM DC100 01E 12 1 3 uoneyndwoy Bunnoexa3 l POW LIN 24 eiqermeAv 12 6 Setting Actions to be Carried out in Case of Computation Error and Setting the Time Axis for TLOG SUM sw E53 FSC SETUP MATH Func crock CD stop INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter SCAN INTVL CH TAG MEM_SET MATH MEDIA 1 UT
78. Channels Terminal Shortest Type Measurement Interval DU400 12 Single phase Clamp 2s one channel each for voltage and current DU400 22 Three phase Clamp 2s three channels each for voltage and current Two terminal pressure clamping Not usable as an equivalent to three modules of single phase use The minimum measurement interval in the case where these modules are mixed with other input modules is the measurement interval of a module having the maximum measurement interval Method of input Transformer isolated input with isolation between channels separated channels Method of measurement and computing Digital multiplication Measuring ranges Voltage 25 or 250 V rms Current 0 5 or5 A In three phase measurement or single phase three wire measurement the current voltage ranges are identical between the respective phases or lines the current voltage ranges are set in common between the respective channels Measured frequency range 45 to 65 Hz Wiring methods 00400 12 Single phase two wire DU400 22 Single phase two wire single phase three wire three phase three wire dual voltage dual current three phase three wire triple voltage triple current and three phase four wire Measured data items For each module a maximum of six data items can be selected from the effective voltage effective current active power apparent power reactive power frequency power factor and phase angle T
79. Computations using the measured data in each input channel can be executed and the results can be displayed saved The computations can be executed using the following operators Type Operator Example Description Addition 001 002 Obtain the sum of the measured data of channel 001 and channel 002 Subtraction 002 001 Obtain the difference of the measured data of channel 002 and channel 001 Multiplication E 003 K1 Multiply constant K1 to the measured data of channel 003 Division 004 K2 Divide the measured data of channel 004 by constant K2 Power xE 005 006 Take the power of measured data of channel 005 with the measured data of channel 006 Absolute value ABSQ ABS 001 Obtain the absolute value of the measured data of channel 001 Square root SQRO SQR 002 Obtain the square root of the measured data of channel 002 Common logarithm LOGO 106 003 Obtain the common logarithm of the measured data of channel 003 Natural Logarithm LNO LN 004 Obtain the natural logarithm of the measured data of channel 004 Exponent EXPO EXP 005 Make the measured data of channel 005 to be x and obtain e can be used as signs as in 001 Logical operators Type Operator Example Description Logical product AND 001AND002 when channel 00120 and channel 00220 0 when channel 001 nonzero and channel 00220 0 when channel 00120 and channel 002 nonzero 0 when both channel 001 and channel
80. DS400 DS600 The subunit DS400 DS600 can be used on a desk top installed on the floor directly panel mounted mounted on DIN rails or rack mounted Always mount the instrument vertically If the power terminals of the unit are screw terminals directly mount the unit on the panel to prevent an electric shock Desk top use or installed on the floor Extend the legs on the bottom of the unit forward as shown below and place the unit vertically If the unit could fall when wired use the through holes of the legs to fix the legs with the attached four 4 mm screws M4 screws Direct panel mounting Following the figure below fix the unit at six places using the attached screws length 16 mm Mounting on DIN rails For the mounting procedure see the instruction manual for DIN rail mounting fitting IM DC100 01E 3 2 Installation Rack mounting The following fittings are supplied for rack mounting For details of the mounting procedure see the instruction manual for rack mounting fitting Name Model Description Rack mounting fitting DV400 011 For DS400 DS600 conforming to ANSI EIA pue uonejeisu IM DC100 01E 3 5 3 3 How to Connect the Input Output Modules AN WARNING When connecting the Input Output modules make sure to turn OFF the power to the DC100 DS400 DS600 to prevent an electric shock or damage to the instrume
81. DT300 21 DT300 31 DT300 41 GP IB module RS 232 C module D sub terminal RS 422 A RS 485 module screw type terminal Ethernet module 10 BASE T DT500 11 DT500 21 1 5 V retransmission module screw type terminal 4 20 mA retransmission module screw type terminal NO Instrument Number and Style number equipment Please quote these numbers when contacting the dealer IM DC100 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories Name Part No Description 1 Power cord see page 3 1 2 Fuse for AC power supply A1350EF 1 Timelag 2 5 A 250 V located in fuse holder when power supply code is 1 and power cord code is D F R or S 3 Fuse for DC power supply A1354EF 1 Timelag 6 3 A 250 V located in fuse holder when power supply code is 2 and power cord code is D F R or S 4 DC power supply terminal A1105JC 1 When power supply is 2 power cord code is connector D R or S 5 AC adapter B9230ZW 1 When power supply is 2 power cord code is D R or S 6 Power cord for AC adapter see followings 1 7 DAQ 32 DP120 13 1 8 Clamp filter A1179MN 1 When power supply is 2 power code is D R or S 9 User s Manual IMDC100 01E 1 This manual 10 User s Manual IMDC100 11E 1 Communication Interface manual 11 User s Manual IMDP12013 61E 1 DAQ 32 manual 1 One of these power cord types is supplied according to the instrument s suffix code 6 One of these power
82. ENTER gt Select Channel No 4 BALANCE MODE EXEC ENTER ABORT EXEC INIT 4 Balancing 4 gt CHANNEL 001 60 ENTER Operating status 001M EEEE EE E E E ooo oo OKN 031 12001 Initializing the Strain Input Channels Main menu item O INIT BALANCE ENTER BALANCE CH 001 010 ENTER gt Select Channel No 4 BALANCE MODE INIT ENTER Operating status ABORT EXEC INIT Indication of the Status of Initial Balancing If you have performed initial balancing the instrument shows whether the initial balancing is successful or not in the following format Using the CS keys you can change the unit number for which you want the status shown gt CHANNEL 001 60 gt o01NMMEEENENENENEN gt OKll 031 LAE AE E TE TE TEL JL IE Starting channel Module by module status indication W successful end of initial balancing unsuccessful end of initial balancing Note This function is disabled during making a report The following operations are stopped when this function is performed Saving data to the memory Computing 5 1 2 IM DC100 01E 5 6 Configuring the Pulse Input Channel 001 01 PULSE RATE a
83. Every hour 1 00 2 00 23 00 24 00 An hour s average maximum and minimum An hour s sum and cumulative sum Instantaneous value at the time of making the report Daily report Every other day preset time A day s average maximum and minimum A day s sum and cumulative sum Instantaneous value at the time of making the report Monthly report Every other month preset time A month s average maximum and minimum A month s sum and cumulative sum Instantaneous value at the time of making the report Note Both report and file writing must be started to create report files Report can be started at the screen that appears when the FUNC key is pressed or by using the event action function File can be started by pressing the START key or by using the event action function On Off of Hourly Daily and Monthly Report Making Configure the on s and off s of hourly daily and monthly report making separately You can set hourly daily and monthly report making all to on at the same time In addition you can set daily and monthly reports to either the standard format ON1 or the enhanced format ON2 of output Note that the enhanced format can only be set for either daily reports or monthly reports File Formats The format of the report file is available in either the standard or enhanced format Hourly reports can have the standard format only Standard format Outputs the results of computing configured on a report channel
84. Files Channels for writing periodic files are the same as the channels for writing measured computed data See Section 6 2 Setting Writing Operation of Periodic File Report Data File Types WRITE2 TYPE Select from the following NONE Does not save either the report file or the periodic file REPORT Saves the report file MEAS2 Saves the periodic file If there are files saved on the built in RAM disk you cannot change the file type Note There are no file alarm function for periodic and report files There are no functions for writing the data over 1 scan for periodic and report files Report files cannot be converted to ASCII and copied Use the separately sold application software DP38011 for this purpose SINGLE mode terminate after writing one file is not available for periodic and report files There are no pretrigger functions for periodic files You cannot pause while writing the report file Report File The type of report file and the date and time to create the report are set with the setup mode See Section 10 11 Setting Conditions for Creating Reports Sampling period SAMPLE You can select a sampling period from the following list The sampling period you select must be an integer multiple of the measuring period 2 sec 3 sec 4 sec 5 sec 10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 60 min If the sampling period is not an integer multiple of the measu
85. For details see page 9 16 Connection including addition or replacement removal of subunits or unit number setting see page 3 6 Mounting including addition or replacement removal of modules 3 8 IM DC100 01E 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables When connecting a personal computer to the instrument via a communication interface observe the following GP IB The GP IB connector of the GP IB communication module is a 24 pin connector of IEEE St d 488 1978 Only use cables that conform to IEEE St d 488 1978 as a communication cable Connection Procedure Connect the cable as shown in the figure below GP IB module i computer Function grounding terminal Ferrite njaa e Je core le 19 Ferrite When connecting the cable take note of the following To reduce noise use two ferrite cores e g ZCAT 3035 1330 from TDK at both ends of the interface cable as shown above Securely tighten the screws which fasten the GP IB cable connector If more than one equipment is connected the same addresses cannot be assigned to different equipment Use only cables of 2 m or less to interconnect each equipment How to Assign an Address The address can be assigned easily by turning the rotary dipswitch as shown in the figure below Any address can be set from 0 to 15 the characters A to F on the dipsw
86. IM DC100 01E 13 5 Calibration Explanation CAL EXEC mode for calibration of a specifie range Items for calibration range tems for the calibration range vary depending on the type of module to be calibrated For use with universal input modules select the items for the calibration range from among the following 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2 V 6 V 20 V 50 V Pt 1 mA Pt 2 mA Pt 1 mA H Pt 2 mA H Cu 2mA When the DC V TC DI input module is selected RTD in the universal input module is not displayed The choice is 20 mA only for mA input modules For strain input modules select from 2 k 20 k 200 k and INIT INIT Set defaults in the A D Adjustment section Calibration is necessary however after execution For digital input modules select form 60 mV and 6 V Displaying error messages The following error messages are displayed e Attempted to remove the module during calibration Or hardware error ERROR 145 nvalid calibrated data ERROR144 Error generation in initial balance when making adjustments ERROR146 Note When calibrating a high precision RTD Pt H do so after calibrating the voltages to maintain accuracy When a calibrated data error appears the error data are stored in memory If ERRORI45 appears turn off the power and then back on to restart operation If the same error occurs again the recorder may be defective If ERROR144 or 146 appears check the electrical connections and inp
87. J 1 200 0 to 1100 0 C However J and L attain an accuracy of T 1 200 0 to 400 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C within the L 2 200 0 to 900 0 C range between 200 to 100 U 2 200 0 to 400 0 C N 3 0 0 to 1300 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C W 4 0 0 to 2315 0 C 0 05 of rdg 1 C KPvsAu7Fe 0 0 to 300 0K 0 05 of rdg 0 7K 0 IK RTD Pt100 1mA 5 200 0 to 600 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C Pt100 2mA 5 200 0 to 250 0 C JPt100 1mA 5 2200 0 to 550 0 C JPt100 2mA 5 200 0 to 250 0 C Pt50 2mA 5 200 0 to 550 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 C Nil00 1mA 6 200 0 to 250 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C SAMA Nil00 1mA DIN 6 60 0 to 180 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C Nil20 1mA 7 70 0 to 200 0 C J263 B 0 0 to 300 0K 0 05 of rdg 0 3K 0 1K Cul0 GE 200 0 to 300 0 C 0 2 of rdg 0 7 C Cul0 L amp N g 01 10 WEED g Cul0 BAILEY 8 High resolution RTD Pt100 1mA 5 140 00 to 150 00 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C Pt100 2mA 5 70 00 to 70 00 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 019C JPt100 1mA 5 140 00 to 150 00 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C JPt100 2mA 5 70 00 to 70 00 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C Contact Voltage input Off for a voltage of less than 2 4 V On for a voltage of 2 4 V or more TTL Contact input On Off of contact R S B K E J T ANSLIEC 584 DIN IEC 584 JIS 1602 1981 6 SAMA DIN 2 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN 43710 7 McGRAW EDISON C
88. J T L U W and KPvsAu7Fe Reference Junction Compensation RJC can be set to either use Internal RJC INT or External RJC EXT per channel For each channel the burnout thermocouple disconnection function can be selected as either on suonounj or off or overtravel of the measured result can be selected for either the positive up or negative down side Resistance Temperature Detector Measurements can be done after selecting the type of resistance temperature detector RTD per channel The available 17 types are Pt100 1 mA Pt100 2 mA JPt100 1 mA JPt100 2 mA Pt50 2 mA 100 1 mA SAMA 100 1 mA DIN Ni120 1 mA J263 B Cul0GE CulOL amp N CulOWEED Cul0BAILEY Pt100 1 mA high resolution Pt100 2 mA high resolution JPt100 1 mA high resolution and JPt100 2 mA high resolution Contact Input The type of contact input can be selected from voltage level input or contact input and data saving can be set ON or OFF per channel In case of the voltage level input a voltage level up to 2 4 V results in saving OFF whereas a voltage level of 2 4 V or more results in saving ON DC Currents DC currents ranging from 20 mA to 20 mA can be measured by means of the built in 100 Q shunt resistors AC Voltages Currents The effective voltage effective current active power reactive power apparent power frequency power factor and phase angle can be measured The measuring range is common to all terminals
89. Module 20 ch DCV TC DI Input Module 137 4 30 ch Universal Input Module 30 ch DCV TC DI Input Module 137 4 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm IM DC100 01E 14 37 suoneoyioodg 14 13 Dimensional Drawings mA input Module unit mm 137 Power Monitor Module 137 Strain Input Module with built in bridge resistors 7 88 114 3 68 one 0 137 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm 1 4 38 IM DC100 01E 14 13 Dimensional Drawings Strain Input Module with NDIS terminals 18 77 114 3 57 0 0 0 Pulse Input Module 68 48 9 e a Jo 137 Digital input Module I 137 4 unit mm If not specified the
90. Module not installed FF Invalid module installed FE Module error XXXXXX Displays error code 80 to FF Retransmission module OUTPUT 50 to 51 Displaying communications information COMM INF When the communication module is recognized as a system module communications information is displayed For details on the communication information see Section 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables on page 3 9 or the separate DC100 Communication Interface User s Manual publication number IM DC100 11E Initialization RAM INIT This initializes information other than the basic information set in Chapter 10 or calibration set in Chapter 13 For details on initial setting see the appropriate sections and explanations AII the files in the internal RAM disk will be lost when the RAM is initialized NO Initialization not executed YES Initializes the information It takes about ten seconds to initialize the information IM DC100 01E 9 17 pue uonounJ uonoy ue 3 9 5 Fail File Alarm Output and Remote Control Signal Input Function See Section 2 6 Other Functions on page 2 12 Connections and Notice See Section 3 6 Connecting the Signal Lines on page 3 15 9 1 8 IM DC100 01E 9 6 Summer Winter Time Relevant Keys Ceto ZS Ga ESC RECOAD SET DST GO INS DEL gt Select Setting
91. One Scan DATA _ WRITE ALARM gt Select Function item DATA_WRITE TIMER_RESET MATH_START MATH kevcoc Operating Procedure Press the FUNC key to enter the FUNC menu To display the FUNC menu from the RANGE ALARM MEM SET SET SET3 menu press the DISP key and enter the Monitor Mode Display Main menu OQ DATA WRITE ENTER Monitor Mode sroP eroe JC INS DEL mem ser ser LEwrER M FUNC Eeo CJD INS DEL stop RANGE ALARM e FD COPY mem ser ser M FUNC IM DC100 01E ejeg 6 1 Starting Stopping the Writing of Data Explanation Starting writing WRITE START In case of the measured computed data if WRITE TRIG is FREE this opens a file and starts writing If writing has been suspended it restarts writing If WRITE TRIG is set to TRIG it is ready for a trigger When writing measured computed data and periodic file or writing measured computed data and report file on the DC100 with the report option the two files are written simultaneously When measured computed data report data or periodic file writing is started the word RECORD indicating the status in the display is lit For the writing operation see Section 6 2 Setting a Writing Channel or W
92. Parameter SYSTEM UNIT TREND TIMER LOGIC DST COPY urs Er mem ser set enter mrunc Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the e keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET 1 1 Lower menu J DST ENTER SET TIME SUMMER ENTER SUMMER WINTER 4 SUMMER 96 05 01 00 ENTER gt Set Data amp Time YY MM DD HH 00 00 4 SET OK ESC gt l Explanation Using this funcion the DC will automatically change its date and time to the summer time or winter time when appropriate If you specify SUMMER the time will be ajusted to one hour later when the specified date and time is reached If you specify WINTER the time will be ajusted to one hour earlier when the specified date and time is reached When the set time is reached the setting will return to its intial value of 50 01 01 00 The value of the years are as follows 00 to 49 stand for the year 2000 to 2049 whereas 50 to 99 stand for the years 1950 to 1999 IM DC100 01E 9 1 9 pue uonounJ uonoy ue 3 10 1 Selecting Scan Interval Go BS Gun SETUP SCAN_INTVL ae Eea QD GD
93. Pollution degree based on IEC 1010 1 2x Warm up time At least 30 minutes after power switch on Installation category is the specification of the impulse withstanding voltage which is also called as overvoltage category Polution degree is the level of foreign body adhesion such as the solid liquid and gas which decreases the withstanding voltage 2 means general indoor atmosphere 14 8 IM DC100 01E 14 1 Specifications of DC100 DS400 DS600 Effect of Operating Conditions Ambient temperature variation for a temperature change of 10 C within 0 1 of rdg 1 digit 0 2 of span 1 digit for Cul0 Q Voltage variation within 1 digit over the range of 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC AC power supply frequency 50 60 Hz 10 to 32 VDC DC power supply External magnetic field variation with respect to AC 50 60 Hz and DC magnetic fields of 400 A m within 0 1 of rdg 10 digits Except for power monitor module within 15 of range Signal source resistance variation with respect to signal source resistance 1 kQ change 1 voltage 2 V range or below within 10 uV 6 V range or above within 0 1 of rdg 2 thermocouple within 10 uV however it must be within 100 uV when burnout is specified 3 RTD variation with respect to change of 10 Q per wire when all wires have the same resistance value indication within 0 1 of rdg 1 digit variation in indication with respect to a difference of 40 mQ
94. Pt100 2 mA s 94 0 to 158 0 F JPt100 1 mA s 220 0 to 302 0 F JPt100 2 mA s 94 0to 158 0 F R S B K E J T ANSI 584 DIN IEC 584 JIS C 1602 1981 2 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN 43710 3 N Nicrosil Nisil IEC 584 DIN IEC 584 4 W W 5 RE W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co 5 Pt50 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1986 Pt100 JIS C 1604 1989 JIS C 1606 1989 IEC 751 DIN IEC 751 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1989 6 SAMA DIN 7 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY 8 Ranges to which accuracy applies Cul0 GE 119 9 to 338 0 F Cul0 L amp N 103 0 to 302 0 F Cul0 WEED 4 0 to 482 0 F Cul0 BAILEY 4 0 to 482 0 F 10 22 IM DC100 01E 10 12 Setting Conditions for Creating Reports SETUP REPORT gt Select Setting Parameter CORD MATH FLOPPY REPORT ALARM A D INTG Keruoc Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure ESC Func Jeroen C Cr INS DEL mem set ser Enter mruwc 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the GSN keys To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure press the MODE ES
95. Q or less Load capacitance 0 22 mF or less Load Inductance 100 mH or less Output accuracy under reference operation conditions 0 2 of Span Calibration period One year Temperature coefficient 0 01 of Span C Highest resolution DT500 11 12 bit approx 1 43 mV DT500 21 12 bit approx 5 86 mA Normal operating temperature humidity 0 to 50 C 20 to 80 RH for 0 to 40 C and 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C no condensation Update interval of output values Same as the measurement interval However depending on the number of modules that are connected the specified computational expression and the condition of the external storage medium the output value may not be updated at the measurement interval Output during SKIP DT500 11 0 05 V or less DT500 21 0 15 mA or less Output filter First order low pass filter in 10 levels time constant in the range 4 ms to 3 s can be applied to the output value with respect to the changes in the measured data computed data and the communication input value Insulation resistance Across output terminals and ground 20 MQ or more 500 VDC Withstand voltage Across output terminals and ground 500 VDC for 1 minute Across channels DT500 11 No insulation across channels COM shared DT500 21 Insulation across channels 500 VDC 1 minute Power consumption Included in the value of the main unit or sub unit Dimensions Approximately 57 W x137 H x68 D mm Weigh
96. When using an adapter for direct wiring to the power supply immediately turn OFF the power supply Also disconnect the power to the equipment under measurement Contact your sales representative or nearest service center Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Power Cord Nothing should be placed on the power cord it should also be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the outlet never pull the cord itself Always hold the plug and pull it If the power cord is damaged contact your dealer for replacement Refer to page 3 for the part number when placing an order General Handling Precautions Never place anything on top of the instrument Never place another instrument or any objects containing water on top of the instrument Otherwise a failure may occur When moving the instrument First turn off the power of the equipment being measured and disconnect the measurement leadwires and the communication cable Then turn the power switch of this instrument OFF and unplug the power cord from the outlet When carrying the instrument securely hold the instrument with both arms and take care not to drop it Ventilation openings Do not block the ventilation openings in order not to raise the internal temperature Electrically charged objects Don t bring electrically charged objects near the input terminals The internal circuitry might be damaged Chemicals Do not pour volatile agents on th
97. a 4 2 4 3 Ambient temperature and humidity eene 3 2 for specifications effect of sss 14 8 AND OR s conversion entren 7 3 to 7 5 Atter atlOH npe Reese eco ae eet Na cleanser tees 2 4 AUTO DEP See Display Aveta TR E ee Backup of set values esser 3 31 3 33 14 10 Bargraph Display ccscesceseesesseseeseeeeeeeeeecseeseeeeeeeeeeaeeneeees 2 1 4 11 Basic Setting SET UP Chapter 10 Baud t le 3 10 3 12 14 29 14 30 ere UT GERE da e o ide e FEET e eA T TOS 2 3 10 9 C CLOGK K6y ctii nenuie nio e no E EGET 3 31 CODE NUMBER sennen See Password Component type 2 rccte riesen 1 1 1 3 Computation re eee eee Pere eee e 2 11 2 1 Computation Computation error ceeeeceesesceseeeeseeseeseeeeseeneeeeeeees 12 14 12 15 Operator 12 1 Equation etie ee nes 12 1 to 12 7 Constant D PE 12 8 Starting stopping clearing resetting 12 10 12 11 Computed data SAVING sco REY 2 5 2 6 Chapter 6 Deletitig ee toe Meo net raider 7 9 11 6 COPYING ED 2 5 7 1 to 7 5 Copying channel information alarm other items range 9 12 9 13 Measured computed data sees 7 1 to 7 5 COPY lock a de ER CREE RP ERE 10 11 ee
98. a system s installed main unit or subunit Dimensions Extension module Approx 57 W x 137 H x 49 5 D mm The dimensions do not include the support feet Extension base Approx 114 8 W x 152 7 H x 43 7 D mm The dimensions do not include the support feet Approx 114 8 W x 171 5 H x 143 3 D mm The dimensions include the support feet Weight Extension module Approx 176 g Extension base Approx 345 g IM DC100 01E 14 33 suoneoyioodg 14 13 Dimensional Drawings DC100 Stand alone Model unit mm 290 Rear Panel ce es Beg ar 2 INQ 101 56 71 z SE O e ml Gan te If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm 14 34 IM DC100 01E 14 13 Dimensional Drawings DC100 Expandable Model unit mm 290 Rear Panel
99. alarm display hold functions see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 9 Alarm reset ALARM RESET When the relay hold function on page 10 7 is set to ON the alarm reset menu appears For the alarm reset functions see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 9 Timer reset TIMER RESET For the timer reset functions see Section 2 6 Other Functions on page 2 11 Computation start MATH START Starts computation For details refer to Chapter 12 Executing Computation Computation clear start MATH CLR START Clears computation results and then re starts computation Computation stop MATH STOP Stops computation Clearing Incomplete Measurement Status MATH ACK Clears the status indication displayed due to incomplete measurement which occurred during computation Keylock function KEY LOCK ON For the keylock functions see Section 2 6 Other Functions on page 2 11 The KEY LOCK ON is displayed after selecting the keylock see page 10 13 Enter a password A CODE NUMBER and then press the ENTER key to actuate the keylock functions The KEY LOCK OFF menu then appears Reenter into the FUNC menu select KEY LOCK OFF and then enter a password A CODE NUMBER Press the ENTER key to release the keylock functions The menu returns to KEY LOCK ON To set a password see page 10 13 When the keylock functions are actuated the KEYLOCK lights up IM DC100 01E 9 15
100. alarms share the same alarm output relay you can select this setting which results in a short de operation of the relay when a second alarm occurs Alarm occurrence Channel 1 Alarm status Channel 2 Alarm occurrence Channel 3 p AS m T Reflash ON IWorking Working Working Alarm output relay Approx 200ms Approx 200ms Reflash OFF 1 09 IM DC100 01E 2 9 2 4 Alarm Function Displaying Alarm Information Alarm Reset Alarm Indicator ALARM Indicator When at least one alarm occurs the ALARM indicator at the right of the display will light Display per Channel In sub display 1 or 2 the alarm statuses of a maximum of 30 channels according to the specifications can be displayed refer to page 2 1 Besides when the measurement value of a channel where an alarm occurred is being displayed the type of alarm will appear between the channel number and the measurement value Channel No Type of alarm Measurement value 001 H 10 000mV Alarm Display Hold Function This function allows the alarm display to remain even when the alarm has already been released This function can be selected ON or OFF and applies to all alarms When the function is set to ON if an alarm occurs the alarm display flashes Alarm Acknowledge Function This function only resets the display and therefore allows you to verify the current alarm statu
101. all spaces The characters numbers can be selected by cursor from the displayed row on sub display 1 An engineering unit can only be assigned to channels to which linear scaling is applied For details concerning entering characters numbers refer to page 8 8 If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function make sure that channel Nos are set between A01 and A60 for the expandable model or A01 and A30 for the stand alone model when specifying the measurement units for computation channels IM DC100 01E 12410 pue ejdsiq Bumes wey Bunnoox3 8 4 Setting the Timer Relevant Keys SET TIMER a C3 ALAR Func C stop gt Select Setting Parameter NS ET MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC RANGE ALARM GB mem ser ser enter mrunc Operating Procedure Main menu Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting SET Lower menu v TIMER ENTER TIMER No 1 ENTER 123456 4 1 TIMER MODE RELATIVE ENTER 4 1 TIME 00 01 00 ENTER gt Set Day amp Time DD HH
102. basis Enhanced format Daily reports the results of computing configured on a report channel basis plus hourly information on the result of computing given at each preset time Monthly reports the results of computing configured on a report channel basis plus daily information on given simultaneously with the preset time for making each report IM DC100 01E 10 25 195 sPunes oiseg 10 12 Setting Conditions for Creating Reports Time to Make Report START TIME Set the time to make a report in the format day of month time Define the day of month field within a 01 28 range and the time field within a 00 23 range Hourly reports The instrument makes reports every hour on the hour 1 00 2 00 23 00 24 00 For cumulative summation it resets the cumulative sum at a preset time Daily reports The instrument makes reports at a preset time or times For cumulative summation it resets the cumulative sum at the preset time of a day Monthly reports The instrument makes reports at a preset time of the day Report Channels There are sixty report channels from RO1 to R60 You can assign channels for measuring objects being computed or computation channels and the type of computing on a report channel basis When making a report of computed data let computing start before letting the report making start Types of Computing Menu Item Data Item for Computing INST Instantaneous value at the time of ma
103. before carrying out formatting Format mode FORMAT MODE Select the format mode from the following 2HD 1 44 MB 1 2 MB 2DD 720 KB Disk Format The format of the MO disk ZIP or PD connected to the SCSI option is semi IBM format Disk Format Mode NORMAL Performs both physical format and logical format QUICK Performs logical format only The time needed to format the disks are as follows Media NORMAL QUICK MO 128 MB About 15 About 5 5 MO 230 MB About 15 min About 5s ZIP About 10 About 5s PD About 30 min About 5s Use MO ZIP PD disks that are formatted on the DC100 Volume name Beginning the volume name with a space is not allowed If this happens an error will occur Note The communication function is disabled during formatting Precautions to be taken during formatting If a floppy disk that contains data is formatted all the data on the disk will be lost Formatting for a floppy disk takes approx one and half minutes Before starting formatting make sure that the write protection tab on the floppy disk is released Note Logical Quick format only clears initializes the directory entries and the FAT If you wish to check for bad sectors do a physical Normal format also If writing data to an external SCSI device having bad sectors no more data can be written to the device As a guideline do a Normal format on disks used for the first time or disks which can no longe
104. cable DV200 002 Length 2 m Extension cable DV200 005 Length 5 m Extension cable DV200 010 Length 10m Extension cable DV200 020 Length 20 m Extension cable DV200 050 Length 50 m Extension cable DV200 100 Length 100 m Extension cable DV200 200 Length 200 m Extension cable DV200 300 Length 300 m Extension cable DV200 400 Length 400 m Extension cable DV200 500 Length 500 m Connecting Procedure Insert the plug of the extension cable in the connector until you hear a click Since both connectors are identical it makes no difference which connector you use Furthermore since both plugs of the cable are identical you may use either end When pulling the plug from the connector gently press the peg of the plug and pull it forward Extension cable Note When the following handling is done it is necessary to carry out system structuring to operate the instrument correctly After executing system structuring confirm the module information For details see page 9 16 Connection including addition or replacement removal of subunits or unit number setting see page 3 6 Mounting including addition or replacement removal of modules Points to Note when Using the Extension Cables The maximum rated temperature is 60 C Never disconnect the extension cable from the connector by pulling the cable since this might damage the signal cable Always hold the plug When wiring the extension cable through a cable duct o
105. channel 1 to P1 active power 1 sets channel 2 to VAI apparent power 1 In addition the configurable parameters being measured varies depending on the wiring method selected See the lists on the next page for more information The respective mnemonics in the lists should be interpreted as noted below Vi i 1 2 3 effective voltage Ii i21 2 3 effective current V13 V14 V3 2 113 11 13 2 VO V1 V2 V3 3 IO 11 12 13 3 Pi i21 2 3 active power Vari i21 2 3 reactive power P13 P1 P3 2 Varl3 Varl Var3 PO P1 P2 P3 Var 0 Varl Var2 Var3 VAi i 1 2 3 apparent power PFi i 1 2 3 power factor VA13 VAI VA3 PF13 P13 PF13 Varl3 P13 VA13 VAO 2 PFO AO PHi i21 2 3 phase FREQ frequency PH13 tan Var13 P13 PHO tan Var0 PO IM DC100 01E 1eeurqueds ed 1ndu ay 6umes 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel Single phase two wire configuration CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 m VA1 v1 n PF1 PH1 Vari PF1 FREQ vi Select from these combinations Single phase three wire three phase three wire configurations dual voltage dual current modules for three phase use only r CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 P1 VA1 V1 n PF1 PH1 P3 VA3 V3 I8 PF3 PH3 P13 VA13 PF13 PH13
106. channel for interchannel differential computations 041 Skipped range in the reference channel for Change the range in the reference channel interchannel differential computations 042 RRJC range in the reference channel for Change the range in the reference channel interchannel differential computations 043 SCALE in range setting in the reference Change the range in the reference channel channel for interchannel differential computations 044 The reference channel for interchannel Change the reference channel number differential computations does not exist 045 The left and right spans are identical Change the span setpoint 046 The left and right scale values are identical Change the scale setpoint value 060 The alarm setting was made in the channel Change ranges where SKIP was set 061 The alarm was set to a channel with ranges Change ranges where alarm setting cannot be set 062 The alarm setpoint is out of range in a Set correct alarm setpoint channel with continuous ranges 063 Relay number set incorrectly Set relay number correctly 080 Invalid character strings for group setting Set character strings correctly 081 Invalid channel in character string for group Set channel correctly setting 089 Copy channel setting error Set the correct channel 090 Attempted to copy a message with the same Change copy source or destination source and destination number 091 Illegal protocol for logic setting Set correct pro
107. cord types is supplied according to the suffix code co SY D F R S UL CSA Standard VDE Standard SAA Standard BS Standard IM DC100 01E 5 Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Accessories Optional Software Name Model Description Extension module DV100 011 Extension base DV100 012 Extension cable DV200 000 Length 0 5 m Extension cable DV200 001 Length 1 m Extension cable DV200 002 Length 2 m Extension cable DV200 005 Length 5 m Extension cable DV200 010 Length 10m Extension cable DV200 020 Length 20 m Extension cable DV200 050 Length 50m Extension cable DV200 100 Length 100 m Extension cable DV200 200 Length 200 m Extension cable DV200 300 Length 300 m Extension cable DV200 400 Length 400 m Extension cable DV200 500 Length 500 m Shunt resistance DV300 011 10 Q for screw Shunt resistance DV300 012 10 Q for clamp Shunt resistance DV300 101 100 Q for screw Shunt resistance DV300 102 100 Q for clamp Shunt resistance DV300 251 250 for screw Shunt resistance DV300 252 250 Q for clamp Rack mount kit DV400 011 for DS400 600 Rack mount kit DV400 015 for DC100 DR130 Strain conversion cable DV450 001 Cable adapter DV250 001 for cable extending AC adapter DV500 001 2 pin inlet w UL CSA cable AC adapter DV500 002 2 pin inlet w VDE cable AC adapter DV500 003 2 pin inlet w SAA cable AC adapter DV500 004 2 pin inlet w BS cable Name Model Description D
108. display 1 and the status display on sub display 2 will appear Sub status on Sub display 2 The following status is displayed on the right edge of Sub display 2 Writing measured computed data files only Writing periodic file or report file only Writing measured computed data file and periodic file or measured computed data file and report file Writing paused Binary copying IM DC100 01E Aejdsiq spo 1011u0Jy eui 6umes 4 2 Using the MANUAL Display Relevant Keys DISP MODE START ESC FUNC CLOCK CO STOP INS DEL RANGE ALARM CA FD COPY MEM SET SET ENTER M FUNC Operating Procedure MANUAL Display for the Main Display 1 Select the main display using the DISP key 2 Select MAN using the MODE key Sub display 1 002 0 0034V 003 0 0920V AMAN 3 Select the required channel using the GS keys Main display 001 0 0057V MANUAL Display for Sub display 1 1 Select sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select MAN using the MODE key Sub display 1 002 0 0422V 003 0 0726V MAN 3 Select the right or left channel using the CC keys A dash will appear below the unit number of the selected channel 4 Select the required channel using the keys Sub display 1 006 0 0892V 003 0 0726V MAN MANUAL Display for Su
109. display shows SKIP ALL SKIP NO ALARM DOOOOO XXXXXX or the bargraph will not appear Only the selected display mode will appear IM DC100 01E 4 11 Aejdsig spo 34 6umes 4 8 Using the ALARM STATUS Display Relevant Keys DISP MODE ES START ESC FUNC cLock CO STOP INS DEL RANGE ALARM CA FD COPY MEM SET sET ENTER M FUNC Operating Procedure ALARM STATUS Display for Sub display 1 1 Select the sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select ALM using the MODE key Sub display 1 001 3 Select the range to displayed in blocks of 10 channels using the e keys Sub display 1 011 ALARM STATUS Display for Sub display 2 1 Select the sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select ALM using the MODE key Sub display 1 and 2 001 WALM 001
110. eq ued HLNOIN L yey sjauueuo jo seiAq 08911 Oe seq 91226 Se1q 9 01 6 seid 08911 0 sei q 818819 s q 91226 oe s q 08911 oe s q 91226 V N ezis alld yey sjeuueuo jo JequinN Ava L 2262 0E seMq 9 19 5 9 6021 0 oe 2292 seiAq 9 19 se1 q 9 6021 oe 2262 oe So Aq 9 19 Se1 q 946021 oe ezis alld yey sjouueuo jo YNOH L oes Z oos Z uiui OL 295 2 pon d Burdues Se1 q 96 01 s q 9LZLZS s q 8ze6Sz ezis WNWIXEN Se1 q IN seiq N Z seq N L yoedeo VY unyng J440 Jouueyy NO 31V LOH pares osje ejep payndwog painseam auoje pue s S9 IJ DIPOL9g 104 Sj UULyYJ JequinwN wnwixeyy 6 15 IM DC100 01E 7 1 Copying a Data File Relevant Keys COPY FILE ALL ALARM gt Select Setting Parameter ALL SELECT STOP KEYLOCI Operating Procedure Press the FD COPY key to enter the FD COPY menu Select set using the GS keys O C _ Main menu A CODE NUMBER 4 COPY MODE ALL ALL SELECT REPORT STOP 4 Operating status COPY MODE SELECT 4
111. for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu Select set using the GS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting SET Lower menu i TAG ENTER 001 01 TAG gt TAG 0 gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 TAG D gt TAG 0 O gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 TAG 12345678 ENTER gt TAG 12345678 L amp 0123456789 ABC KLT 4 SET OK End of setting ESC MESSAGE ENTER No 01 ENTER 4 MSG01 _______ tC ENTER SET OK End of setting ESC S O MSGOls _______________ f 1 amp 0123456789 ABC KLT MESSAGE No 02 LENTER i C O MSG022 ENTER MSGO22 4 8 0123456789 ABC KLT al MESSAGE No 20 ENTER 4 MSG202 A A 3 M IENTER O O ZMsG204 o 49 8 0123456789 ABC KLT MESSAGE No COPY ENTER 4 COPY MSG01 TO MSG01 D 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 4 COPY MSG01 TO MSG02 ENTER 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 IM DC100 01E 8 7 12410 pue ejdsiq Bumes wey Bunnoox3
112. hand value the right span Set the span within the measuring range The measurable limits vary depending on the measuring range you select as shown below 25V 0 5A 25V 5A 250V 0 5A 250V 5A Effective voltage Vi i 1 2 3 13 0 0 00 to 25 00 Vrms 0 00 to 25 00 Vrms 0 0 to 250 0Vrms 0 0 to 250 0Vrms Effective current Ii 1 1 2 3 13 0 0 0000 to 0 5000Arms 0 000 to 5 000Arms 0 0000 to 0 5000Arms 0 000 to 5 000Arms Active power 12 50 to 12 50W 125 0 to 125 0W 125 0 to 125 0W 1250 to 1250W P1 P2 P3 Active power 25 00 to 25 00W 250 0 to 250 0W 250 0 to 250 0W 2500 to 2500W P13 Active power 37 50 to 37 50W 375 0t0 375 0W 375 0 to 375 0W 3750 to 3750W PO Apparent power 0 00 to 12 50VA 0 0 to 125 0VA 0 0 to 125 0VA 0 to 1250VA VAI VA2 VA3 Apparent power 0 00 to 25 00VA 0 0 to 250 0VA 0 0 to 250 0VA 0 to 2500VA VAI3 Apparent power 0 00 to 37 50VA 0 0 to 375 0VA 0 0 to 375 0VA 0 to 3750VA VAO Reactive power Varl Var2 Var3 0 00 to 12 50Var 0 0 to 125 0 Var 0 0 to 125 0 Var 0 to 1250Var Reactive power 0 00 to 25 00Var 0 0 to 250 0 Var 0 0 to 250 0 Var 0 to 2500 Var Var13 Reactive power 0 00 to 37 50Var 0 0 to 375 0 Var 0 0 to 375 0 Var 0 to 3750Var Var0 Power factor 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 PFi i 1 2 3 13 0 Phase 80 0 to 80 0deg 80 0 to 80 0deg
113. in the resistance between conductors max difference between 3 wires approx 0 1 C in case of Pt100 Mounting position Variation when the unit is mounted horizontally on a panel within 0 1 of rdg 1 digit Vibration Variation when sinusoidal vibration of acceleration 0 2 m s is applied for two hours in each of the 3 axial directions over a frequency range of 10 to 60 Hz within 0 1 of rdg 1 digit Transportation and Storage Conditions These refer to the environmental conditions existing during transportation and storage from the time of shipment from the factory until commencement of use and also during transportation and storage in the case of a temporary period of non use If the environmental conditions are specified within the specified range the unit will not incur permanent damage and can be returned to a normal working condition although readjustment may be required in some cases Ambient temperature 20 to 60 C Humidity 5 to 95 RH Vibration 10 to 60 Hz 4 9 m s max Shock 392 m s max in packed condition General Specifications EMC conformity standard Emission Immunity EN55011 Class A EN50082 2 IEC1000 4 2 Electrostatic Discharge Performance Criteria A 8 kV Air 4 kV Contact IEC1000 4 3 Radiated fields Performance Criteria A 80 1000 MHz 10 V m IEC1000 4 4 Fast Transients Performance Criteria B Power line 2 kV others 1 kV IEC1000 4 6 Conducted Disturba
114. input properly Connect module properly Tighten screws properly Isolate RTD from ground Replace disconnected thermocouples Collector connected in parallel with other instruments Do not use burnout functions in other instruments Ground collector and other instruments in the same ground line Do not connect collector in parallel with other instruments for use with dual element TC RJC set improperly for TC input Set RJC properly Other cause Contact Yokogawa Engineering Service Defective display Noise superimposed Lay input wiring far away from noise source Ground collector Ground measurement object Isolate TC from measurement object Use shielded wires for input line Change A D integration times Use input filter Data indicates xxxxxx Input module connected improperly Connect input properly Collector does not work even with operation key pressed Keylock not released Disable keylock functions in setup mode Collector set in remote mode Set collector in local mode Other cause Contact Yokogawa Engineering Service Setting cannot be operated A module is not connected properly Connect properly The extension cable is not connected properly Connect properly There is no system recognition Execute the system structuring menu IM DC100 01E 13 3
115. interval is longer than in case of the 20 ms or 16 7 ms setting The integration effect enables the PWM A D converter to perform the following two functions Rejection of frequency determined by the reciprocal of the integration time and frequencies which are whole multiples of that frequency First order lag filter provided with cut off frequency proportional to the reciprocal of the integration time The following table compares the integration times of 16 7 ms 20 ms and 100 ms Integration time Rejection frequency Cut off frequency Remarks 16 7 ms nx60 Hz approx 19 Hz for 60 Hz 20 0 ms nx50 Hz approx 16 Hz for 50 Hz 100 0 ms nx10 Hz approx 3 2 Hz for both 50 Hz 60 Hz n 1 2 3 As shown in the table the merit of 100 0 ms integration is not only that it applies to both 50 and 60 Hz but also that it provides a low cut off frequency as the first order lag filter and improves the noise rejection ability The following figure shows the calculation values of the NMRR for three integration times and an example of actual measurement of the NMRR for a 100 ms integration signal Calculated values of NMRR Example of actual measurement of NMRR 100 ms 100ms 5 10 20 50 100 200 5 10 20 50 100 200 Frequency Hz Frequency Hz Noise Filter This instrument is equipped with a low pass filter cutoff frequency of 10 Hz for both 50 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz which functions as a way of noi
116. lead wire Input S 1 Thermocouple terminals G iip cade d ORC ILES EH MN CLE Q Ma ae et da UOTE EE ME Copper lead wire Thermocouple Q I e Q eaea ads sep Sag Sa a a ew oc prd Thermocouples of the same type must be used Computing amp Report Function Option This function can send out to a communication line the results of a statistical calculation of data on a specified channel measurement or computation channel in a format predetermined for a preset time date or month The types of computations are averaging mean value maximum and minimum instantaneous value calculation and summation sum cumulative sum Also you can reduce the number of measured data and save the data over a certain time periodic file IM DC100 01E 3 1 General Precautions for Installation Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions Make sure to read the safety precautions described on page 7 before using the instrument for the first time Do not remove any covers from the instrument For internal inspection or adjustment contact your nearest sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual In case of malfunctioning Never continue to use the instrument if there are any symptoms of malfunctioning such as unusual sounds smell or smoke coming from the instrument Immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord
117. leant eee eee eee Re ERR RE 10 20 Selecting the Temperature Unit from C or F Option sees 10 21 IM DC100 01E Contents Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Index 10 12 Setting Conditions for Creating Reports eeseseeseeseeseeseeseeee entente enne ennt tnter 10 23 10 13 Changes the SCSI ID number of the DC100 eese 10 29 10 14 Setting the retransmission filter Working With a File in SET Mode or SETUP Mode Saving Setup Data ee Reo eoe RESP EIE RR SERERE ERST ERE 11 1 11 2 Reading Set up Data esses 11 3 11 3 Displaying the Directory of a Floppy Disk esee 11 5 11 4 Deleting a Data File on a Floppy Disk eese 11 6 11 5 Displaying Floppy Disk Information sees eee nnne nene 11 8 11 6 Formatting a Disk 11 7 Detecting MO ZIP PD Disk Drive sees ennt 11 11 Executing Compuration Available with the M1 Model 12 1 Overview of the Computation Function 12 2 Setting a Computation Equation eese netten nennen nenne tenerent nennen 12 3 Setting d Constants sc oce exe Ue EURO E c REOR ERU E eG EIER 124 Setting Groups coser d e EERERER RE EE TU ETUR REBATE E APR ire 12 5 Starting Stopping Computation eE SEKE EEEE S 12 6 Setting Actions to be Carried out
118. module of the corresponding measurement channel is removed from the unit The power of the unit to which the corresponding channel is connected is removed Terminals DT500 11 DT500 21 CH 1 CH2 swiswzsw BAA 000 e OJleIlolIoJIelellelo olo ANC ag ag ae ag ag ANCA 3 20 IM DC100 01E 3 6 Connecting the Signal Lines Wiring AC Input Signal Lines Power Monitor Module AN AN For hazard prevention ALWAYS provide protective grounding before connecting measuring leadwires When connecting any object being measured ALWAYS turn off the power to the object It is extremely dangerous to connect or disconnect interconnecting leadwires with the power to the object left on Exercise utmost care to avoid connecting any current mode circuit to a voltage input terminal or any voltage mode circuit to a current input terminal Wrong connection may result in damage to the circuit or equipment being measured or the DC100 itself as well as bodily injury Fuses are not built into voltage and current input terminals ALWAYS install a fuse on the interconnecting leadwire Use a fuse that will not permit the voltage or current being measured to exceed the maximum ratings of an AC input module The maximum vol
119. of leadwire Rg resistance of strain gauge e output voltage developed across bridge E voltage imposed across bridge vj 91 Rg3 Poe A Rg2 Rg4 12 Rg3 Rg3 Rg4 Rgi Rg2 Rg3 Rg4 DU500 12 DU500 13 DU500 14 Rg4 R Jumper setup switch 9 93 Q 1 9 Rg1 Rg2 No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 OFF ON No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Note Please apply the optional DV450 001 strain conversion cable when using a bridge box or strain gage without sensor line Wiring Pulse Input Signal Lines to Pulse Input Module Open collector Contact TTL open collector i 9 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 GIAI CH3 CH4 GIGI Wiring Output Signal and Remote Control Signal Lines to DI DO and Alarm modules Terminals NO C NC pr100 11 NO C NC DT200 11 NO C DT200 21 Terminal arrangement 9 NO e FAL e e e output transfer contact cun Ne an output
120. on a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD Also those data are read from the floppy disk MO ZIP or PD to the collector itself The data format is ASCII extension PNL or SET Report Data Report data are saved to the built in RAM disk To save the data to the floppy disk MO ZIP or PD disk copy the data from the RAM disk Data format is binary The file extensions are as follows Hourly daily monthly reports RBI The following types of report data files are available Hourly report The instantaneous value at the time of the report and the average maximum minimum value over an hour or the instantaneous value at the time of the report and the integrated value sum of the integrated values over an hour Daily report The instantaneous value at the time of the report and the average maximum minimum value over a day or the instantaneous value at the time of the report and the integrated value sum of the integrated values over a day Monthly report The instantaneous value at the time of the report and the average maximum minimum value over a month or the instantaneous value at the time of the report and the integrated value sum of the integrated values over a month Periodic File Periodic file is saved to the built in RAM disk To save the data to the floppy disk or MO ZIP PD disk copy the data from the RAM disk Data format is binary DAS extension The data can be also converted to ASCII format when copying to the floppy
121. output module must be the same as or lower than that of the main unit or subunit to which the module is connected 2 the release number of a dedicated software package must be the same or higher than the style number of the main unit or subunit where the package is installed and where it performs control Any equipment software not meeting these requirements might have incompatible areas with your system configuration In this manual equipment of style S8 is explained For unsupported functions as classified by the style number see the next page The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of improvements in the instrument s performance and functions Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual Copying or reproduction of all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation 1st Edition July 1997 2nd Edition November 1997 3rd Edition January 1998 4th Edition November 1998 5th Edition June 2000 6th Edition October 2000 All Rights Reserved Copyright 1997 Yokogawa Electric Corporation
122. pressing the FUNC key for about 3 seconds continuously Select any of the following FUNC displayed in the FUNC menu FUNC3 displayed in the FUNC3 menu OFF not displayed in either menu The default setting is as shown in the operating procedure diagram on pages 10 14 and 10 15 The last operation menu PANEL ALL ITEM is the menu that globally sets all menus However the selection of INIT selects the default setting The COMM INF menu is displayed if the communication module is mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument see page 9 17 The INIT BALANCE menu is displayed if the strain input module is mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument see page 9 17 Note n order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 20 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 20 Different menu items may be displayed depending upon the optional function s installed on the DC100 and the corresponding system configuration 1 0 1 6 IM DC100 01E 10 9 Setting SET SET3 Menu Relevant Keys ESC SETUP SET_PARM Ges OE INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter TY BURN OUT RJC LOCK FUNC_PARM SET_PARMI ios CO ser ser enter mruwc Operating Procedure
123. rach the final display of that setting Main menu 001 01 1 OFF gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 1 OFF gt Select Channel No Lower menu 001 01 1 OFF 5 001 01 1 OFF ENTER 1234 4 SET OK ESC L 001 01 1 H 00 4 001 01 1 H_ 0 00 gt Alarm Limit 0 00 100 00 RELAY FF diee RELAY S01 D RELAY S i ENTER LA ee Explanation Selecting channel Nos Channels Nos A01 to A60 are available for computation channels optional Selecting the alarm item number Set the alarm item number for each channel as follows Select any number from among 1 2 3 and 4 Alarm numbers 1 to 4 can be set for one channel Note If SKIP is selected for the input type or if the computation channels are OFF alarms cannot be set In the following cases the alarm is set to OFF f the input type or measuring range in the related channel is changed f computation channels are turned ON OFF or the computation equation is changed If the span for the linear scaling or linear scaling values is changed f the reference channel for differential computation between channels is changed or f the wiring method of power monitoring channels or the input range is changed Setting the alarm or relay including internal switches gives more functions to this instrument For details see Section 9 1 Setting
124. resumption cannot be executed using the START and STOP keys 163 While the writing of measured computed data Either stop writing the data and then restart is operating writing is tried again or stop writing altogether 164 While copying a file copying is tried again After completing the presently executed copying start the next copying 165 There is no file to be copied After creating a file execute copying 166 There is an attempt to set a writing period Change the setting which is not a multiple of the measuring period 167 Although a file remains in the built in RAM disk Change the saving method after deleting there is an attempt to change the saving method all the files or initializing the RAM disk 168 Attempted to start writing the report file when all Set the report setting to ON in the setup the report settings of the setup mode are set to OFF mode 170 The IP address does not belong to any of Set the correct IP address the classes A B or C 171 There is a hole in the mask or the host Set the correct subnet mask address section is not released 172 The net address section including the subnet Set the correct not address does not match the subnet section of the IP address 173 The host address section of the Set the correct IP address IP address is either all zeroes or all ones ROM ERROR System ROM error Contact your nearest sales representative ROM ERROR System ROM error Contact your nearest sales repr
125. subunit and module to calibrate the instrument on a module basis After completing the calibration turn off the power and then turn it back on when resuming the measurements CAUTION You can use the DISPLAY mode only for a calibration adjustment If it is maladjusted the instrument may become faulty For details please contact your nearest Sales representative Calibration needs selection of asubunit and module and the calibration mode Once the subunit and module have been selected they are no longer selected again as long as the calibration END mode is not executed Input modules to be calibrated Universal input module DCV TC DI input module mA input module Strain input module Retransmission module Calibration mode CAL EXEC mode This mode enables specified ranges to be calibrated DISPLAY mode This mode enables current calibrated values to be displayed END mode This mode enables calibrated values to be stored in the internal nonvolatile memory and terminates the calibration mode If ABORT is selected the calibrated values are not stored in memory Subunit module selection error The following error messages are displayed The specified subunit remains disconnected Or the power supply is not turned on ERROR 140 The specified module remains disconnected ERROR 141 The specified module is such that it cannot be calibrated ERROR 143 Calibrated data error The following
126. that can be used 40 characters Total number of channel numbers and constants 16 Computation error occurs when 16 exceeded and the computed result becomes OVER or OVER Computation channel numbers Computation channel numbers less than the current computation channel number can be used as variables within the computing equation Example A02 001 A01 lt Computation channel numbers greater than or equal to A03 can not be used in this computation Statistical operators TLOG or CLOG can only be used once in 1 computing equation Control of Computing Operation There are two methods control with the FUNC menu and control with the event action function Control with the FUNC menu Start stop of computation and the computed results clear simple clear or computation immediately after clearing is selected can be carried out t 5 2 i 9 i i o n t Stop Clear Start Start Start Control with the event action function Event generation can start stop computation or clear reset the computed results Alarm Up to 4 alarms can be set for each computation channel Only two types of alarm are available upper limit alarm and lower limit alarm L Hysteresis is always set to 0 For a detailed description of alarm setting refer to 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches page 8 1 Event action function The event action function can be used to start st
127. to display the CLOCK menu Using the GS keys changes numerals while using the lt J and keys moves the digit 97 06 16 03 36 23 ENTER gt Set Date amp Time YY MM DD HH MM SS 4 kkk SET OK Explanation Setting the Date and Time Set them in the order of year month day hour minutes seconds e Year Specify the lower two digits of the year Example 1997 97 2000 00 Month day Use two digits for each Hour 00 to 23 Press the ENTER key at the set time to make it effective Note The date and time settings are backed up by the lithium battery in the main unit IM DC100 01E 3 33 pue uonejeisu 3 12 Countering Noise Types and Features of Noise Sources Commercial Power Supply It is necessary to consider both 50 and 60 Hz as noise components It is important to note that a power supply line in which a thyristor or inverter is incorporated functions not only as an energy supply line but also as a noise source line Thyristor SCR A thyristor is used to control power through ON OFF modulation of commercial power by controlling the phase angle O f Voltage 50Hz Load 60Hz O Current Thyristor H Unit heaters etc phase angle Thyristor waveform When the thyristor turns ON or OFF a pulse noise is superimposed on commercial power supply and its pulse width is approx
128. unit number is fixed at I and module location DC100 Stand alone model DC100 Expandable model Module 3 Location numbers 031 to 040 Module 3 Location numbers l31 to 140 Module 2 Location numbers 021 to 030 Module 2 Location numbers l21 to 130 Module 1 Location numbers 011 to 020 Module 1 Location numbers l11 to 120 Module 0 Location numbers 001 to 010 Module 0 Location numbers l01 to 110 Main unit Input modules or retransmission modules cannot beconnected Unit No 1 Module 5 Location numbers 051 to 060 Module 4 Location numbers 041 to 050 Module 3 Location numbers 031 to 040 Module 2 Location numbers 021 to 030 Module 1 Location numbers 011 to 020 Module 0 Location numbers 001 to 010 A oo x Subunit DS600 oF Unit No 0 Cc Module 3 Location numbers 131 to 140 Module 2 Location numbers 121 to 130 Module 1 Location numbers 111 to 120 Module 0 Location numbers 101 to 110 Subunit DS400 Unit No 1 Note When the following handling is done it is necessary to carry out system structuring to operate the instrument correctly After executing system structuring confirm the module information
129. writing start trigger is to be set using the event action function Pretrigger In the trigger mode the measured computed data before generating an event trigger can also be stored in part of a file ro an entire file Writing Period Measured computed data Time interval of data writing writing period can be set The writing period can selected from the measuring period 1 s to 60 min and LOGIC However set the writing period to integer multiples of the scan interval IM DC100 01E 2 3 Data Saving Function Report Data Statistics of measured computed data are saved as report data at the specified times Periodic File Data are written according to the specified sampling period Set whether to save the data hourly one o clock two o clock daily or monthly The time for saving the data daily and monthly is the same as the time for creating report files Selection of Writing Object Data To write all data or to write data from all channels except SKIP only when an alarm is generated in even one channel can be selected Copying Measured Computed Data File Report File and Periodic File For copying data from the built in RAM disk to a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD there are two methods of using key operations and automatic copying using the event action function In automatic copying only binary data apply copying by converting data to ASCII format is not permitted Report data cannot be converted to ASCII and copied W
130. x 236 H x 157 D mm DC100 expandable model approx 338 W x 236 H x 157 D mm Subunit DS400 approx 336 W x 165 H x 100 D mm Subunit DS600 approx 422 W x 176 H x 100 D mm Weight DC100 stand alone model approx 3 5 kg DC100 expandable model approx 3 5 kg with no modules installed Subunit DS400 approx 0 9 kg with 4 input modules installed approx 2 5 kg Subunit DS600 approx 1 1 kg with 6 input modules installed approx 3 5 kg with no modules installed Clock With calendar function Clock accuracy 100ppm However this does not include the delay less than 1 second caused when the power is switched ON and OFF once Fail File alarm output Contact output at rear of main unit one transfer contact Refer to 14 8 for functions specifications Set value backup Lithium battery backup approx 10 years at ambient temperature of 23 C Insulation resistance At least 20 MQ between the power supply and ground between each terminal and ground and between each input terminal measured with 500 VDC Dielectric strength Between AC power supply terminal and ground of DC100 main unit 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute Between input terminal and ground of DC100 main unit 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute Between output terminal and ground of DC100 main unit 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute Between DC power supply terminal and ground of DC100 main unit 1000 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute 14 1 0 IM DC100
131. 0 01E 6 3 Starting Writing Using Event or Action Functions Flow of operation A flow of the operation will be shown taking the case where measured computed data are automatically saved every time an alarm is generated 1 Select the writing channel Menu Item Setting CH SET in MEM SET menu 001 01 CH SET ON Allowed to set the consecutive numbers of channels 2 Set the writing operation In this case set the writing so that data before an alarm generation are acquired within 30 of the file capacity Menu Item Setting WRITE MODE in MEM SET menu WRITE MODE REPEAT WRITE TRIG TRIGGER WRITE DATA ALL WRITE NAME DATE WRITE MEMOR Y LENGTH WRITE LENGTH 1 k WRITE PRE TRIG 30 3 Set an event action Menu Item Setting LOGIC in SET menu LOGIC BOX No EVENT ALARM ACT EDGE MEMORY WR_TRIG 4 Obtain the status ready for trigger by pressing the START key Subsequently the operation to write measured computed data at every alarm generation can be repeated for the number of files in the RAM disk ejegq Buy See Section 6 2 for the settings of 1 and 2 and see the next page for the setting of 3 Also see Section 6 1 for the operation of 4 IM DC100 01E 6 9 6 3 Starting Writing Using Event or Action Functions Example of Event Action Setting Relevant Keys
132. 002 are nonzero 1 Logical sum OR 00106002 when channel 001 20 and channel 00220 0 when channel 001 nonzero and channel 00220 1 when channel 00120 and channel 002 nonzero 1 when both channel 001 and channel 002 are nonzero 1 Exclusive OR XOR 001XORO002 when channel 001 0 and channel 00220 0 when channel 001 nonzero and channel 00220 1 when channel 00120 and channel 002 nonzero 1 when both channel 001 and channel 002 are nonzero 0 Logical negation NOT NOTOO1 when channel 001 0 1 when channel 001 nonzero 0 Relational operators Type Operator Example Description Equal EQ 001 EQ 002 when channel 001 channel 002 1 when channel 001 channel 002 0 Not equal NE 002 NE 001 when channel 001 z channel 002 1 when channel 001 channel 002 0 Greater than 003 GT K1 when channel 003 gt constant K1 1 when channel 003 lt constant K1 0 Less than 004 LT K10 when channel 004 lt constant K10 1 when channel 004 2 constant K10 0 Greater than or GE 003 GE K1 when channel 003 gt constant K1 1 equal to when channel 003 constant K1 0 Less than or 004 LE K10 when channel 004 lt constant K10 1 equal to when channel 004 gt constant K10 0 Specified channel statistical operators Type Operator Example
133. 01 X10 the unit number 3 24 IM DC100 01E 3 8 Connecting SCSI Devices SCSI Specification Option Item Specification Interface Standard SCSI Small Computer System Interface Conforms to ANSI X3 131 1986 Connector type 50 pin half pitch type Electrical Specification Single ended See table below for pin assignments Built in terminator PinNo Pin Signal Pin Signal DAC Serna 3 2 1 Pin No 1 to 12 GND 38 TERMPWR e 13 NC 39 40 CND E RERET EEEE dau 14 to 25 GND 41 ATN 50 49 48 28 2726 26 DBO 42 GND 27 DB1 43 BSY 28 DB2 44 ACK 29 DB3 45 RST 30 DB4 46 MSG 31 DB5 47 SEL 32 DB6 48 C D 33 DB7 49 REQ 34 DBP 50 I O 35 to 37 GND Items needed for connection Connection cable Use a commercially sold cable with a ferrite core on each end with a characteristic impedance of 90 to 132Q Connecting procedure 1 Connect the SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on the back panel 2 Turn on the power switch of the SCSI device and the DC100 Make sure to turn on the SCSI device before turning on the DC100 To format the disk follow the instructions on Section 11 6 Formatting a Disk Recommended SCSI devices MO Drive 3 5 inch 3 5 inch MO drives that connect to SCSI can be used You can read and write to a medium conforming to the ISO format up to 640 MB HS drives are not supported Recommended MO drives 640MO TURBO made by Olympu
134. 01E 14 2 Specifications of Universal Input Module and DCV TC DI Input Module Style Number S2 Model Number of Channels Terminal Type and Minimum Measurement Interval Type Model Number of Minimum measurement DU100 11 10 ch screw 0 55 Universal 10100 12 10 clam 055 input DU100 21 20 ch screw 25 module DUI100 22 20ch clam 2s DUI00 31 30ch Screw 2s DUI100 32 30ch clam 2s DU200 11 10 Screw 0 55 DU200 12 10ch clamp 055 DCV TCIDI FG 200 21 20ch screw 25 Input DU20022 20ch clam 2s module 200 31 30ch screw 25 DU200 32 30ch clam 2s Input method Floating unbalanced input each channel mutually isolated channel independent The RTD range DU100 only has a common potential terminal b A D resolution 20000 A D integration time 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms 10 Hz or auto Except auto switch does not function on the stand alone DC power supply model or the subunit DS400 DS600 of a DC power supply model Minimum measurement interval Filter ON OFF ow pass filter OFF Low pass filter ON AID number integration 20ms 16 7ms 100 20 5 16 7 5 100ms of channels time 50Hz 60Hz 10Hz 50Hz 60Hz 10Hz 10 0 5s 4s 3s 12s 20 2s 5s 4s 15s 30 2s 6s 4s 20s 2s if the power monitor module is installed The minimum measurement interval in a case where thes
135. 0Hz OdB uet EHI a 20dB Slope 20 dB dec 5 40dB Filter ON Filter OFF 60dB 2 amp 80dB Slope 60 dB dec 100dB The maximum value and the minimum value of the measurement range are decided when setting the type of input The difference between the minimum value and maximum value which will be set as a different scale within this measurement range is called the span The minimum value and maximum value are called the left span and right span respectively IM DC100 01E 2 3 Data Saving Function Saving Data and Saving Method Saving Media The instrument can use the following media to save data Built in RAM disk standard 1 MB optional 2 MB or 4 MB 3 5 inch floppy disk e Magneto optical disk MO ZIP or PD when SCSI option 5 is installed Saving Object Data Measured data computed data Setting data set value in SET or SETUP mode Report computed data when report function M3 is installed Periodic file when report function M3 is installed Saving Method Measured data computed data These are saved in the built in RAM disk If they are to be saved on a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD copy the data in the RAM disk to the floppy disk MO ZIP or PD The data format is binary extension DAT When saving on a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD the data may also be copied after being converted to ASCII format extension CSV Setting data These are directly saved
136. 1 4 Ao ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 AQ ACT EDGE MATH START 4 av ACT EDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET RST G01 RST G02 RST G03 RST G04 RST G05 RST G06 RST G07 ACT EDGE FLAG F01 i avo ACT EDGE FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE REPORT START 4 cy ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 4 av ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE SCSI0 LD_TRG1 4 ACT EDGE SCSI0 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE 4 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE 4 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE To the next page ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER To the previous page From the following page IM DC100 01E 9 5 pue uonounJ uonoy ue 3 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event TIMER actions The MATH menu is displayed only on models with the M1 option or when the pulse module is installed The REPORT menu is displayed only on models with M3 option The FLAG menu is displayed only on models with the M1 option The SCSIO to SCSI7 menus are displayed only on models with the C5 opti
137. 1 to A30 For the expandable model a computation equation can be set for up to 60 channels A01 to A60 Setting the mode If A01 60 MODE ON is specified as in the example given on the previous page the same equation can be set for channels A01 to A60 To set an equation for one channel only specify for instance A01 A01 MODE ON Computation equation In addition to operators described on page 12 1 the following symbols can be used in equations Used for setting Used if equations contain constants K01 to K60 or K01 to K30 for the stand alone model Used to specify the computation channel No as in A05 Used to specify communication input data digital data QARS Used to specify the group No for which CLOG computation of data of a group measured on the same time is to be used Restrictions in equations Computation channel No The specified computation equation for a computation channel No can contain only computation channel Nos as variables which are equal to or smaller than the said computation channel No Example 02 001 01 In this example any computation channel No which is equal to or greater than A03 cannot be used Either TLOG or CLOG can be used in an equation Note Each equation must consist of up to 40 characters The total number of channels and constants to be used for each equation is 16 or smaller Setting the span The upper and lower limits of the computed re
138. 14 3 10 RS 232 6 module sere RE EEI 4 1 9 3 10 RS 422 A RS 485 Interface eese tenente 2 14 3 11 RS 422 A RS 485 module sss 4 1 6 3 11 IM DC100 01E Index 5 xepu INDEX RST_GO1 to G07 retraite n E E 9 10 ere t c e I CIERRAN RV TUR ERR ONES 2 3 5 3 S Scan interval 2 5 oet o ERO RE See Interval Screw terminals e ete ese een 4 1 7 1 8 3 16 3 28 SCSI CODFBCCLDB i s RENE RE REN 3 25 CEVICE oae Me E M MR REN NEM 3 25 es e re S PEE e 10 29 SESIO tO SCS snis eterne esee e eee enne e eerte dne dee 9 11 SBEBEKOy cen en on E a mu T Otis 6 10 8 5 to 8 7 8 9 9 1 9 12 9 19 Chapter 11 12 5 12 8 12 9 Set up data START Key eR E RERO gas 6 1 SOP Ditis iei o RAP 3 10 3 12 14 27 14 28 STOP Key ee hee a n ep Ie Ped 6 1 Strain balance Hm 5 10 Strain input module sess 1 2 3 17 5 10 to 5 12 Style Me RD ree etre 2 Sub display 1 2 1 4 1 5 2 1 4 3 Suffix codes sse See Model and Suffix Codes Symbols for conventions eR QURE HE leet tries 9 for Safety See also WARNING 7 System module recognition Of sse 3 30 T Tag 2 5 6 5 Troubleshooting eee A oae 13 3 U Unit NO cane i e tH xe Reds 4 2 4 3 4 13 4 15 Univers
139. 250 V AC AC power supply 10 to 32 V DC DC power supply power supply frequency 50 60Hz within 1 AC power supply warm up time 30 minutes or more vibrations and others not affecting instrument operation However RTD input is not possible for the DCV TC DI input 14 12 module Measurement digital display Maximum Input Type Measurement range Measurement accuracy resolution DC Voltage 20 mV 20 000 to 20 000 mV 0 05 of rdg 5 digits luv 60 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 10 200 mV 200 00 to 200 00 mV 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 10 uV 2N 2 0000 to 2 0000 V 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 100 uV 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 20 V 20 000 to 20 000 V 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 1 mV 50 V 50 00 to 50 00 V 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 10mV TC R 1 0 0 to 1760 0 C 0 05 of rdg 1 C Note that Accuracy However R S 0 to 100 C 3 7 C of reference junction 100 to 300 C 1 5 C compensation is not S 1 0 0 to 1760 0 C B 400 to 600 C 2 C accuracy considered B 1 0 0 to 1820 0 C less than 400 C is not specified K 1 2200 0 to 1370 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C However K attains an accuracy of 0 1 C 0 05 of rdg 1 C within the range between 200 to 100 C E 1 200 0 to 800 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 5 C
140. 25V 0 5A 25V 5A 4 RNG 250V 0 5A P13 P1 P2 P3 P13 4 SPAN 125 0 125 0W gt Span limit 125 0 to 125 0W SCL 0 00 100 00 4 SET OK configuration complete ENTER D ENTER ENTER ENTER ESC IM DC100 01E 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel Explanation Setting the Channel Number This procedure sets the channel number for which you want to show and record the values of a parameter selected from the effective voltage effective current active power reactive power apparent power frequency power factor and phase angle which were calculated using the measured data Therefore it does not correlate with the terminals of an input module In this procedure determine from which channel starting channel to which channel ending channel you want to include in your configuration Starting Channel Number The first three digits on the main display constitute the starting channel number The first digit is the unit number The second digit denotes the module number slot number The configurable range depends on the location where the power monitor module is connected See page 3 8 for more information Ending Channel Number The two digits that follow the starting channel number constitute the ending channel number Normally the starting channel number and the ending channel number should be the same If you want t
141. 5 VA DC power supply Fuse Ratings Main unit For AC power supply Maximum rated voltage current 250 V 2 5 A Type Time lag Standard IEC VDE For DC power supply Maximum rated voltage current 250 V 6 3 A Type Time lag Standard IEC VDE Subunit The fuse may not be replaced by the customer For AC power supply Maximum rated voltage current 250 V 2 A Type Time lag Standard IEC VDE For DC power supply Maximum rated voltage current 250 V 6 3 A Type Time lag Standard UL CSA Normal Operating Conditions Supply voltage AC power supply 90 to 250 V AC DC power supply 10 to 32 V DC AC adapter 90 to 250 V AC Supply frequency 50Hz 2 60Hz 2 Ambient temperature Main unit 5 to 40 C DS400 DS600 Subunit when desk top use floor installed 0 to 50 C when panel mounted DIN rail mounted rack mounted 10 to 60 C However if the subunit DS400 DS600 is a DC power supply model it can be used in the range from 0 C to 50 C regardless of the mounting method Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH for 10 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C no condensation Vibration 10 to 60 Hz 0 2 m S Shock Not allowed Magnetic field 400 A m max 50 60 Hz Position Unit should be positioned left right horizontally or vertically as a general rule Installation location Room Installation height Altitude up to 2 000 m Installation category based on IEC 1010 1 II
142. 80 0 to 80 0deg 80 0 to 80 0deg PHi i 1 2 3 13 0 Frequency 45 00 to 65 00Hz 45 00 to 65 00Hz 45 00 to 65 00Hz 45 00 to 65 00Hz FREQ Precautions in Measurement Input the voltage or current being measured at a level between 10 and 100 of the measuring range The instrument bases its calculations of all other parameters on the frequency of V1 Extra care must therefore be taken when setting the input level of V1 If the input level fails to fall within the given limits there is no guarantee that the measurement of any other parameters will be reliable IM DC100 01E 5 9 1eeurqueds ed 1ndu ay 6umes 5 4 Configuring the Measuring Range and Span or the Linear Scaling of a Strain Input Channel Relevant Keys ODE ESC ALARM INS 001 01 STRAIN 200k rum Eed GO CJ SPAN 20000 20000 10ue gt Select Channel Number mE mem ser ser Entrer mruwc Operating Procedure Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu Using select and or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure press the MODE ESC key This returns to the first item of the menu Note however that your new settings and selections are canceled Reaching the step showing the message SET OK co selections Setting the Measur
143. AQ 32 DP120 13 Same as the standard accessory DAQ Plus DP320 13 IM DC100 01E Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class I instrument provided with terminal for protective grounding The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument If this instrument is used in a manner not sepecified in this manual the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired Also YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The following symbols are used on this instrument AN To avoid injury death of personnel MNO Alternating current or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to an explanation ON power in the User s Manual or Service Manual O OFF power Protective grounding terminal 4 Function grounding terminal This terminal should not be used as a Protective grounding terminal Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions Not complying might result in injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument Power Supply Ensure the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power Power Cord and Plug To prevent an electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged in an outlet with protective grounding terminal Do not inval
144. AUSE D 4 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE D 4 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE ENTER To the next page From the following page IM DC100 01E 9 7 pue uonounJ uonoy ue 3 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event MATCH TIMEJ actions The MATH menu is displayed only on models with the M1 option or when the pulse module is installed The REPORT menu is displayed only on models with the M3 option The FLAG menu is displayed only on models with the M1 option The SCSIO to SCSI7 menus are displayed only on models with the C5 option From the previous page EVT MATCH TIME 1 4 EVT MATCH TIME 1 123 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR 4 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR DATA_WR WR_TRIG START PAUSE CP_FDD _5 50 CP_SCS1 CP_SCS2 CP_SCS3 CP_SCS4 CP SCS5 CP_SCS6 CP_SCS7 crepe AEN ACK O 4 ACT EDGE ALARM RST OQ L ACT EDGE TIMER RST is 6 DISP 01 4 Ao ACT EDGE MSG DISP 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213141516171819 20 ACT EDGE MATH START 4 ACT EDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET RST G01 RST G02 RST 003 RST G04 RST G05 G06 RST G07 ACT EDGE FLAG F01 4 ao ACT EDGE FLAG FO1 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE REPORT START 4 avo ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 ao ACT EDGE FLOPY ED TRG LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE SCSI0 LD_TRG1 ACT EDGE SCSIO LB TRG LD_
145. C key This returns to the first item of the menu Note however that your new settings and selections are canceled Reaching the step showing the message REPORT SET or REPORT CH SET confirms the latest settings selections Sending the Instantaneous Value and Average to a Report Output Main menu SETUP _ _ CK Lower menu d REPORT ENTER MODE SET ENTER SET CH SET PRINT 4 HOURLY REPORT OFF ENTER OFF ON 4 c 2 DAILY REPORT ON1 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 MONTHLY REPORT ON1 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 4 START TIME 01 00 00 ENTER 4 O REPORT SET configuration complete ES C 1 1 MODE CH_SET ENTER SET CH_SET 4 REPORT CH R01 ENTER R01 R02 R03 R04 R05 ROG R07 RO8 ROY R10T 4 RO1 ON 001 D OFF ON 4 R01 0N 001 ENTER 4 CALC MODE AVE ENTER INST AVE SUM 4 REPORT CH SET configuration complete ESC END ENTER SETUP ABORT Ese ABORT STORE ENTER Completes the configuration of the SETUP menu IM DC100 01E 10 23 195 sPunes oiseg 10 12 Setting Conditions for Creating Reports Sending the Sum to a Report Output Main menu SETUP L___ ae OQ Lower menu REPORT ENTER MODE S
146. COPY FILE AAA AAA BBB CCC DDD Tt 4 COPY DRIVE FLOPPY FLOPPY SCSIO SCSI1 SCSI2 SCSI3 SCSI4 SCSI5 SCSI6 SCSI7 4 Operating status Y ES Cole JO Gree INS DEL mem ser ser LEwrER mrunc ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Displayed when copy lock is set at the SET UP menu 2 Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed IM DC100 01E 7 1 H peinduio2 Jo painseayy Buon 7 1 Copying a Data File Explanation Copies measured computed data periodic files and report files from the built in RAM disk to the floppy MO ZIP PD disk The extension for measured computed data file is DAT The extensions for periodic file and report file are DAS and RBI respectively Copying to the Floppy MO ZIP PD Disk Select either to copy all the files or only the specified files ALL Copies all files If a file with the same file name already existon the floppy disk or the SCSI device it is not copied SELECT Copies one measured computed data file or periodic file If there is a file with the same name in the copying destination overwriting is done on the existing file REPORT Copies one report file If there is a file with the same name in the copying destination overwriting is done on the existing file When copying the file name cannot be changed If the floppy disk or SCSI device capacity is nearly reached while copying all files
147. Change Media appears in the main display In such a case copying can be continued by inserting a new floppy disk or SCSI device and pressing any key If Change Media is displayed while copying to the SCSI device inserting a new SCSI device and pressing any key will copy the entire file to the new SCSI device The old device will contain the file that was partially copied Whether the file in the copying source is cancelled or not after copying can be set in the SET UP menu By setting FILE to the event and FDD or CP SCSO to SCST to the action using the event action function the file can automatically be saved on the floppy disk or SCSI device In this case all files are copied except for report data Display During Copying The following status is displayed in sub display 2 the lowest display field Ed File copying in process Note While copying is in process set up data cannot be saved or read Do not leave a floppy disk in the disk drive for a long period Dust may get into the floppy disk drive and cause it to fail When copying a file do not set any item relating to floppy disks MO ZIP or PD such as the viewing of directories The file may not be copied correctly IM DC100 01E 7 2 Copying after Conversion of the Data to ASCII Data Relevant Keys ESC MEMORY CONVERT ics Cren GO Gey INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter
148. Description Maximum value TLOG MAX TLOG MAX 001 Obtain the maximum value of the measured data of channel 001 Minimum value TLOG MINQ TLOG MIN 002 Obtain the minimum value of the measured data of channel 002 value TLOG P PQ _ TLOG P P 003 Obtain the P P value of the measured data of channel 003 Total value TLOG SUM TLOG SUM 004 Obtain the total value of the measured data of channel 004 Average value TLOG AVE TLOG AVE 005 Obtain the average value of the measured data of channel 005 Statistical computation of the measured data from the start of the statistical computation until it is stopped When combining with each of the operators MAX MIN SUMO and AVEC the value that can be specified in is limited to the input channel number or the computation channel number refer to next page Example TLOG MAX A01 IM DC100 01E 12 1 uoneinduio2 Bunnoexa3 Iepoi LIN 24 eiqermeAv 12 1 Overview of the Computation Function Statistical operators within the group Type Operator Example Description Maximum value CLOG MAX CLOG MAX G01 Obtain the maximum value of the measured data of group G01 Minimum value CLOG MINQ CLOG MIN GO2 Obtain the minimum value of the measured data of group G02 Max min value CLOG P P CLOG P P G03 Obtain the P P value of the measured data of group G03 Total value CLOG SUMQ CLOG SUM G04 Obtain the total value of the measu
149. E 4 CK2 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE I ACT LEVL MATH avo 4 IL ACT LEVL FLAG F01 4 ACT LEVL FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 4 ACT LEVL REPORT To the next page START STOP CLEAR RESET RST G01 RST G02 RST_G03 RST G04 RST G05 RST G06 RST_GO7 To the previous page ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER From the following page 9 4 IM DC100 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event FILE END actions The MATH menu is displayed only with models on the M1 option or when the pulse module is installed The REPORT menu is displayed only on models with the M3 option The FLAG menu is displayed only on models with the M1 option The SCSIO to SCSI7 menus are displayed only on models with the C5 option From the previous page EVT FILE END r ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA WR 4 r ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA WR 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR DATA WR WR_TRIG START PAUSE CP FDD CP SCS0 CP SCS1 CP SCS2 CP SCS3 CP SCS4 CP SCS5 CP SCS6 CP SCS7 ACT EDGE ALARM ACK av 4 ACT EDGE ALARM RST ao F ACT EDGE TIMER RST ao ACT EDGE MSG DISP 0
150. ET ENTER SET CH_SET PRINT 4 HOURLY REPORT OFF ENTER OFF ON 4 amp Q gt DAILY REPORT ON1 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 4 MONTHLY REPORT ON1 ENTER OFF ON1 ON2 4 START TIME 01 00 00 ENTER 4 REPORT SET configuration complete ES C MODE CH SET ENTER SET CH SET 4 REPORT CH R01 ENTER R01 R02 R04 ROS RO6 R07 RO8 ROY R107 4 RO1 ON 001 D OFF ON 4 RO1 ON 001 ENTER 4 CALC MODE SUM ENTER INST AVE SUM 4 SUM UNIT sec ENTER INTVL sec min hour day 4 REPORT CH SET configuration complete ESC END ENTER SETUP ABORT ABORT STORE ENTER Completes the configuration of the SETUP menu 10 24 IM DC100 01E 10 12 Setting Conditions for Creating Reports Explanation The instrument calculates and processes an hour s day s or month s worth of measurement or computation data into instantaneous values averages and or sums to creates files on the built in RAM For more information on the communication function see the separate DC100 Communication Interface User s Manual IM DC100 11E You select from the choices in the FUNC menu which opens when you press the FUNC key to start stop report making You can also start stop report making using the event action functions Reports come in the following three types Type Intervals Between Making Reports Data Item for Computing Hourly report
151. Eed GO CJ INS DEL PAN Skin PULSE kenn meam COD mem ser ser Entrer mruwc Operating Procedure Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu Using CY and select and or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure press the MODE ESC key This returns to the first item of the menu Note however that your new settings and selections are canceled Reaching the step showing the message SET OK confirms the latest settings selections Main menu item 001 01 SKIP Submenu items 4 001 01 SKIP O gt 001 01 SKIP 4 pp OK contiguration complete ESC __________901 60 PULSE RATE 4 001 60 PULSE RATE ENTER RATE GATE SPAN _____ 0 _ 30000 aan limit 0 30000 ENTER SCL 0 30000 gt 001 01 PULSE RATE ENTER PULSE FILTER ON OFF ON ENTER 4 SET OK contiguration complete ESC IM DC100 01E 5 1 3 Buieos 1eourq ueds ed 1ndu ay 5 6 Configuring the Pulse Input Channel Explanation Types of Input Pulse Input Measurement PULSE Select this option when measuring pulse input Skip SKIP No measurement is done Measurement Mode Select the mode used in pulse input measurement Use the computing function when summing the coun
152. Event Action Function and Other Functions 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 Setting Event Action FUrICODS once cot en ense eee been ae ee rae eae eae e TES NE 9 1 Ex cuting Inter channel Copying tiet aee cota dece PY Ride Lee Ab dee pite deve 9 12 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Reset Timer Reset and Keylock sse 9 14 Displaying Module Communications Information and Initializing Information 9 16 Fail File Alarm Output and Remote Control Signal 9 18 S mmer Winter Time saa etate ta eo anms teu 9 19 Basic Settings SET UP 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 Selecang Scan Interval i2 CURE AAT EAEE E TEEN 10 1 Selecting Channel Number or Tag Indication eese 10 2 Select Alarm Interval Hysteresis Hold A D Converter Integration Time Filter 10 3 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch eene Setting Burn out Reference Junction Compensation eese Setting File Alarm Time File Overwriting or File Cancellation 5 Setting Key Lock tan pobre rat Setting FUNC EUNC 3 Menu 2 rtr coe iere Mp etaxite detenti et pedea Setting SET SET3 Menu Selecting Display Update Interval Registering Details Set Selected with SET UP Menu and Terminating SETUP
153. Event and Action Functions on page 9 1 IM DC100 01E 8 1 12410 pue ejdsiq Bumes wey Bunnoox3 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches Selecting the type of alarm Select an alarm type for each alarm number from among the following OFF default set No alarm is set H Upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value exceeds the upper limit alarm setpoint L Lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value exceeds the lower limit alarm setpoint RH Rate of change upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value changes in the increasing direction within a certain time rate of change alarm interval and exceeds the upper limit alarm setpoint RL Rate of change lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value changes in the decreasing direction within a certain time rate of change alarm interval and exceeds the lower limit alarm setpoint dH An alarm occurs when the difference between two channels exceeds the upper limit alarm setpoint This only applies to a channel for which interchannel differential computation is selected and can be set as a type of alarm dL An alarm occurs when the difference between two channels exceeds the lower limit alarm setpoint This only applies to a channel for which interchannel differential computation is selected and can be set as a type of alarm For details on the rate of change alarm interva
154. GER Selection of Channel to Be Written CH SET This selects whether to write measured computed data or not for each channel Channel numbers A01 to A60 indicate the channels for computation optional OFF No writing is done ON Writing is done Default is ON Writing Operation Setting WRITE MODE Select the writing operation of the measured computed data from the following NONE SINGLE REPEAT Displayed only when the M3 option is installed Use this mode when saving only report data or periodic files The entire built in RAM disk is used for saving these files If there are files saved on the built in RAM disk you cannot change the operation from NONE to SINGLE or REPEAT or visa versa Data for only one file are written and then the writing operation is terminated After writing data for one file is completed the next file is created and writing starts When the built in RAM disk becomes full the writing operation is terminated However if the WRITE MEMORY setting is when the built in RAM disk becomes full the file with the oldest date and time is deleted and new data items can also be continued to be written by setting FILE ROTATE to ON in the SETUP mode Default setting is REPEAT IM DC100 01E 6 2 Setting a Writing Channel or Writing Operation Use of Trigger WRITE TRIG Writing can be set to be started when an event trigger is generated TRIGGER Writing star
155. GROUP No G01 ENTER G01 G02 G04 G05 G06 G07 Gor 001 010 020 ENTER dl uu EET OK End of setting ESC gt Group setting GROUP GROUP No selection of the group number Up to seven groups can be set G01 to G07 This setting specifies which channel numbers will be included in one group is used for 99 entering a single channel while can be used to enter a range of channels Setting the same channel two or more times in one group causes an error For example if you configure GO1 as 003 001 010 an error will result because 003 is included in this range The default setting is 001 When clearing the group using the action of the event action function select computing channels for the group IM DC100 01E 12 9 uoneyndwoy l POW LIN 24 eiqermeAv 12 5 Starting Stopping Computation Computation can be started and stopped from the FUNC menu or using the event action function Starting stopping computation from the FUNC menu Press the FUNC key and select the desired operation from the FUNC menu MATH START Starts computation This is displayed while computation is not in progress MATH CLR START Clears computation results then re starts computation Computed data i 4 Stop Clear start Start Start MATH STOP Stops computation Computation results are not cleared This is displayed while computation
156. I ID number that is connected Displaying information in the SETUP mode Information can be displayed in the same way as in the SET mode Select MEDIA from the SETUP menu Main menu sETUP C C Lower menu um MEDIA ENTER MEDIA FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SCSIL IDENTIFY 4 FLOPPY INFO ENTER SAVE LOAD DIR DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 gt VOLUME DARWIN ENTER gt MEMORY 20000 BYTES INFO END Eno ESC Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed SCSIO is the SCSI ID number that is connected Explanation Floppy disk MO ZIP or PD information is displayed Floppy disk Volume name and memory utilization are displayed 11 8 IM DC100 01E 11 6 Formatting a Disk Relevant Keys SET MEDIA gt Select Setting Parameter MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC CH CT Cerbo RECORD JO INS DEL CD KEYI Operating Procedure mem ser wrunc Press the SET key to enter the SET menu e Select set using the O keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Formating a floppy disk in the SET mode M
157. II conversion data No Data Length 20 Data length number of data sets Ch Name TURBINE1 TURBINE2 TURBINE5 TURBINE7 TURBINEO 4 Channel No or tag Unit mV Kg mm a We woo LP el n Unit YY MM DD 55 5 _ Data that was triggeg 96 02 14 15 05 07 0 12 520 315 00 23 2 zb m6 96 02 144 15 05 09 0 12 322 315 05 23 52 75 4 9 8 75 9 96 02 TA4T15 05 11 0 l34724 315 20 23 3 4 8 15 9 96 02 14 15 05 13 0 13 2201 3d5 235 29 3m 4 9 15 8 96 02 14 15 05 15 0 43 925 3152060 293 3 4 9 15 8 96 02 14 15 05 17 0 13 227 345 755 2 234 370 4 9 16 0 96 02 14 15 05 19 0 13 928 315 04T7 23 3 b QUy 26 96 02 14 15 05 21 0 12 620 B75 29 0 M 295 13 i zb m sp sp 96 02 14 15 05 23 0 12 643 3t5 01 23452 ope M 96 02 14 15 05 25 0 13 426 345 05 294 2 6 37 96 02 14 15 05 27 0 12 227 345 425 2 9452 I iE 2 k J ih e J Saving date time Data Note The following special ASCII codes will be converted as follows Space 20H Space 20H u gt u 75H gt e 65H 69 Space 20H During copying saving reading set up data cannot be made The communication function remains disabled during copying If you save data using a trigger a T precedes the time attached to the data saved at the time of triggering peinduio2 Jo painseayy
158. ITO MODULE No 0 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V Pt imA PT 9 Enter the rated value in the selected range 10 Press the ENTER key to execute calibration During the calibration the following display appears A D Adjusting S UNITO MODULE No 0 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V Pt 1mA PT 11 After calibration is completed the following display appears CALC END gt S_UNITO MODULE No 0 gt ADJUST RANGE 20mV 12 Press the ENTER key IM DC100 01E 13 9 pue 13 5 Calibration Checking calibrated values in the DISPLAY mode Use this mode only for checking calibrated values In this mode you can adjust a calibrated value but if this value is invalid the instrument may be inoperative For details contact your nearest Sales representative 13 With GS 2 select the DISPLAY mode ADJUST MODE DISPLAY S UNITO MODULE No 0 DISPLAY CAL EXEC END 14 Press the ENTER key to display the calibrated value display items The following shows where the universal input modules are calibrated The calibrating procedures for DC V TC DI input modules are those except RTD in universal input modules Displaying the calibrated values 15 The calibrated values are displayed as follows 20mV ZERO 1 2S UNITO MODULE No 0 gt 16 Press the ENTER key 17 Display the calibrated v
159. Instruction DC100 DARWIN Manual Data Collector IM DC100 01E SS YOKOGAWA IM DC100 01E eth Edition Yokogawa Electric Corporation Foreword Notes Trademarks Revisions Disk No RE11 6th Edition October 2000 YK Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA Data Collector DC100 This User s Manual contains useful information regarding the instrument s functions and operating procedures as well as precautions that should be observed during use To ensure proper use of the instrument please read this manual thoroughly before operating the instrument Keep the manual in a safe place for quick reference whenever a question arises The following manual is provided with the instrument in addition to this manual Manual Name Manual No DC100 Communication Interface IMDC100 11E DC100 Viewer Software IMDP15013 61E DARWIN is a system comprising a number of data acquisition equipment components In the course of system growth new models software various input output modules and optional features are added to the family to enhance the systems expandability and flexibility You can check the versions of your equipment and software by referring to the style number Sn and release number Rn respectively which are shown on the nameplate of the main unit When configuring a system you must confirm that the style number of each component unit and software meets the following requirements 1 the style number of each input
160. Internal memory 2 MB Internal memory 4 MB FDD Diis 3 5 inch floppy disk drive Power Supply zl sss 100 240 VAC SATA 12 28 VDC with AC adapter 100 240 VAC when power cord is D F R or S without AC adapter when power cord is W or Y Power Cord D For AC power supply model when power supply code is 1 3 pin inlet w UL CSA cable Part No A1006WD or DC power supply model when power supply code is 2 2 pin inlet w UL CSA cable Part No B9988Y A BE sss For AC power supply model when power supply code is 1 3 pin inlet w VDE cable Part No A1009WD or DC power supply model when power supply code is 2 2 pin inlet w VDE cable Part No B9988YB Raus For AC power supply model when power supply code is 1 3 pin inlet w SAA cable Part No A1024WD or DC power supply model when power supply code is 2 2 pin inlet w SAA cable Part No B9988YC S nat For AC power supply model when power supply code is 1 3 pin inlet w BS cable Part No A1023WD or DC power supply model when power supply code is 2 2 pin inlet w BS cable Part No B9988YD W 3 pin inlet with screw conversion terminal without AC adapter when power supply code is 1 Ns 2 pin inlet with round type connector without AC adapter when power supply code is 2 Options C5 SCSI Func M1 Mathematical Func M3 Report Func D2 deg F Display Summer Winter Time NO Instrument Number Style number equip
161. M cuc rcr Internal switch 30 Internal switch in units of 1 fixed to 1 Tens of internal switch no 0 to 5 Internal switch S Relation between the Relay Status and Alarm Output Relay If the relay status of the alarm output relays is being displayed a unit number will be displayed in the first character position The slot number in the second character position represents the number of slot in which the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted The alarm output relay is different in relay status display whether it is in the alarm module or in the DI DO module as shown below f an alarm module is mounted ten L or indicators are displayed If the DI DO module is mounted ten or indicators are displayed but the right 8 indicators of ten are not used because two alarm output relays are used Example for mounting the alarm module and the DI DO module module module rDisplay for alarm module for DI IDO 1 hr Not used 011 Alarm relay 21 Alarm relay 20 Relay status of alarm output relay 13 Relay status of alarm output relay 12 Relay status of alarm output relay 11 rac MEE Alarm relay 22 Alarm relay No in units of 1 Slot No Unit No 4 14 IM DC100 01E 4 10 Using the CLOCK Data amp Time Display Relevant Ke
162. MM 00 C O 4 Explanation SET OK End of setting ESC 1 TIMER MODE ABSOLUTE ENTER 1 TIME 1h ENTER 1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min 12min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h 24h 1 REF TIME 00 00 ENTER SET OK End of setting ESC J Setting the Timer TIMER TIMER No You can set up to six timers TIME MODE The following two modes can be selected The default is RELATIVE RELATIVE the number of days hours minutes can be set to any value between 00 days 00 hours 01 minute to 31 days 23 hours and 59 minutes in one minute steps The default setting is 00 days 01 hours and 00 minutes ABSOLUTE the time interval can be selected from the following settings The default setting is 1h Imin 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min 12min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h and 24h The reference time is set by the hour and minutes The default value is 00 hrs 00 min The timer setting is used with the event action function refer to page 9 1 IM DC100 01E 8 5 Setting Tag and Message Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Main menu Crta NOS SET TAG e AM refero CES Cre Select Setting Parameter INS DEL TAG MESSAGE MATCH_TIME MOVE AVE GROUP1 ks mawer aiam 2 mem ser Enter mrunc J Press the SET key
163. ND RELAY SET ESCH RELAY SET ENERG ENTER RELAY 001 01 ENERG D RELAY 001 01 ENERG ENTER RELAY MODE SET ESCL ENERG DE EN 5 SET HOLD ENTER RELAY HOLD OFF ENTER RELAY HOLD SET ESC OFF ON IM DC100 01E 10 5 195 sPunes oiseg 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch Explanation The following operation mode is set to the alarm output relays and the internal switches There are menus which cannot be displayed unless the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument Also there are menus which cannot be set to the internal switches Setting Re failure or Re alarm REFLASH This is a menu which cannot be displayed unless the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument Setting for the internal switches cannot be done REFLASH setting is available for up to six relays Selection of REFLASH number REFLASH RELAY No Select from 1 to 6 Setting of REFLASH relay OFF not set Setting with numerals for 3 characters The first character is the unit number For the second and third characters a number from 01 to 60 can be set but the effective setting range is as shown in the following examples Check which slot the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted in using the model number of mounted modules and their mounted positions Slot numbers are set i
164. NTER SAVE LOAD DIR DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 LOAD FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 Loading 4 Main menu STORE for confirmation Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed SCSILI is the SCSI ID number that is connected Explanation Set up data for the SET mode or SETUP mode is read from a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD Loading methods LOAD MODE in SET mode The following two methods are available DIRECT Set up data is loaded immediately after setting has been completed TRIG 1 TRIG 2 TRIG 3 The event action function is used to load set up data when an event takes place This function is useful if you want to save measured data when an event takes place with different spans One event must be set for the LD_TRIG1 LD_TRIG2 and LD_TRIG3 actions during event action function setting For a detailed description of the event action function refer to 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 Confirming the set up data To confirm the read set up data for the SETUP mode specify SETUP STORE in the same way as the SETUP mode setting Note Setting data saved by a stand alone model cannot be read by an expandable model nor can setting data saved by an expandable model be read by a stand alone model The setting data in the other instrument even if it is the same model cannot be read and set because the setting values become inconsistent if the instrument configuration is different Nor
165. Nonuse of Key Lock Select whether the key lock function is used or not used NOT the key lock function cannot be used USE the key lock function can be used The menu KEY LOCK ON is displayed in the FUNC menu and key lock can be executed For details see Section 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Reset Timer Reset and Keylock page 9 15 The default setting is NOT Selection of Making Key Lock Ineffective Even if key lock is executed the turning on off of the power switch DISP MODE key operation and cursor key operation are effective Other than the above whether operation of the following keys is made effective or locked can be selected Selectable keys START STOP CLOCK FUNC FD COPY and M FUNC Choice FREE made effective LOCK locked The default setting is LOCK Setting Password A CODE NUMBER Set a password for executing resetting key lock Can be set in the range of 0 to 9999 The default setting is 0 Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 20 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 20 IM DC100 01E 10 13 195 sPunes oiseg 10 8 Setting FUNC FUNC3 Menu Relevant Keys ESC SETUP FUNC_PARM a Func Cl INS DEL
166. OMPANY 3 N Nicrosil Nisil IEC 584 DIN IEC 584 8 ranges to which accuracy applies 4 gt W W 5 RE W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co 10 84 4 to 170 0 C 5 Pt50 JIS 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1986 Cul0 L amp N 75 0 to 150 0 C Pt100 JIS C 1604 1989 JIS C 1606 1989 IEC 751 DIN IEC 751 Cul0 WEED 200 0 to 250 0 C JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1989 Cul0 BAILEY 200 0 to 250 0 C Noise rejection Rejection by integration type A D lowpass filter or moving averaging Input resistance Min 10 MQ at 2 V DC or lower thermocouple range Approx 1 MQ at 6 V DC or higher Insulation resistance Min 20 MQ at 500 V DC between the input terminal and ground IM DC100 01E 14 2 Specifications of Universal Input Module and DCV TC DI Input Module Input bias current Max 10 nA Dielectric strength Between input terminals 1000 V AC 50 60 Hz for one minute Between an input terminal and ground 1500 V AC 50 60 Hz for one minute Input source resistance DCV TC 2 or lower RTD 10 Q or lower per line Pt100 Q 5 or lower per line Pt50 Q 1 Q or lower per line Cu10 Q Temperature coefficient Zero 0 01 of range C Full span 0 01 of range C 0 02 of span C for Cul0 Q Thermocouple burnout Detected in a thermocouple range On Off enabled current of 4 WA detectable pulse width of approx 5 ms 2 kQ or lower is considered normal 100 or greater is considered disconnected Detection interval for thermocou
167. P ENTER SD MATH_STOP FUNC ENTER FUNC FUNC3 OFF From the following page To next page 10 14 IM DC100 01E 10 8 Setting FUNC FUNC3 Menu From previous page PANEL MATH_ACK 4 cca MATH ACK FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL KEY LOCK ON 4 KEY LOCK ON FUNC aI FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL KEY LOCK OFF 4 CS 2 KEY LOCK OFF FUNC FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL MODULE INF 4 MODULE INF FUNC3 FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL COMM INF 4 Gy O COMM INF FUNC3 FUNC FUN3 OFF PANEL RE SYSTEM 4 lt 2 RE SYSTEM FUNC3 PANEL RAM INT 4 RAM INT FUNC3 FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL INIT BALANCE A INIT BALANCE FUNC3 al FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL REPORT START CR REPORT START FUNC PANEL REPORT STOP C O REPORT STOP FUNC PANEL ALL ITEM 4 ALL ITEM FUNC FUNC FUNCS OFF INIT ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER To previous page IM DC100 01E 10 15 195 sPunes oiseg 10 8 Setting FUNC FUNC3 Menu Setting FUNC FUNC3 FUNC PARM Select the menu to be displayed by pressing the FUNC key whether in the FUNC menu or the FUNC3 menu The FUNC menu is displayed by pressing the FUNC key at a touch and the FUNC3 menu is displayed by
168. RCH Display sees eee 4 5 Using the FILE UTILIZATION Display sois ar erent 4 6 Using the MEMORY UTILIZATION Display 4 7 Using the BARGRAPH Display cccsessessesscsceeseeseeseeseeseesecseesecsececceeeeeeaesaeeaecaeeseceeeeseaeeaeeaeeneeas 4 8 Using the ALARM STATUS Display 0 cccccccsccssseseeseeseeseeseesecseesecseeeeceeceeceseeaeeaecaecaeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeneees 4 9 Using the RELAY STATUS Display essent nnne tnnt nettes 4 10 Using the CLOCK Data amp Time Display IM DC100 01E Contents Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Setting the Input Type Span Linear Scalling 5 1 5 2 5 3 54 5 5 5 6 5 7 Setting th Type of Inp t and Span ou ee ect aee titer dece levees acie edges eene sees 5 1 Setting Linear Scaling and the Span eee trino to tesis 5 4 Configuring the Input Range and Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel 5 6 Configuring the Measuring Range and Span or the Linear Scaling of a Strain Input Channel 5 10 Performing Initial Balancing Initialization on a Strain Input Channel sss 5 12 Configuring the Pulse Input Channel eese nnne nnen reete nenne 5 13 Assigning the measurement computation channel or communication input channel to be output t
169. RY WR MODE Section 6 2 Copy to floppy disk or SCSI device FD COPY key COPY MODE ALL SELECT Section 7 1 Convert to ASCII data and copy MEM SET key MEMORY CONVERT Section 7 2 Display file information MEM SET key MEMORY FL INFO Section 7 3 Display directory MEM SET key MEMORY DIR Section 7 4 Delete file MEM SET key MEMORY DELETE Section 7 5 Initialize built in RAM disk MEM SET key MEMORY INIT Section 7 6 Set file operation options Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SETUP MRM SET Section 10 6 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FU Settings for Saving Loading Measured data and Floppy Disk SCSI Device NC key see section 10 8 Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Save setup data of SET mode SET key SET MEDIA Section 11 1 Load set up data of SET mode SET key SET MEDIA Section 11 2 Display directory SET key SET MEDIA Section 11 3 Delete file SET key SET MEDIA Section 11 4 Display floppy disk SCSI device SET key SET MEDIA Section 11 5 information Initialize floppy disk SCSI device SET key SET MEDIA Section 11 6 Save set up data of SET UP mode Turn ON power while SETUP MEDIA Section 11 1 Load set up data of SET UP mode pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SETUP MEDIA Section 11 2 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Display Settings Parameters Procedure Selecting menu
170. SET ENTER 001 60 CH SET ON D gt ON 1 gt Select Channel No 001 60 CH SET ON D gt ON 1 gt Select Channel No 4 001 60 CH SET ON ENTER gt ON 1 HEN OFF ON 4 CH SET OK End of setting ESC gt IM DC100 01E ejeg Buia 6 2 Setting a Writing Channel or Writing Operation Main menu Setting the Writing Operation MEMORY C O Lower menu WR_MODE ENTER WRITE MODE SINGLE ENTER NONE REPEAT SINGLE 4 WRITE TRIG TRIGGER ENTER FREE TRIG 4 WRITE DATA ALL ENTER ALL ALARM Explanation 4 m WRITE NAME_MODE DATE ENTER oO DATE SET L WRITE NAME SET ENTER WRITE file ENTER gt Select File Name AAA BBB CCC DDT 4 WRITE file DDDD ENTER 4 WRITE SAMPLE INTVL ENTER INTVL 1sec 2sec 3sec 4sec 5sec 6sec 10T 4 r WRITE MEMORY DIV2 ENTER oO LENGTH DIV2 DIV4 DIV8 DIV16 L WRITE MEMORY LENGTH ENTER WRITE LENGTH 100 ENTER Length limit 10100000 M gt WRITE PRE TRIG 10 ENTER 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 4 WRITE MODE OK End of setting ESC Displays only when NAME MODE is set to SET 2 Displays only when WRITE MEMORY is set to LENGTH 3 Displays only when WRITE TRIG is set to TRIG
171. SET mode Deletes the setting data in the SETUP mode Deletes the measured data converted to ASCII format Acknowledging File Deletion YES NO Note Deletes the file Does not delete the file The communication function is disabled during deletion IM DC100 01E dN LAS 10 LAS e YUM 11 5 Displaying Floppy Disk Information Displaying information in the SET mode Relevant Keys Gato OS ESC RECORD SET MEDIA dem mn GO Carer INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC CH C ans CO set Entrer runc Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the GS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET lt 2 Lower menu MEDIA ENTER MEDIA FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SCSIL IDENTIFY 4 FLOPPY INFO ENTER SAVE LOAD DIR DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 gt VOLUME DARWIN ENTER gt MEMORY 20000 BYTES INFO END Eno ESC Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed SCSILI is the SCS
172. Select Setting Parameter ILOCK FUNC_PARM SET_PARM DISPLAY SCSI 101 ies CO mem ser ser Enter f mrunc Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the GS keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established Main menu SETUP cc D O Lower menu SCSI ID ENTER SCSI ID NUMBER 7 ENTER 201234567 4 SCSI ID SET End of setting ESC END ENTER SETUP ABORT ESC ABORT STORE ENTER SET UP end SCSI ID number Changes the SCSI ID number of the DC100 Set the ID so that it does not overlap with other SCSI devices connected to the DC100 The default value is 7 IM DC100 01E 1 0 29 195 sPunes oiseg 10 14 Setting the retransmission filter Relevant Keys DISP aa ESC SETUP OUTPUT Cred CO rer INS DEL
173. TAG OK End of setting ESC J Selection of Channel Number or Tag CH OR TAG Select the call name for displaying the measured values of either CHANNEL or TAG Select either CHANNEL or TAG However if the TAG setting includes all spaces vacant the channel is displayed regardless of selection The default setting is CHANNEL For the TAG setting see Section 8 5 Setting Tag and Message page 8 7 Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 20 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 20 10 2 IM DC100 01E 10 3 Select Alarm Interval Hysteresis Hold A D Converter Integration Time Filter SETUP ALARM Cue INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter INTVL CH TAG MEM_SET MATH MEDIA ALARM1 TIT Croen QD recor mem ser ser LEwrER mrunc Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key
174. TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE ACT LEVL MENMRY PAUSE ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE To the next page To the previous page ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER From the following page 9 8 IM DC100 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Explanation When an event is detected this menu allows you to set and execute a certain action Selection of logic LOGIC box number Select a box number from among 01 to 30 for storing a combination logic from events to actions If you select the same number as the box number having an event and action already set and set another event and action to that box number the new setting will replace the old one Selection of events EVT Select any event from among the following NONE releases the event action setting REMOTE This menu is displayed only with the DI DO modules that are recognized as system modules see page 9 17 When a remote control signal is applied the action is executed There are 12 control signals available Select any control signal from these numbers for event setting Remote control signal terminal numbers are applicable for this selection See page 3 18 for the remote control terminal numbers ALARM If an alarm occ
175. To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Selection of the logic box and event NONE Main menu SET 1 a9 Lower menu v tU LOGIC ENTER LOGIC BOX NO 01 ENTER 01 30 4 m EVT NONE ENTER SET OK ESC Co To the next page From the following page IM DC100 01E 9 1 pue uonoungJ uonoy ueA 3 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event REMOTEJ actions The REMOTE menu is displayed only on the models with DI DO module The MATH menu is displayed only on models with the M1 option or when the pulse module is installed The REPORT menu is displayed only on models with the M3 option The FLAG menu is displayed only on models with the M1 option The SCSIO to SCSI7 menus are displayed only on models with the C5 option From the previous page EVT REMOTE 1 4 EVT REMOTE 1 123456789101112 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR i e 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR DATA_WR WR_TRIG START PAUSE CP_FDD CP_SCSO CP_SCS1 CP_SCS2 CP_SCS3 CP_SCS4 CP_SCS5 CP_SCS6 CP_SCS7 aloe ACT EDGE ALARM ACK ACT EDGE AEARM RST T ACT EDGEITIMER RST ACT EDGE MM DISP 01 exo ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11121314
176. To prevent electric shock or fire always use the power cable supplied by YOKOGAWA Before connecting the power cord check that the voltage on the supply side matches with the voltage rating of this recorder When not using the instrument for a long time unplug the power cord of the AC adapter Only use the AC adapter from YOKOGAWA Model No DV500 00x Do not put objects on top of the AC adapter or the power cord Also do not let heat generating objects come in contact with them When unplugging the power cord do not pull on the power cord Always hold the plug If the power cord becomes damaged contact your nearest representative listed on the back cover of this manual s X sem n Connecting Procedure 1 Check that the power switch is turned OFF 2 Connect the AC adapter to the AC adapter jack on DC100 Install the clamp filter standard accessory near DC100 of power cord 3 Connect the power cord plug that came with the AC adapter to the power supply connector of the AC adapter 4 Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to a power outlet meeting the following specifications The power outlet should be a three pole type with a protective grounding terminal Rated power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC Operating supply voltage range 90 to 250 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Maximum po
177. UP SET3 ENTER SET SET3 OFF PANEL CH COPY ENTER 4 CK COPY SET ENTER SET SET3 OFF PANEL OUTPUT ENTER 4 o OUTPUT SET ENTER SET SET3 OFF 4 ALL ITEM SET ENTER SET SET3 OFF INIT 10 18 IM DC100 01E 10 9 Setting SET SET3 Menu Explanation Setting SET SET3 SET PARM Select the menu to be displayed by pressing the SET key whether in the SET menu or the SET3 menu The SET menu is displayed by pressing the SET key at a touch and the SET3 menu is displayed by pressing the SET key for about 3 seconds continuously Select any of the following SET displayed in the SET menu SET3 displayed in the SET3 menu OFF not displayed in either menu The default setting is as shown in the operating procedure diagram on pages 10 18 The last operation menu PANEL ALL ITEM is the menu that globally sets all menus However the selection of INIT selects the default setting Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 20 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 20 Different menu items may be displayed depending upon the optional function s
178. V DC 0 1 A with a resistor load 250 V AC 2 A with a resistor load 30 V DC 2 A with a resistor load IM DC100 01E 14 27 suoneoyioodg 14 9 Specifications of DI DO Module DI Remote control of data saving functions Function The following functions can be controlled by contact input alarm acknowledge alarm reset timer reset message display starting stopping clearing resetting computation starting of writing of measured computed sata suspending resuming of writing of measured computed data trigger to start of writing of measured computed data writing of measured computed data for one screen copying of measured computed data onto a floppy disk reading of setting data Input signal No voltage contact open collector driven by a TTL or transistor Rated voltage 0 to 5 V DC input impedance 4 7 kQ 5 V DC pull up Maximum input voltage allowable range 2 to 7 V DC Input conditions ON voltage 0 5 V max 30 mA DC Leakage current at OFF state 0 25 mA max Duration of input signal One second or longer input signal detection interval approx 0 5 seconds 14 28 IM DC100 01E 14 10 Specifications of Communication Interface Module Model Model Description DT300 11 GP IB DT300 21 RS232C DT300 31 RS 422 A RS485 DT300 41 Ethernet General Specifications GP IB Module RS 232 C Module Power consumption Included in the
179. V ZERO 6 V SPAN When the DC V TC DI input module is selected the displayed values for RTD in the universal input module can be modified without influencing operation of the recorder The calibrated values appear in the above order each time the ENTER key is pressed If the MODE key is pressed while displaying calibrated values the display returns to A D calibration mode selection and the calibrated value already adjusted before pressing the MODE key is canceled Calibrated values are effective immediately after terminating the DISPLAY mode Adjustable range and error display Adjustable ranges are 32768 to 32767 except 16384 16384 16385 and 16383 If the following numeric values are set errors appear Outside the range from 32768 to 32767 ERRORO002 16384 or 16384 ERROR145 16385 or 16383 ERROR144 Note In the adjustable ranges if the following are not satisfied the adjusted module is recognized as an error module Calibrated value ZERO 3277 to 3277 ideal value 0 Calibrated value SPAN 29491 to 29491 ideal value 32768 19000 to 21000 for strain input modules ideal value 20000 ZERO calibration 1 29491 21000 32768 20000 29491 19000 Values in are for strain input modules SPAN calibration When calibrating the DCV TC DI input module you need not calibrate an RTD END mode storing a calibrated value in the internal nonvolatile memory Select one of the follo
180. V1 n V3 I3 V13 113 FREQ V1 Var1 PF1 Var3 PF3 Var13 PF13 Select from these combinations Three phase three wire configuration triple voltage triple current modules for three phase use only r Select from either of the two CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 P1 VA1 V1 n PF1 PH1 P2 VA2 V2 12 2 2 V3 I3 PF3 PH3 P13 VA13 PF13 PH13 V1 n v2 12 V3 I3 V13 113 FREQ V1 Vari PF1 Var2 PF2 Var3 PF3 L Var13 PF13 vo 10 V1 n V1 n V1 n V2 l2 v2 l2 V2 12 V3 I3 v3 I3 V3 groups of combinations Three phase four wire configuration modules for three phase use only Select from either of the two CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 PO VAO Vi PFO PHO P1 VAI v2 2 PHI P2 VA2 V3 I3 PF2 PH2 P3 VAS PO VAO PF3 PH3 P1 VAI Vi 1 2 2 v2 12 P3 VA3 v3 I3 FREQ Vi VarO PFO Var1 PF1 Var2 PF2 Var3 PF3 PO VAO P1 VA P2 VA2 P3 VA3 vo 10 Vi H Vi H Vi H v2 12 v2 12 v2 12 13 v3 I3 v3 13 groups of combinations 5 8 IM DC100 01E 5 3 Configuring the Input Range and Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel Setting the Span SPAN Set the left and right spans within the limits of an input range In the SPAN menu item the left hand value is the left span and the right
181. a item for one scan one for each channel is written For the event action see Section 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 Default setting is INTVL f the computation channel is used missing computation measurements may occur depending on the number of computation expressions or measuring period If the computation measurement missing status is displayed make the measuring period longer or decrease the computation expressions When the measuring period is changed the writing period will not equal the measuring period or its integral multiples and is subsequently adjusted to equate with the measuring period Built in RAM Disk Usage WRITE MEMORY Select the built in RAM disk usage from the following LENGTH Determine the file capacity by specifying the number of data items per channel DIV2 DIVA DIV8 or DIV16 Use the RAM disk by dividing the disk area into 2 4 8 or 16 parts If the memory capacity is 4 MB 2 cannot be used Ifa file is saved in the built in RAM disk the usage of the built in RAM disk cannot be changed For this purpose initialize the RAM disk or change the setting after deleting all the files In that case necessary files must be saved on a floppy disk Writing Data Length WRITE LENGTH If WRITE MEMORY is set to LENGTH set the number of data items to be written per channel However a data length exceeding a file size of 1 MB cannot be selected depending on the number of channels
182. a trigger event is reached using the START key or set writing start START to the action after setting 6 10 IM DC100 01E 6 4 Setting Writing Operation of Periodic File Report Data Gue MEMORY WR _ MOD2 Ee CID C3 gt Select Setting Parameter CH_SET WR_MODE WR_MOD2 FL INFO DIR DELT TIT GA reor we ser ser enter wrunc Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the GS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Periodic file Main menu MEMORY far ap a EE CA Lower menu H WR MOD2 ENTER WRITE2 TYPE MEAS2 ENTER NONE REPORT MEAS2 i WRITE2 SAMPLE 2sec ENTER 2sec 3sec 4sec bsec 10sec 20sec 30sec 4 WRITE2 UPTIME HOUR ENTER HOUR DAY MONTH 4 WRITE2 SET OK ESC Report file Main menu MEMORY 1 1 O C Lower menu WR_MOD2 ENTER WRITE2 TYPE REPORT ENTER NONE REPORT MEAS2 i WRITE2 SET OK ESC IM DC100 01E 6 1 1 ejeg 6 4 Setting Writing Operation of Periodic File Report Data Explanation Channels for Writing Periodic
183. according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key see section 10 8 Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference Timer SET key SET TIMER Section 8 4 Event Action SET key SET LOGIC Section 9 1 Copy between channels SET key SET CH COPY Section 9 2 Tag Press the SET key for SET TAG Section 8 5 about three seconds Message Press the SET key for SET MESSAGE Section 8 5 about three seconds Match time Press the SET key for SET MATCH TIME Section 8 6 Relay internal switch operation mode Burnout Reference junction compensation File alarm time Key lock Menu configuration of FUNC key Menu configuration of SET key Report function Retransmission filter about three seconds Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key SET UP RELAY SET UP BURN OUT SET UP RJC SET UP MEM SET SET UP LOCK SET UP FUNC PARM SET UP SET PARM SET UP REPORT SET UP OUTPUT Section 10 4 Section 10 5 Section 10 5 Section 10 6 Section 10 7 Section 10 8 Section 10 9 Section 10 12 Section 10 14 14 Reset timer FUNC key TIMER RESET Section 9 3 Lock ke
184. ail output 1 ch file alarm output and remote control signal input for data saving functions 12 points Alarm modules 4 ch output transfer contact or 10 ch output make contact Number of modules which can be connected 4 Communication module DI DO module alarm module not more than four Subunit Input modules universal DC voltage thermocouple RTD contact DCV TC DI mA Power monitor Strain Pulse Alarm modules 4 ch output transfer contact or 10 ch output make contact DI DO modules 2 ch alarm output transfer contact 1 ch fail output 1 ch file alarm output and remote control signal input for data saving functions 12 points Number of modules which can be connected to one DS400 4 Input module alarm module DI DO module max four Number of modules which can be connected to one DS600 6 Input module alarm module DI DO module max six Only one DI DO module can be connected to one system Input Measurement range accuracy resolution Refer to 14 2 on page 14 10 Measurement interval Selectable from 0 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 20 30 60 s with 10 ch input module filter OFF A D integration period of 20 ms 50 Hz or 16 7 ms 60 Hz Stand alone model max 500 ms 40 ch Expandable model max 500 ms 300 ch A D integration time for DU100 DU200 Selectable from 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms 10 Hz or automatically switched between 50 60 Hz Except auto switch does not functi
185. ain menu SET e xci O O Lower menu debi A ENTER MEDIA FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SCSIO IDENTIFY 4 FLOPPY FORMAT ENTER SAVE LOAD DIR DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 FORMAT MODE 1 44MB ENTER 1 2MB 720KB 1 44MB 4 VOLUME DARWIN ENTER i FORMAT YES ENTER NO YES 4 Formatting 4 FORMAT OK End IESC Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed SCSILI is the SCSI ID number that is connected Formating a SCSI device in SET mode Main menu SET O Lower menu i d MEDI A ENTER MEDIA SCSIL FLOPPY SCSIO IDENTIFY SCSILI FORMAT SAVE LOAD DIR DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 FORMAT MODE NORMAL NORMAL QUICK 4 VOLUME DARWIN 4 FORMAT YES NO YES 4 Formatting 4 DIR END Enq ENTER ENTER ENTER Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed SCSILI 15 the SCSI ID number that is connected IM DC100 01E PON dNLIS 10 LIS e YUM 11 6 Formatting a Disk Explanation Formatting a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD in the SETUP mode A floppy disk MO ZIP or PD can be formatted in the same way as in the SET mode Select MEDIA from the SETUP menu The rest of the procedure is the same as in the SET menu A floppy disk MO ZIP or PD is formatted All the data on the floppy disk will be deleted Thus copy necessary data to another media
186. al input module sss 4 1 2 1 7 3 16 14 11 Upper limit Lit e De tele oen See Alarm V Voltage level ieri 5 3 Writing saving auxiliary setting sese 2 7 10 10 10 11 channel selection treten 2 5 6 3 6 4 Setting iere ep a ER E UHR 2 5 6 4 to 6 8 data length 2 5 6 6 division method 4 eret ree eg 2 5 6 6 filename re rere itin eias 2 5 6 5 PIS SEL Qaid se p Re pes 2 5 6 5 write mode saving method 3 2 5 6 4 writing eerie 2 5 6 6 start stop pause 2 5 6 2 6 9 6 10 9 10 9 11 write data for one scan 2 5 6 2 9 10 X Y 2 Zero position calibrated values of essent 13 10 Index 6 IM DC100 01E
187. al to the ground between EUM and the instrument may cause a ground current resulting in noise Equalize the potentials to the ground so that the common mode noise becomes zero One point grounding Potential equalization EUM The instrument EUM The instrument lt lt 0 fs if grounding is difficult The basic means to obtain stable measurement is to set the circuit potential with proper grounding Thus potential equalization is the means to be adopted only when grounding is impossible 3 40 IM DC100 01E 3 12 Countering Noise Shielded and twisted pair prevention of electromagnetic coupling an increase of impedance If it is difficult to keep the noise source away from the measuring instrument due to space limitations the use of a shielded twisted pair is effective electrostatic coupling can be completely cut off by shielding for a magnetic field shielding with a magnetic material iron permalloy etc can be employed However there are many restrictions on this use and perfect shielding is impossible Therefore use of a twisted pair is preferable Voltage em induced by the coil is proportional to the area of the coil The smaller the area of the coil becomes the smaller the noise becomes Coil em Zu ES Magnetic field If the directions of coils 1 and 2 are reversed by twisting as shown if the areas of
188. aler 16 Using 2 select the DISPLAY mode ADJUST MODE DISPLAY gt S UNIT MODULE No 0 DISPLAY CAL EXEC END 17 Press the ENTER key to display the calibrated items Displaying the calibrated value 18 The calibrated value is displayed 1CH ZERO 681 gt S UNIT MODULE No 0 gt 19 Press the ENTER key 20 Then the calibrated values are displayed in the following order CHI FULL CH2 ZERO CH2 FULL CH3 ZERO CH3 FULL CH4 ZERO gt CH4 FULL CH5 ZERO CH5 FULL CH6 ZERO CH6 FULL CH7 ZERO gt CH7 FULL CH8 ZERO CH8 FULL CH9 ZERO CH9 FULL CH10 ZERO gt CH10 FULL 21 After checking the calibrated value of the SPAN for CH2 DT500 21 or CH10 DT500 11 press the ENTER key Calibration in the DISPLAY mode will be terminated DISPLAY END gt S UNIT MODULE No 0 gt 22 Press the ENTER key Completing the calibration of the module selected in the END mode 23 Using GS select the END mode ADJUST MODE END gt S UNIT MODULE No 0 DISPLAY CAL EXEC END 24 Press the ENTER key 25 Using GS select STORE or ABORT A D ADJUST END ABORT gt S UNIT MODULE No 0 ABORT STORE 26 Press the ENTER key Return to operation 2 Terminating the calibration mode 27 To exit the calibration mode and start normal measurements power cycle the instrument 1 3 1 2
189. alue display items in the following order Repeat steps 15 and 16 above 20 mV SPAN gt 60 mV ZERO gt 60 mV SPAN gt 200 mV ZERO 200 mV SPAN gt 2 V ZERO 2 V SPAN gt 6 V ZERO gt 6 V SPAN gt 20 V ZERO gt 20 V SPAN 50V ZERO gt 50 V SPAN 9 Pt 1 mA ZERO 9 Pt 1 mA SPAN gt Pt 2 mA ZERO 9 Pt 2 mA SPAN Pt 1 mA H SPAN Pt 2 mA H SPAN gt Cu 2 mA ZERO gt Cu 2 mA SPAN For a mA input module show the calibrated values in the order 20 mA ZERO and 20 mA SPAN For a strain input module show the calibrated values in the following order 2k ZERO 2k SPAN 20k ZERO 20k SPAN 200k ZERO and 200k SPAN For a digital input module show the calibrated values in the following order 60 mV ZERO 60 mV SPAN 6 V ZERO 6 V SPAN 18 After checking the Cu 2 mA SPAN calibrated value in the above calibrated value display items press th e ENTER key DISPLAY END S UNITO MODULE No 0 gt 19 Press the ENTER key 13 10 IM DC100 01E 13 5 Calibration Completing the selected module calibration with the END mode 20 With CS select the END mode ADJUST MODE END gt S_UNITO MODULE No 0 DISPLAY CAL EXEC END 21 Press the ENTER key Selecting STORE or ABORT 22 With CS select STORE or ABORT A D ADJUST END ABORT S UNITO MODULE No 0 ABORT STORE 23 Press the ENTER key Return to operation 2 Terminating the calibrat
190. ange is small the time constant may be smaller than the value specified 1 0 30 IM DC100 01E 11 1 Saving Set up Data Saving set up data for the SET mode Relevant Keys SET MEDIA ALARM gt Select Setting Parameter MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC CH CT KEYLOCI Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the GS keys GD GA se Cee rovc To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET 1 ER CSKA Lower menu MEDIA ENTER MEDIA FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SCSIL IDENTIFY 4 FLOPPY SAVE ENTER SAVE LOAD DIR DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 SAVE file ENTER ____ CCC 4 SAVE FILE AAA ENTER 4 Saving 4 GAVE OK End of saving ESC Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed SCSI is the SCSI ID number that is connected IM DC100 01E POW dN LAS 10 LAS e YUM 11 1 Saving Set up Data Saving set up data for the SETUP mode DISP Cae SETUP MEDIA a MEER GD ALARM
191. annel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms Measurement Values and Engineering Units Same as for the sub display 1 Others Same as for the sub display 1 Points to Note when Using the AUTO Display When all three displays are set to AUTO display the main display will start displaying data of the channel with the smallest channel number on sub display 1 data of the next two channels will be displayed while on sub display 2 data of the next two channels will be displayed When the data are updated the display will be replaced with data of the next consecutive channel When the input type of all channels is set to SKIP then depending on the display as described below ALL SKIP will be displayed When the main display is set to AUTO display then this will be displayed on the main display regardless of the settings of sub display 1 and 2 When sub display 1 is set to AUTO display and the main display is set to any other mode than AUTO then this will be displayed on sub display 1 regardless of the setting of sub display 2 When sub display 2 is set to AUTO display and the main display is set to any other mode than AUTO and sub display 1 to any other mode than AUTO then this will be displayed on sub display 2 When on any of the main sub displayl or sub display 2 ALL SKIP appears other displays which may have been set to AUTO will turn blank Only the selected display mode on sub
192. annel universal input module clamp type terminal DU200 11 DU200 21 DU200 31 10 channel DCV TC DI input module screw type terminal 20 channel DCV TC DI input module screw type terminal 30 channel DCV TC DI input module screw type terminal DU200 12 DU200 22 DU200 32 10 channel DCV TC DI input module clamp type terminal 20 channel DCV TC DI input module clamp type terminal 30 channel DCV TC DI input module clamp type terminal DU300 11 DU300 12 10 channel mA input module with screw terminals 10 channel mA input module with clamp terminals DU400 12 DU400 22 Power monitor module for single phase use Power monitor module for three phase use DU500 12 DU500 22 DU500 32 10 channel strain input module with 120 Q bridge resistors 10 channel strain input module with 350 Q bridge resistors 10 channel strain input module with NDIS terminals DU600 11 10 channel pulse input module with screw terminals DU700 11 10 channel digital input module with screw terminal NO Instrument Number Please quote this instrument number when contacting the dealer Terminal Modules Check that model code given on the name plate is according to your order Model Codes Model Description DT100 11 DI DO module screw type terminal DT200 11 DT200 21 Alarm module 4 transfer contacts screw type terminal Alarm module 10 make contacts screw type terminal DT300 11
193. ard models of DC100 the DC100 stand alone model and the DC100 expandable model DC100 Stand alone model Being suitable for small scale data logging between 10 and 40 ch the light weight main unit allows an easy and quick setting up DC100 Expandable model The expandable model consists of one main unit and by connecting up to six subunits DS400 DS600 the number of measurement points can be expanded to a maximum of 300 ch Using dedicated extension cables between units interconnections can be extended up to 500 m Since measured objects scattered over a wide area can be wired fast and with a minimum of wiring a flexible extensive measurement system can be configured The input modules to be incorporated in the DC100 or DS400 600 can be selected from the following to suit your measurement conditions Universal input module and DCV TC DI input module Temperature DC voltage and contact signals can be measured but cannot be connected to the expandable model s main unit mA input Module This module can directly measure DC currents ranging from 20 mA to 20 mA since it contains shunt resistors It cannot be connected to the expandable model s main unit Power Monitor Module This module can measure the effective voltage effective current active power reactive power apparent power frequency power factor and phase angle for an AC voltage or AC current input It is available in either a single phase or three phase model This mo
194. asured on channel 001 from 8 00 to 9 00 every day Setting the MATCH TIME field Configure the instrument so events occur at 8 00 and 9 00 every day Lower menu MATCH TIME ENTER MATCH TIME No 1 Main menu SET LOGIC ENTER 123 H 1 TIME 00 08 00 Set Day amp Time DD HH MM 00 4 GET OK setting complete 4 MATCH TIME No 2 123 1 1 TIME 00 09 00 gt Set Day amp Time DD HH MM 00 4 OK setting complete Setting the EVENT ACTION fields ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Selects match timer no 1 Sets the date to 00 and time to 8 00 If the date are set to 00 the time is the set time for every day Selects match timer no 2 Sets the date to 00 and time to 9 00 Configure the instrument so it uses the match time as the event to clear computed values and then start computing at 8 00 and ends computing at 9 00 Lower menu LOGIC BOX No 01 01 to 30 4 EVT MATCH TIME 1 4 ACT EDGE MATH CLEAR 4 GET OK setting complete 4 LOGIC BOX No 02 01 to 30 4 EVT MATCH TIME 1 4 ACT EDGE MATH START 4 GET OK setting complete 4 LOGIC BOX No 03 01 to 30 4 EVT MATCH TIME 2 4 ACT EDGE MATH STOP 4 GET OK setting complete Computation equation CALC TLOG SUM 001 ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
195. b display 2 1 Select sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select MAN using the MODE key Sub display 1 005 0 0931V 006 0 0092V YMAN 3 Select the right or left channel using the CJ keys A dash will appear below the unit number of the selected channel 4 Select the required channel using the keys Sub display 2 009 1 0075V 008 0 0154V 4 4 IM DC100 01E 4 2 Using the MANUAL Display Explanation MANUAL Display for the Main Display Channel No Difference between Channels delta and Alarms Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 Measurement Values Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then SKIP will be displayed When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected appears Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then no engineering unit will be displayed MANUAL Display for the Sub display 1 and 2 Data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously on each display Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms and Selected Display Mode Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 Measurement Values Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 except for the foll
196. be carried out Measurement data saving and display will be carried out for the next channel whose input type is not set to SKIP VOLT DC voltage This input type can be selected from 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V and 50V Refer to chapter 14 for the measurement range of each setting The default setting is 2V TC thermocouple This input type can be selected from R S B K E J T N W L U and KP KPvsAu7Fe Refer to chapter 14 for the measurement range of each setting The default setting is R RTD resistance temperature detector This input type can be selected from PT1 Pt100 1mA PT2 Pt100 2mA JPt100 1mA JPT2 JPt100 2mA PT50 Pt50 2mA Ni100 ImA SAMA ND Ni100 DIN Ni120 1mA CUI Cul0 GE CU2 Cu10 L amp N Cu10 WEED CU4 Cu10 BAILEY PTIS Pt100 1mA high resolution PT2S Pt100 2mA high resolution JPT1S JPt100 1mA high resolution JPT2S JPt100 2mA high resolution and J263B J263 B Refer to chapter 14 for the measurement range of each setting The default setting is PT1 DI voltage level LEVL contact CONT This input type can be selected from LEVL and CONT In case of LEVL a voltage of less than approx 2 4 V will be recognized as 0 OFF whereas a voltage of approx 2 4 V or more max allowable voltage is up to 60 VDC will be recognized as 1 ON In case of CONT an open externally connected contact to which no voltage is applied will be recogn
197. bove other settings will be initialized at the same time and therefore all settings need to be done again This initialization will be the same initialization as described on page 9 17 In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 20 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 20 Measurement ranges for temperature measurements when using the unit F Input Type Measurement Range TC R 32 to 3200 F Note that accuracy S 32 to 3200 F of reference junction B 1 32 to 3308 F compensation is not K 1 328 to 2498 F considered E 1 328 0 to 1472 0 F J 1 328 0 to 2012 0 F T 1 328 0 to 752 0 F L 2 328 0 to 1652 0 F U 2 328 0 to 752 0 F N 3 32 to 2372 F W 4 32 to 4199 F KPvsAu7Fe 0 0 to 300 0K RTD Pt100 1 mA s 328 0to 1112 0 F 100 2 s 328 0 to 482 0 F JPHOO 1mA s 328 0 to 1022 0 110002 mA s 328 0 to 482 0 F Pt50 mA s 328 0 to 1022 0 F NilO0 1mA 328 0 to 482 0 F SAMA Nil00 1 mA DIN 6 76 0 to 356 0 F Nil20 1 mA 94 0 to 392 0 F J263 B 0 0 to 300 0K Cul0 GE g 328 0 to 572 0 F Cul0 L amp N g Cul0 WEED g Cul0 BAILEY s High resolution RTD Pt100 1 mA 5 220 0 to 302 0 F
198. ce between channels eee 4 2 5 3 Memory tilizafion rette reete 4 10 Page PAGE 2 1 4 6 remote local control status ccccecceescsceeesssceesssscseessscsesseseess 2 1 Rel y st tus RR 2 1 4 13 4 14 Display mode eint ette e e eee as See mode Display update interval See interval IM DC100 01E Index 3 xepu INDEX E G Edge actio ccce ena ee e ee e p ee lee 9 9 Engineering unit CEPET oI e D APT 4 2 4 3 Setting 8 7 Ethernet Setting ai SpecifICatlofi sesi i e bat nee ER 14 31 Event event action functions 2 12 9 1 to 9 11 Extension base eaae eet te dee ret dep e Nees 3 23 Extension module tete SEES 3 23 External in output 2 13 External RJC EXT ugnarna uniunea nde See RJC F Fail failure output 2 12 3 19 BD CORY key E 7 1 BG rrites COTE ER 3 9 3 11 3 43 Fil alarmi idn ceno dg 2 7 10 11 File alarm output 2 13 3 19 File cancellation 2 7 10 11 eR ERES HUN ROREM RE UR 9 9 Filename setting e oe e bp pie etii eie 2 6 6 5 File Chapter 7 Chapter 11 File overwriting eese ai 2 6 10 11 File ut
199. ch inputs and 30 ch computations Expandable model max about 80 KB when saving the setting values of an operation mode with 300 ch inputs and 60 ch computations Measured values Binary data 2 bytes 1 data ASCII data 12 bytes 1 data Computed values Binary data 4 bytes 1 data ASCII data 12 bytes 1 data Equation to calculate the total data capacity Stand alone model 256 64 x number of measured ch number of computation ch number of measured ch x 2 number of computation ch x 4 6 x specified data length Expandable model 576 64 x number of measured ch number of computation ch number of measured ch x 2 number of computation ch x 4 6 x specified data length Writing interval of measured computed values Measurement interval or selectable from 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 20 30 s 1 2 3 4 5 10 30 60 min LOGIC Using the event action function as well as the FUNC menu it can also sample 1 data at a time e g at each M FUNC key or remote control signal input Selection of the writing method of measured computed values WRITE MODE Single Start writing the data when the key operation occurs or the trigger condition is met After writing a file of data stop the writing process Repeat Start writing the data when the key operation occurs or the trigger condition is met Repeat the process of writing data to 1 file until there is no more area in the memory None The measured computed data is not wiriten o
200. ck covere of this manual Connecting Procedure 1 Check that the power switch is turned off 2 Connect the plug of the accessory power cord to the power connector 3 Plug the other end of the power cord into a power outlet that satisfies the following conditions For the DS400 DS600 in order to cut down on unnecessary radio interference attach a clamp filter accessory near the power cord plug as shown below Make a loop with the power cord and clamp it in the clamp filter Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC free power supply operating voltage 90 to 250 V AC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption DC100 stand alone model About 90 VA max DC100 expandable model About 90 VA max DS400 sacs niet About 55 VA max 5600 reete About 70 VA max Use a three pole power outlet provided with a protective ground terminal DC100 DS400 DS600 Power connector Power cord Power switch IM DC100 01E 3 27 pue uonejeisu 3 9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON OFF When Using an Adapter for Direct Wiring to the Power Supply AN DC100 DS400 DS600 when connecting wires to screw terminals This applies only to products with power inlet W suffix code Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned off to prevent electric shock To prevent fir
201. computed data A trigger to start writing in an opened file is generated Writing measured computed data for one scan The measured computed data for one scan held at an event generation are written Copying to a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD All files in the RAM disk are copied to a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD However if a file with the same file name already exists on the SCSI device it is not copied Reading setting data Setting data in SET mode are read into the instrument from a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD Starting stopping of computation reset and clear and status clear group reset This function is available only if the instrument is equipped with the computation function This function enables starting and stopping of computation and resetting and clearing of computed data Starting Stopping Reports Valid only for models with the report option Starts or stops the report function Flag Valid only for models with the computation option M1 Sets the flag to 1 This function prevents alterations by careless key operations When the key lock function is activated the indicator KEYLOCK at the right side of the display will be lit All key operations except power ON OFF DISP MODE key and the cursor will then be disabled However you can preset whether START STOP CLOCK FUNC FD COPY M FUNC keys will remain operable even after key lock has been set Furthermore when activating or releasing the key lock a menu for pas
202. crepancy in the unit of value arising between computed values depending on the measurement interval applied INTVL no conversion X results of computing sec converted to the sum of input in seconds results of computing x measurement interval min converted to the sum of input in minutes results of computing x measurement interval 60 hour converted to the sum of input in hours results of computing x measurement interval 3600 day converted to the sum of input in days results of computing x measurement interval 86400 Time to make report Reference dates 1st to 28th days of a month Reference times 00 00 to 23 00 Output ranges of the results of computing for reports AVE 9999999 to 99999999 with the position of the decimal point dependent on the measurement and computing channels assigned as report channels INST 9999999 to 99999999 with the position of the decimal point dependent on the measurement and computing channels assigned as report channels SUM seven digits for the mantissa and two digits for the exponent Processing of faulty data AVE Faulty data are excluded from computing Data of positive and negative overflows however are included in the computing of the maximum and minimum INST Faulty data are included in computing SUM Faulty data are excluded from computing IM DC100 01E 14 5 suoneoyioodsg 14 1 Specifications of DC100 DS400 DS600 Periodic File Information o
203. ction on page 2 8 Alarm reset This function is selected from the FUNC menu when the relay hold function see page 10 7 is activated To use the alarm reset function select ALARM RST then press the ENTER key to use the alarm reset function For details on the alarm reset see Section 2 4 Alarm Function on page 2 8 IM DC100 01E 8 3 Setting the Engineering Unit Relevant Keys vise MODE E starr ESC SET UNIT e GO Cer INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC CH_C1 pa Uusmna mem ser ser LewrER mrunc Operating Procedure Main menu SET L__ UNIT Explanation ENTER Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the O keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Lower menu 001 01 UNIT D gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 UNIT D gt Select Channel No i 001 01 UNIT Q ENTER gt 19 8 0123 89 ABC KLT 4 SET OK End of setting ESC Engineering Unit UNIT An engineering unit of up to six characters can be assigned to each channel The default setting is
204. dards of operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH supply voltage 90 to 250 V AC AC power supply 10 to 32 V DC DC power supply power supply frequency 50 60 Hz 1 AC power supply warm up time 30 minutes minimum no effect on instrument operation due to vibration etc Measuring Range Measuring Accuracy Maximum Resolution 20 000 to 20 000 mA 0 25 of rdg 5 digits luA 14 14 IM DC100 01E 14 3 Specifications of mA input Module Filter Lowpass filter or use of moving average Cutoff frequencies of lowpass filter 50 60 Hz and 10 Hz and frequencies of their respective integral multiples Input resistance 100 Q Insulation resistance Across channels 50 V DC Across input terminals and ground 20 MQ minimum 500 V DC Withstanding voltage Across channels 1 000 V AC 1 min 50 60 Hz Across input terminals and ground 1 500 V AC 1 min 50 60 Hz excluding DU500 14 Temperature coefficient Zero 0 012596 of range C Span 0 0125 of Power consumption Included in the value of a system s installed main unit or subunit Dimensions Approx 57 W x 137 H x 88 D mm Weight Approx 0 5 kg Installation category overvoltage category CAT II IEC1010 IM DC100 01E 14 15 suoneoyioodg 14 4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module Model Use Input Channels Terminal Type and Shortest Measurement Interval Model Use Input
205. data at the end of completion of the first computation in case an event take p lace CLEAR Resets computation channel data immediately in case an event takes place e 01 to RESET 07 Resets the computing channel data registered in the specified group number to 0 This is invalid for measuring channels The timing for resetting the data is as follows Not reset Computed value 20 i 9 A A x Start computing Event Reset here If MATH is selected as a level action computation will be carried out while an event is present Computation will stop when the event is cleared START STOP of an edge action and a level action cannot be set at the same time Foralevel action only one setting can be made MEMRY DATA WR Writes the data for one scan one data channel retained at the generation of an event To execute this it is necessary to set LOGIC to the writing period TRIG Generates a trigger to start writing To execute this it is necessary to set TRIG to WRITE TRIG For an example of setting see Section 6 3 Starting of Writing Using Event or Action Functions page 6 9 START Opens a file and starts the writing operation It is the same function as the START key on the operation panel PAUSE In the case of edge action writing is suspended at the generation of an event In the case of level action by setting the alarm remote relay or internal switch to t
206. ddress subnet mask and default gateway are set for theDC100 Test mode A mode in which the condition of the physical connection is tested Communication mode A mode in which the DC100 is connected to the network to carry out communication Use this mode to read in the DC100 measurement data with the PC In addition you can turn ON OFF the Keepalive function Mode Setting Mode Switch 1 Switch 2 Configuration mode ON OFF Test mode OFF ON Communication mode OFF OFF Default Setting Do not set both dip switches 1 and 2 to ON Keepalive Setting Keepalive Switch 3 Enable ON Default Setting Disable OFF Keepalive is a function supported by TCP It sends packets at constant time intervals and automatically disconnects when there is no corresponding response This instrument sends packets at 30 second time intervals If a response is not received it sends 4 more packets at one second intervals If a response is still not received the connection is dropped Have dip switch 4 turned OFF IM DC100 01E 3 13 Bum pue uonejeisu 3 5 Connecting the Extension Cables only for the use with the DC100 expandable model Extension Cables Any of the following extension cables can be used for connections between the DC100 main unit and subunits or for connections between subunits Name Model Description Extension cable DV200 000 Length 0 5 m Extension cable DV200 001 Length 1 m Extension
207. ddress upper Minimum response time ON Ls Address lower Baud rate No 1 to 3 of SW1 Baud rate No 1 No 2 No 3 300 OFF OFF ON 600 OFF ON OFF 1200 OFF ON ON 2400 ON OFF OFF 4800 ON OFF ON 9600 ON ON OFF Default Setting 19200 ON ON ON 38400 OFF OFF OFF IM DC100 01E 3 11 pue uonejeisu 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables Data length No 4 of SW1 Data length No 4 7 8 OFF ON lt Default Setting Parity No 1 to 2 of SW2 Parity No 1 No 2 None OFF OFF ODD OFF ON EVEN ON OFF Default Setting Stop bit No 3 of SW2 Stop bit No 3 1 2 OFF lt Default Setting ON Switch between four wire two wire systems No 4 of SW2 four wire two wire No 4 four wire two wire OFF Default Setting ON Minimum response time No 1 to 3 of SW3 Minimum response time No 1 No 2 No 3 Oms OFF OFF OFF Default Setting 10ms OFF OFF ON 20ms OFF ON OFF 50ms OFF ON ON 100ms ON OFF OFF Address No 4 of SW3 and No 1 to 4 of SW4 Address No 4 SW3 No 1 SW4 No 2 SW4 No 3 SW4 No 4 SW4 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Default Setting 2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 3 OFF OFF OFF ON ON 4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 5 OFF OFF ON OFF ON 6 OFF OFF ON ON OFF 7 OFF OFF ON ON ON 8 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
208. disk or MO ZIP PD disk CSV extension Periodic file reduces the number of measured data for saving The measured data over a day hour or month are saved to one file Periodic files are convenient for obtaining the overall trend of the data being measured Saved to periodic file Saved as measured data o o o o o o ie o 0 5s 2s Measuring period 0 5 s Sampling period for periodic file 2 s You can use the event action function to save the data to the periodic file under normal conditions and switch to save at measuring periods when a certain event occurs The setting example for writing the data using the event action function is given in Section 6 4 Setting Writing Operation of Periodic File Report Data The file extension is DAS IM DC100 01E suonounj 2 3 Data Saving Function Start Stop of Writing Measured Computed Data Report data and Periodic File Writing Action The method of data writing in the built in RAM disk includes that of starting writing using the event action function in addition to the method to start stop it by key operation In the event action function the writing start suspension restart and writing start trigger can be set as actions Writing Channel Setting Measured computed data Whether to execute writing or not can be set for each channel Periodic Files Data on the measured computed data channels ar
209. dule cannot be connected to the expandable model s main unit Strain Input Module This module can measure strain It is available in either a model with built in 120 or 350 0 bridge resistors or a model with NDIS terminals where bridge resistors are connected externally The module cannot be connected to the expandable model s main unit Pulse Input Module This module can measure pulses It cannot be connected to the expandable model s main unit Communication interface module This module is necessary when communicating with a personal computer Measurement conditions can be set and data acquired via the communication interface GP IB RS 232 C etc of this module This module can only be connected to the main unit Alarm module This module can output alarm signals as contact signals The module can be connected to the main unit or the subunit DI DO module This module allows a signal to be output in the case of alarm failure or file alarm and a remote control signal for the product to be input The module can be connected to the main unit or the subunit but only one module in all units Extension module If input modules are to be installed where a nearby power supply is not available power can be supplied from a stand alone model s main unit or expandable model s subunit directly to the input module Retransmission module This module deals with data that are measured or computed by the product or set by a persona
210. dules System configuration is executed by pressing the ENTER key After that the instrument returns to the operation mode Note After completing the system configuration if you attempt to do the following and then configure the system again the setting information for the corresponding module position slot will be initialized Install modules with different model codes style numbers into slots Remove modules Add modules When you attempt the following you should first configure the DC100 system to operate the instrument correctly After executing the system configuration check the module information Subunit connections including additions and replacement removal unit number setting Installation including additions and replacement removal of modules If the installed modules are not recognized in the system configuration check that the same unit number is not used or that the setting is out of range see page 3 6 number of modules does not exceed the allowed number see page 3 6 modules and units are connected properly and power supply is operating properly 3 32 IM DC100 01E 3 11 Setting the Date and Time Relevant Keys MODE START ESG 97 06 16 03 36 23 a jue GO Ger gt Set Date amp Time YY MM DD HH MM SS memser set mrunc Operating Procedure Press the CLOCK key
211. e use 600 V PVC insulated wire AWG18 for both power and ground wiring cross section of 0 83 mm or thicker anti galvanic corrosion finish insulation thickness more than 0 8 mm insulation resistance more than 50 MO km at 20 C approved EN60 320 VDE0625 or equivalent cables Units equipped with screw type terminals should only be used in panel installations Before turning on the power always ground the protective ground terminal Do not use the function grounding terminal marked terminal under the power connecting part as the protective grounding terminal For AC power and ground wiring use crimp on lugs for 4 mm screws with insulation sleeves Make sure that the crimp on tool must be one specified by the crimp on lugs manufacture and that the crimp on lugs and tool must be matched to the wire size To prevent electric shock do not touch the terminals after wiring Make sure to apply a power switch in the power supply cord with the following characteristics rated power current 2 3 A rated ruch current 2 90 A Connecting procedure 06100 1 Check that the power switch is turned off 2 Remove the cover protecting the power terminals 3 Connect the power supply wires and the protective ground wire to the power terminals 4 Replace the cover Connecting procedure DS400 DS600 1 Check that the power switch is turned off 2 Remove the cover prot
212. e Four wire Dual voltage Triple voltage Dual current Triple current Effective voltage V V1 V1 V3 V1 V3 V1 V2 V3 V1 V2 V3 V13 V1 V3 2 V13 V1 V3 2 V13 V1 V3 2 VO V1 V2 V3 3 V0 V1 V2 V3 3 Effective current I Il I1 I3 I1 I3 I1 12 I3 I1 D I3 113 11 13 2 113 11 13 2 113 11 13 2 I0 11 12 13 3 I0 11 12 13 3 Active power Pl P1 P3 P1 P3 P1 P2 P3 P1 P2 P3 P13 P1 P3 P13 P1 P3 P13 P1 P3 PO P1 I2 P3 Apparent power VA VAI VAI VA3 VAI VA3 VAI VA2 VA3 VAI VA2 VA3 VAO VA1 VA2 VA3 Reactive power Var Varl Varl Var3 13 Varl Var3 Varl Var3 Varl3 Varl Var3 Varl Var2 Var3 13 Varl VA3 Varl Var2 Var3 Var0 Varl Var2 Var3 14 18 Frequency FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ Power factor PF PFI PFI PFI PFI PF2 PF1 PF2 PF13 PF13 PF13 PFO Phase angle PH PHI PHI PH3 PHI PH3 PHI PH2 PH3 PHI PH2 PH3 PH13 PH13 PH13 PHO IM DC100 01E 14 4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module Continuously applicable maximum voltage and current Voltage 250 V rms Current 5 A rms Crest factor 3 maximum 600 Vpeak Maximum common mode voltage 250 V rms Common mode voltage rejection ratio voltage and current ranges 0 02 of span when 250 V 45 to 65 Hz is imposed Input resistance Voltage input 300 kQ minimum for AC voltages Current input 1 Q maximum for AC currents Filter Moving average
213. e case nor leave the case in contact with rubber or PVC products for a long period The case is made of a thermoplastic resin so take care not to let anything hot such as a soldering iron touch the case Cleaning When cleaning the case or any other part of the instrument first remove the power cord from the receptacle and in case of direct connection disconnect the power lines Do not use volatile chemicals since this might result in dis coloring etc Always use a dry soft cloth for cleaning When not using the instrument for a long time When the instrument is not being used for an extensive period of time unplug the power cord from the outlet when using an adapter for direct wiring to the power supply disconnect the power cord from the outlet IM DC100 01E Bum pue uonejeisu 3 2 Installation Installation Conditions The instrument must be installed in a location where the following conditions are met Ambient temperature and humidity Ambient temperature Main unit 5 to 40 C Subunit 0 to 50 C However in case you mount the AC power supply model subunits DS400 DS600 directly to a panel or if you apply the DIN rail or mount them in a rack it is possible to use them in a range of 10 to 60 C AN WARNING When the environmental temperature is 50 C or more the temperature of the rear panel may rise to more than 70 C Thus touching the rear panel under these circumstances has the danger of sustaining burns
214. e is set to RATE instantaneous count mode or the integration of the turn on time if the measurement mode is set to GATE instantaneous turn on time mode In either case the integrated value is the sum of values measured every second For this reason even if you set the measurement interval to 0 5 second the instrument retains the same value for one second Set the maximum count and turn on time using SPAN The maximum configurable value is 99999999 Set the interval of summation integration interval as a relative or absolute time by setting the event to TIMER with the event action functions Set the action to TIMER RESET See Section 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions on page 9 1 for details on how to configure the event action functions If the computational expression is written as TLOG PSUM XXX in the system reconfiguration where the PULSE INPUT MODULE filed is set to not installed the computational expression and alarm settings are initialized In addition if the instrument is not a model with the optional MATH function M1 option groups to which computation channels were assigned by the group setting and logic boxes to which actions of the MATH function were assigned by the logic setting are initialized ON State of contact OFF ON Time 0 Integration interval You can select whether to treat a result of the computational expression TLOG PSUM XXXX exceeding 99999999 as an overflow or to cont
215. e modules are mixed with other input modules is the measurement interval of a module having a maximum measurement interval Normal operating temperature humidity 20 to 80 RH for 10 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C no condensation Compensation for the reference junction Switchable internally or externally for each channel Compensation accuracy for the reference junction measured at 0 C where the input terminals are balanced Type R S B W 1 C Type K J E T N L U 0 5 C Maximum allowable input voltage 2 V DC or lower range TC RTD DI CONT 10 V DC 6 V DC or greater range DI LEVEL 60 V DC Normal mode voltage Voltage TC 1 2 times the rated range or less at peak value including 50 or 60 Hz signal component RTD 50 mV or lower at peak value Normal mode rejection ratio 40 dB or greater 50 60 Hz 0 1 Common mode noise voltage 250 V AC rms 50 60 Hz Common mode rejection ratio 120 dB or greater 50 60 Hz 0 1 500 Q unbalanced between the negative measurement terminal and ground Maximum noise between channels 150 V AC rms 50 60 Hz IM DC100 01E 14 11 suoneoyioodg 14 2 Specifications of Universal Input Module and DCV TC DI Input Module Measurement range accuracy and resolution As described below under the following operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH power supply voltage 90 to
216. e range of 0 to 40 C or 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C no condensation 14 22 IM DC100 01E 14 6 Specifications of Pulse Input Module Normal operating magnetic field strength 400 A m maximum Maximum input voltage 5 V DC Signal source rating 15 V DC 30 mA minimum Insulation resistance Across input terminals and ground 20 MQ minimum 500 V DC Withstanding voltage Across output terminals and ground 500 V DC 1 min no channel to channel isolation Power consumption Included in the value of a system s installed main unit or subunit Dimensions Approx 57 W x 137 H x 68 D mm Weight Approx 0 3 kg Installation category overvoltage category CAT II IEC1010 IM DC100 01E 14 23 suoneoyioodg 14 7 Specifications of Digital Input Module Style Number S2 Model Number of Channels Terminal Type and Minimum Measurement Interval Model Number of Channels Terminal Type Minimum Measurement Interval DU700 11 10 Screw 0 5s Input method Floating unbalanced input each channel mutually isolated channel independent A D resolution 20000 A D integration time 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms 10 Hz or auto Except auto switch does not function on the stand alone DC power supply model or the subunit DS400 DS600 of a DC power supply model Minimum measurement interval Low pass filter OFF Cut off frequency 50 60Hz 10Hz Minimum measurement interval 0 5 s 4s
217. e written Report Data Assigns which channel to write to the report channel Writing Mode The data writing method can be selected from the following SINGLE Data for one file are written Only for measured computed data REPEAT Data are written in such a manner that when data writing for one file is finished the next file is prepared and writing continues RAM Disk Usage Built in RAM disk usage can be selected from the following Measured computed data Division The built in RAM disk is used by dividing it into 2 cannot be selected on a 4 MB RAM disk 4 8 or 16 parts Data length The disk is used by specifying the number of data items per channel From 10 to 100000 data items can be specified However a file exceeding 1 MB cannot be prepared Report Data Periodic File Files are created until the built in RAM disk becomes full Using Built in RAM Disk If the instrument is equipped with the report option M3 partition the built in RAM as follows Built in RAM Capacity Measured Computed Data Report Data 1 MB 512 KB 512 KB 2MB 1 MB 1 MB 4 MB 3MB 1 MB Built in RAM Capacity Measured Computed Data Periodic File 1 MB 512 KB 512 KB 2MB 1 MB 1 MB 4 MB 2MB 2MB You can use the entire RAM disk for saving report data or periodic file by not saving measured computed data Report data and periodic file cannot be saved simultaneously Setting of the Use of Trigger Set the trigger mode if the
218. eading is allowed during computing The communication function remains disabled during reading IM DC100 01E 11 3 Displaying the Directory of a Floppy Disk Displaying a directory in the SET mode Relevant Keys RECORD ES SET MEDIA ar Emo GO INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC CH CT A mem ser set Enter mrunc Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the GSN keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu SET OQ Lower menu LT MEDIA ENTER MEDIA FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SCSIO IDENTIFY 4 FLOPPY DIR ENTER SAVE LOAD DIR DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 FREE 20000BYTES ENTER gt FILE001 DAT 97 06 01 06 30 gt FILE002 DAT 97 06 02 10 00 4 DIR END End of setting ESC Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed SCSILI is the SCSI ID number that is connected Displaying a directory in the SETUP mode The directory of a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD can be displayed in the same way as in the SET mode Select MEDIA from the SETUP menu Main men
219. ecified for KO1 to K30 for the stand alone model or K01 to K60 for the expandable model Group data Measured data of channels belonging to a group Specified by group No 01 to G07 This is applicable only for CLOG Communication input data Data written to the instrument s memory via communication interface Specified by data No C01 to C30 for the stand alone model or C01 to C60 for the expandable model 12 2 IM DC100 01E 12 1 Overview of the Computation Function Handling of data for computation For computation measured computed data is treated as a value having no unit For instance if the measured data for channel 001 is 20 mV and the measured data for channel 002 is 20 V the computation result of 001 002 will be 40 Priority of Operators Priority of operators when they are used in an equation is shown below Operators are listed in order of priority from the highest to the lowest Type Operator Function ABS SQRO LOGQ LNO EXPO MAX MINO SUMO AVE PRE Q HOLD RESET Power kk Sign logical negation NOT Multiplication division d Addition subtraction Greater smaller GT LT GE LE Equal not equal EQ NE Logical AND AND Logical OR exclusive OR OR XOR Limitations in computing equations Multiple operators can be used in 1 computing equation But there are following limitations Number of characters
220. ect Channel No Lower menu 4 001 01 VOLT 2VOO 001 01 VOLT 2V Select Channel No 4 001 01 VOLT 2V ENTER 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V SPAN 2 0000 2 0000V ENTER a gt Span limit 2 0000 2 0000V 4 GET OK ESC n 001 01 SKIP ENTER 4 GET OK ESC 001 01 TC R D 4 001 01 TC R ENTER RSBKEJTNWLUKP 4 SPAN ____0 0 1760 0 C ENTER gt Span limit 0 0 1760 0 C 4 GET OK ESC 001 01 RTD PT1 D 4 001 01 RTD PT1 ENTER PT1 PT2 JPT1 JPT2 PT50 NI1 NI2 NI3 CU1 CU2 CU4 PT1S PT2S JPT1S av JPT2S J263B 4 SPAN 200 0 _600 0 C ENTER gt Span limit 200 0 600 0 C 4 GET OK ESC To the next page IM DC100 01E Buieos 1eourq ueds ed 1ndu ay 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Span Explanation From the previous page 001 01 DI LEVL D 4 001 01 DI LEVL ENTER LEVL CONT 4 SPAN 0 1 ENTER Span limit 0 1 4 GET OK ESC n 002 02 DELTA REF Ch 01 4 002 02 DELTA REF Ch 01 ENTER gt Select Channel No 4 SPAN 2 0000 2 0000V ENTER Span limit 2 0000 2 0000V i GET OK ESC gt 002 02 S R Ch 01 002 02 RRJC RJC Ch 01 ENTER gt Select Channel No SPAN 0 0 1760 0 C ENTER m limit 0 0 1760 0 C
221. ecting the power terminals 3 Connect the power supply wires and the protective ground wire to the power terminals 4 Replace the cover For the DS400 DS600 in order to cut down on unnecessary radio interference attach a clamp filter accessory near the power cord plug as shown below Make a loop with the power cord and clamp it in the clamp filter Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC free power supply operating voltage 90 to 250 V AC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption DC100 About 90 VA max DS400 See previous page DS600 See previous page DC100 DS400 DS600 Power terminals Protective ground wire Power supply wires 3 28 IM DC100 01E 3 9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON OFF DC100 DS400 DS600 when using DC power supply connecter This applies only to products with power supply 2 suffix code Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned off to prevent electric shock To prevent fire use wires with cross sectional area of 0 3mm 22AWG or more CAUTION f you connect the and terminals in reverse on the DS400 DS600 the internal fuse will be blown You cannot replace the fuse by yourself The instrument needs servicing in this case If there is a possibility of reversing the polarity insert a fuse rating shown below i
222. ed to direct sunlight or there is a heat source nearby soot steam dust and or corrosive gas is relatively abundant there is a strong electromagnetic source nearby there is high voltage equipment or a power line nearby it is exposed to severe and or frequent mechanical vibration or it is not positioned stably Desk top or Floor Installation Attach the two supplied shoe plates onto the extension base with two screws 4 mm screws 16 mm long supplied as standard accessories as shown in the figure on the left below Then place the extension base in an upright position If the base is liable to fall on its side after wiring fix the shoe plates with the four supplied screws 4 mm screws 12 mm long using the through holes for 4 mm screws of the shoe plates Direct Mounting on Panel According to the figure on the right below fix the extension base onto a panel by fastening the four corners with the supplied screws 4 mm screws 12 mm long IM DC100 01E 3 23 Bum pue uonejeisu 3 7 Connecting an Extension Module to Extension Bases Connecting Extension Bases to an Extension Module Mount the extension module onto the subunit The module cannot be mounted to the instrument itself Wire the extension module to the extension base with an extension cable You can wire a maximum of three extension bases to one extension module at the same time It is not poss
223. emory becomes full and so there is no file creation capacity the saving operation is continued by deleting the file with the oldest date and time ON Continues saving operation by deleting a file OFF Terminates the saving operation The default setting is OFF File Deletion When Copying a File FILE COPY amp DELETE Set whether a file in the copying source is to be deleted or not when copying a measured computed data file to a floppy disk ON Delete OFF Do not delete The default setting is OFF ASCII converted copying is not supported Selecting Use or Nonuse of Copy Lock COPY LOCK Whether the lock function is used or not is set when measured computed data are to be copied on a floppy disk NOT Not used USE Used The default setting is NOT Copy lock supports both copying with the FD COPY key and with ASCII conversion Setting Password in Copy Locking A COPY NUMBER A password is set if copy locking is used The default setting is 0 Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 20 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 20 IM DC100 01E 10 11 dn 195 sPunes oiseg 10 7 Setting Key Lock Relevant Keys RECORD SETUP LOCK
224. ensated Voltage to be externally compensated set in the range of 20000 to 20000 u V The default setting is INT Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 20 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 20 195 sPunes oiseg IM DC100 01E 1 0 9 10 6 Setting File Alarm Time File Overwriting or File Cancellation DISP CE SET es MER GED ALARM INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter SCAN_INTVL CH TAG MEM_SET MATH MEDIA AT Corca ME mem ser ser enter Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are
225. ension Switch to set the cable connector DNS unit number holes for module installation Status indicator Installation holes Power switch Function grounding terminal below power switch Power connector screw terminals for W specifications round type connector for Y specifications Holes for fastening the feet Feet Subunit DS600 Installation holes Module connector Lid covering the extension cable a connector Screw holes for module installation Switch to set the unit number Status indicator Power switch Function grounding terminal below power switch Power connector screw terminals for W specifications round type connector for Y specifications Holes for fastening the feet Feet Input Modules 10 ch Universal input module DU100 11 DU100 12 DU100 11 DU100 12 Clamp terminal Screw terminal e o o o o o o of o o e eo o o o o o o e e e d 4f O ooog ooog 000g 000g ooog ooofooofo0o0of 00080008 The 20 ch Universal input modules DU100 21 DU100 22 and the 30 ch Universal input modules DU100 31 DU100 32 are similar to the ones shown above 1 6 IM DC100 01E 1 3 Names of Parts 10 ch DCV TC DI input module DU200 11 DU200 12
226. ension module and extension bases as the DC100 cannot recognize the module when the power is left on If you connect while the power is still on turning the subunit power off and then on again will enable the DC100 to recognize the module Wiring Distance The last extension base in the connection can be located at a maximum distance of 30 m from the subunit Setting of Terminator On Off Switch Set the terminator on off switch of an extension base to ON for the base that is the last in the connection Set these switches of all other extension modules to OFF Setting of Slot Numbers Select an unused slot number for each extension base This can include however a slot number for an extension module The following figure shows how the numbers you set correspond to the positions of slots and relate to channel numbers lo ig to d U L ite o E dh f S tym Tot of e 5 Alo Ws 23 23 23 23 23 Setpoints of slot number z Ld v 7 v v n ea no 0 eye ee setup switch on an e e e i 81 81 91 8 1 8 1 81 extension base Setpoint 6 Setpoint5 Setpoint4 Setpoint3 Setpoint2 Setpoint 1 Channel numbers where X51 X60 41 50 X31 X40 21 30 X11 X20 X
227. er lower limit of the measuring range Computation channels Specified LEFT RIGHT value Processing of the results of TLOG PSUM computation for pulse input OVER If the result of a separate calculation of TLOG PSUM XXXX exceeds 99999999 the instrument goes into an overflow ROTATE If the result of a separate calculation of TLOG PSUM XXXX exceeds 99999999 the instrument resets the value subsequent to 99999999 to 0 and continues computing For example if the measured data subsequent to 99999999 which has been reached is 3 the computed result becomes 2 by counting 0 1 and 2 The process is effective only when a pulse input module is installed IM DC100 01E 12 15 uoneinduio2 Iepoi LIN 24 eiqermeAv 13 1 Periodic Maintenance and Recommended Parts Replacement Period Periodic maintenance Check the instrument s operation periodically to keep it in good operating condition Especially check the following items and replace consumable parts as needed Do not use a lubricant for periodic maintenance Are display and data saving functioning properly If problems develop with the instrument see Section 13 3 Troubleshooting Recommended parts replacement period It is necessary that the instrument s parts be replaced periodically for use of the instrument over an extended period of time The table below shows the recommended parts replacement periods for specific parts that wear
228. er or numeral The digit at the location of the cursor will become a space while all the characters numerals at the right side of the cursor will move one digit to the right IM DC100 01E 8 6 Setting the Match Time and Moving Average Relevant Keys DISP MODE C ESC SETZMATCH TIME Gmn O INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter TAG MESSAGE MATCH_TIME MOVE_AVE GROUPT Cresa C Operating Procedure Main menu SET __ SET ENTER M FUNC Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu Select set using the GSN keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Lower menu MATCH TIME ENTER O MOVE AVE ENTER MATCH TIME No 1 ENTER 123 4 1 TIME 01 00 00 ENTER gt Set Day amp Time DD HH MM 00 4 SET OK End of setting ESC 001 01 MOVE AVE 0 D gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 MOVE AVE 0 D gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 MOVE AVE 0 ENTER gt 2 64 Move Average Number 0 0FF 4 SET OK End of setting ESC IM DC100 01E 8 9 142410 pue ejdsiq Bu
229. erminal 1 1 0 IM DC100 01E 1 3 Names of Parts Extension Module Extension Base Extension Module DV100 011 Extension cable connector Extension Base DV100 012 Inatallation number setup switch holes KZ Screw holes for module installation Power indicator Terminator on off switch Module connector Lid covering the extension cable connector Screw holes for module installation litle J ZA ui for fastening the feet Co IM DC100 01E 1 11 uiejs S 1 4 Floppy Disk A floppy disk drive is provided with the instrument Applicable Floppy Disks 3 5 inch floppy disks can be used for this instrument They can also be formatted on this instrument 2HD type 1 2 MB or 1 44 MB MS DOS format 2DD type 720 MB MS DOS format Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Drive Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive shutter side first and with the label face in the right side Make sure that the floppy disk is inserted until the eject button pops up Removing the Floppy Disk from the Drive Make sure that the access indicator is not lit then push the eject button to remove the floppy disk access indicator eject button CAUTION f the floppy disk is removed when the access indicator is still lit dama
230. error messages are displayed Attempted to remove the module during calibration Or hardware error ERROR145 Invalid calibrated data ERROR 144 e Attempted to set invalid numeric values in the DISPLAY mode ERROR145 Note When a calibrated data error appears the error data are stored in memory 1 3 6 IM DC100 01E 13 5 Calibration Required Equipment Name Measurement Accuracy Recommended Range DC Voltage Generator 0 V to 50 V 0 005 of setting 1 UV Yokogawa 9000 4808 DMM to 50 V 0 005 of setting 1 uV HP3458A Decade Resistance Box 0 1 Q to 1000 Q 0 01 Yokogawa 2793 DC Current Generator 0 to 20 mA 0 05 of setting Yokogawa 7651 For OV input it is necessary to either short the input terminals or to monitor the output voltage using the DMM Calibrating Conditions Ambient temperature 23 C 2 C Ambient humidity 55 10 RH AC power supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC when using AC power supply model or AC adapter DC power supply voltage 12 to 28 V DC when using DC power supply model AC power supply frequency 50 60 Hz 1 when using AC power supply model or AC adapter Warm up time at least 30 minutes for this instrument and necessary warm up time for the used equipment Connection terminal screw connections DC Voltage Measurement Apply a rated voltage in the voltage range that is to be calibrated to channel 3 Input terminal
231. erval refer to page 2 4 File Utilization Mode This mode can be set in sub 1 sub 2 display File utilization during writing is displayed on a bar graph The display update period is one second Memory Utilization Mode This mode can be set in sub 1 sub 2 display Built in RAM disk utilization is displayed on a bar graph The display update period is one second Alarm Search Mode This mode can be set for the main display sub display 1 and sub display 2 Channels at which an alarm occurred will be searched for and their measurement values displayed The display update interval is 2 seconds Bargraph Mode This mode can be set for sub display 1 Measurement values which are shown on the main display will be shown as a bargraph The display update interval is the same as the interval of the main display Alarm Status Mode This mode can be set for sub display 1 and 2 The display will show per channel whether or not an alarm occurred refer to page 2 7 On one display the alarm status of a maximum of 30 channels can be monitored depending on the number of input channels The display update interval is 0 5 seconds Relay Status Mode This mode can be set for sub display 1 and 2 The display will show the operating status of internal switches alarm output relays refer to page 2 7 On one display a maximum of 30 relay statuses can be monitored The display update interval is 1 second Clock Mode This mode can only be set for sub disp
232. esentative RAM ERROR Main memory error Contact your nearest sales representative RAM DISK ERROR RAM disk error Contact your nearest sales representative FLOPPY ERROR Floppy disk error Contact your nearest sales representative SCSI ERROR SCSI controller error Contact your nearest sales representative FLOPPY amp SCSI ERROR Floppy disk and SCSI Contact your nearest sales representative controller error MAIN NV READ ERROR Internal nonvolatile Contact your nearest sales representative memory read error MAIN NV WRITE ERROR Internal nonvolatile Contact your nearest sales representative memory write error SYSTEM ERROR System error Check whether each unit or power code is AQ number AU number connected properly after turning off the power switch If the same error occurs again even though you turn on the power switch contact your nearest sales representative An error occurs between Same as above the main unit and communication module RESET ERROR eoueueojure y pue IM DC100 01E 13 5 13 5 Calibration Overview We recommend that you calibrate the DC100 at least once a year to assure its measurement accuracy When calibrating please contact your nearest Sales representative at its address on the back cover of this manual Press and hold the MODE key and then turn on the power switch to place the instrument in the calibration mode Select the
233. et e eee Chapter 4 9 6 Mode Display 2 1 4 1 to 4 15 Monitor Display Oprati ioci eoe e etes Model and Suffix Codes sse 3to6 Module information eese 9 17 Monitor Display Mode eese 2 1 Moving average functions 2 11 8 10 number of samples for seen 2 11 8 10 N Names 1 4 to 1 11 3 4 to 3 8 VENISSE 3 4 NO ALEARM 4 7 to 4 9 Noise Countermeasures 0 0 0 cece ceesecceeeeseceesesseesesecesseees 3 34 to 3 43 O Operating conditions reference eerte 14 8 Operation patel 5 oie e eee eta ee rete eee ey eR SER 1 4 1 5 Operation nene See mode Optional modules 4 1 7 alarm module 2 13 communication interface modules esses 2 14 DI DO ri dule 5 ete 2 13 SUMMALY E 2 5 Periodic maintenance eese 13 1 Power CODDeCLOT reo GG EH GE TOT EC v ds 1 4 1 5 3 27 cable code c ado E e oes 3 5 3 1 3 27 1 4 1 5 3 31 terminals b ve WR BEER EN TUI 1 5 3 28 Power supply voltage seen 2 4 3 27 3 28 Pre triggers ee e e a e eer 2 5 6 6 Protective grounding sese See gro
234. et for one alarm output relay or internal switch The operation mode in the alarm output relay or internal switch can be set when an alarm occurs For details see Section 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch on page 10 5 When the alarm module or DI DO module is not recognized as system module the relay is set to OFF For the system recognition see page 3 31 IM DC100 01E 12410 pue ejdsiq Bumes wey Bunnoox3 8 2 Acknowledging Alarm Display Explanation RECORD KEYLOG 4 Alarm display When an alarm status is detected and an alarm is issued the ALARM lights To display the alarm status for each channel see Section 4 4 Using the ALARM SEARCH Display on page 4 7 or Section 4 8 Using the ALARM STATUS Display on page 4 12 To display the alarm output relay or internal switch status see Section 4 9 Using the RELAY STATUS Display on page 4 13 If an alarm occurs while the alarm display hold ALARM HOLD is ON because the alarm has already been triggered the ALARM and alarm status displays flash Even after the alarm status is released the displays still flash When the alarm status hold function is ON use the alarm acknowledge function to determine the current status of the alarm To do this display the FUNC menu select ALARM ACK then press the ENTER key to use the alarm acknowledge function For details see Section 2 4 Alarm Fun
235. f the input data item applied Unit of Input Preset Unit Conversion Formula INTVL no conversion gt measured data values sec gt measured data values x measurement interval min gt measured data values x measurement interval 60 hour measured data values x measurement interval 3600 day gt measured data values x measurement interval 86400 10 26 IM DC100 01E 10 12 Setting Conditions for Creating Reports Starting Stopping Report Making Report making can be started or stopped in two ways Press the FUNC key and select REPORT START or REPORT STOP from the FUNC menu Use the event action functions to define the start stop of making a report for the following events Edge action You can define every event as an edge action to start stop report making Level action You can use remote alarm and relay as events to start stop report making Report making starts at the same time that any of these events occur Report making stops when the event clears Note If you start report making all reports created up to that point are reset When report making is in progress you cannot make changes to measurement channels measuring ranges or dates and times nor can you copy information on the ranges If any computed data are included in your report making let computing start first and then get report making started If you fail to enable computing the data in your reports will become meaningless
236. following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key The main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be saved when you reach the final display of that setting CSKA Lower menu Ces gt a T EE S Io TEMP ENTER TEMP C ENTER CF 4 TEMP SET ESC IM DC100 01E 10 21 195 sPunes oiseg 10 11 Selecting the Temperature Unit from C or F option Se lecting the temperature unit TEMP The temperature unit can be selected from the following C which is the initial value or F Note In the User s manual all functions and operations are explained using the C unit When using the F unit replace the C unit with the F unit For the measurement range measurement accuracy and maximum resolution in case of using the F range refer to the following table as a replacement of the one on page 14 11 Measurement range Refer to the following table Measurement accuracy maximum resolution Replace the values using the following formula F value C value x 9 5 32 When changing the temperature unit as descibred a
237. g the ALARM SEARCH Display Points to Note when Using the ALARM SEARCH Display When all three displays are set to ALARM SEARCH display the main display will start displaying data of the channel with the smallest channel number on sub display 1 data of the next two channels will be displayed while on sub display 2 data of the next two channels will be displayed When the data are updated every two seconds the display will be replaced with data of the next consecutive channel When the input type of all channels is set to SKIP then depending on the display settings as described below NO ALARM will be displayed When the main display is set to ALARM SEARCH display then this will be displayed on the main display regardless of the settings of sub display 1 and 2 When sub display 1 is set to ALARM SEARCH display and the main display is set to any other mode than ALARM SEARCH then this will be displayed on sub display 1 regardless of the setting of sub display 2 When sub display 2 is set to ALARM SEARCH display and the main display is set to any other mode than ALARM SEARCH and sub display 1 to any other mode than ALARM SEARCH then this will be displayed on sub display 2 When on any of the main sub displayl or sub display 2 NO ALARM appears other displays which may have been set to ALARM SEARCH will turn blank Only the selected display mode on sub display 1 and the status display on sub disp
238. ge to the magnetic head of the floppy disk drive or to data saved on the floppy disk may result Before removing the floppy disk always make sure that the access indicator is OFF Do not leave a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive for a long time If left in the drive dust or foreign matter may get into the floppy disk drive leading to damage of the drive General Precautions Regarding Handling of Floppy Disk For general precautions regarding handling of floppy disks refer to the instruction manual provided with the disk IM DC100 01E 2 1 Display Functions The inter active front panel display consists of three rows The first row is the main display and the second and third row are sub display 1 and 2 respectively Monitor Mode and Status Display Monitor Mode Auto Mode This mode can be set for the main display sub display 1 and sub display 2 Measurement values of all channels will be consecutively displayed with update interval Manual Mode This mode can be set for the main display sub display 1 and sub display 2 Measurement values of a single channel will be displayed The display update interval is the same as the measurement interval refer to page 2 4 Page Mode This mode can be set for the main display When choosing this display the measurement values of 5 consecutive channels will be displayed as a page using also sub display 1 and 2 The display update interval is the same as the measurement int
239. git denotes the module number slot number The configurable range depends on the location where the power monitor module is connected A strain input module takes up twice the space of a standard size module This results in the number of the slot following the one where the strain input module is installed being a missing number See page 3 8 for more information Ending Channel Number The two digits that follow the starting channel number constitute the ending channel number For the configurable range see Starting Channel Number above Youcannot enter a channel number that is smaller than the starting channel number If you have entered the same number as the starting channel number only that one particular channel is included in your configuration configuration of the type of input span etc When you move the cursor from the starting to the ending channel number the ending channel number becomes the same as the last two digits of the starting channel number Measurement Mode The measurement mode should be 2 k 20 k or 200 k The measuring ranges are as shown below depending on the measurement modes and gauge methods Gauge method 2k 20k 200 k 1 gauge method 2000 to 2000 ue 20000 to 20000 ue 200000 to 200000 ue 2 gauge method 1000 to 1000 ug 10000 to 10000 ue 100000 to 100000 ue 4 gauge method 500 to 500 ue 5000 to 5000 ue 50000 to 50000 ue Setting the Span SPAN Set the left and right spans wit
240. gt Select Setting Parameter RELAY BURN OUT RJC LOCK FUNC_PARMT1 noa 227223 ser ser Enter Operating Procedure Main menu SET UP L__ 1 4 C O Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established Lower menu n FUNC PARM ENTER PANEL DATA WRITE ENTER 4 DATA WRITE FUNC ENTER FUNC PARM SET iESC O A FUNC3 OFF PANEL ALARM ACK ENTER 4 ALARM ACK FUNC ENTER CA FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL ALARM RESET ENTER 4 ALARM RESET FUNC ENTER O FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL TIMER RESET ENTER 4 TIMER RESET FUNC ENTER OV FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL MATH_START ENTER 4 MATH_START FUNC ENTER C FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL MATH CLR START ENTER 4 MATH CLR START FUNC ON FUNC FUNC3 OFF PANEL MATH_STO
241. hannel will not be displayed When the input type of all channels is set to SKIP ALL SKIP will be displayed AUTO Display for Sub display 1 Data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously Channel No Difference between Channels delta Alarms Measurement Values Same as for the main display Engineering Units If the channel number has been selected to appear on the display the first four characters of the unit setting are used for displaying engineering units The first four characters will also be displayed even if the first character of the unit setting is a space If TAG has been selected to appear on the display or when XXXXXX OOOOOO are displayed as measurement value no engineering unit will be displayed Selected Display Mode refer to page 4 1 for procedure This only appears on sub display 1 when monitoring The arrow shows to which display the display mode refers 004d L 0 0926V 005 0 0824V AUT L Selected display mode Engineering unit Measurement value Alarm Difference between channels Channel No 1st digit unit No A will be displayed in the case of optional computation channels 2nd digit slot No 3rd digit channel No in units of 1 Others Same as for the main display IM DC100 01E 4 1 Using the AUTO Display AUTO Display for Sub display 2 Data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously Ch
242. hapter 4 Sub display 2 See chapter 4 Status indicator oe Operation panel O lc See chapters 3 to 12 Ser ae uiejs S DCIOQ Caitecroa YOKOGAWA Power switch See page 3 27 Floppy disk drive Rear AC power supply model SCSI Connector Extension cable connectors Function grounding terminal 8j Power connector A See page 3 27 o SUB UNIT VF AN WARNING Power fuse See page 13 2 located in the main unit Terminals DC power supply model SCSI Connector Extension cable connector Function grounding terminal E DC power fuse SUB UNIT VF WARNING 2 9 A See page 13 2 2 DC power connector FP A See page 3 29 e Terminals IM DC100 01E 1 5 1 3 Names of Parts Subunit DS400 Module connector Lid covering the ext
243. he event writing is suspended at the detection of an event and resumes at the resetting of the event see the following figure Setting the timer match time or manual function key to the event repeats suspension and resumption of data writing at the generation of each event CP FDD All files in the built in RAM disk are copied on a floppy disk Whether to cancel files after copying or not depends on the setting in the MEM SET of the SET UP menu Copying after a conversion to ASCII format cannot be done IM DC100 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions CP SCSO to CP_SCS7 All files in the built in RAM disk are copied on a MO ZIP or PD Whether to cancel files after copying or not depends on the setting in the MEM SET of the SET UP menu Copying after a conversion to ASCII format cannot be done Displayed only on models with the C 5 option SCSO to SCS7 represent the SCSI ID numbers Check the ID numbers of SCSI devices that are connected because ID numbers are displayed even if there are no devices connected to them An edge action and a level action cannot be set at the same time For a level action only one setting can be made f writing suspension resumption is set as a level action the following operation is developed Example of PAUSE operation Press the START key Press the START key Event Event Event Event generated released generated released Y y y y Suspension Action Resumption FILE
244. he selected data items can then be assigned to channel numbers xx1 to xx6 to show them on the display as well as save them Restrictions apply to the combination of selectable data items however depending on the method of input wiring Conditions of measurement Measuring range for current and voltage inputs 10 of the measuring range lt current and voltage inputs lt 100 of the measuring range Vl range is monitored in frequency measurement All measurements are done relative to the frequency on a channel for V1 and therefore the results of measurements are not guaranteed if the V1 input is out of the range noted above f the input apparent power falls below 10 of the span the instrument cannot measure the phase and power factor negative overflow A maximum of two scans worth of data become invalid immediately after a change has been made to the measuring range and or wiring 14 16 IM DC100 01E 14 4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module Measuring accuracy and resolution Measured under the following standards of operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH supply voltage 90 to 250 V AC AC power supply 10 to 32 V DC DC power supply power supply frequency 50 60 Hz 1 AC power supply warm up time 30 minutes minimum no effect on instrument operation due to vibration etc Measured Data Item Measuring Accuracy Resolution Effective voltage
245. he settings should be as follows baud rate 2400 to 19200 bps data length 8 bit parity ODD stop bit 1 3 10 IM DC100 01E 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables RS 422 A RS 485 Connecting the RS 232 C cable For details on connecting the RS 232 C connector of the RS 232 C communication interface module to a personal computer see IM DC100 11E DC100 Communication Interface User s Manual CAUTION When dis connecting the RS 232 C cable turn OFF the power of both the personal computer and the instrument If the power is not turned OFF malfunctions may occur and the internal circuitry may be damaged A Note To reduce noise use ferrite cores e g ZCAT 3035 1330 from TDK for the interface cable as shown below Two ferrite cores should be installed near both ends of the interface cable If the noise is particularly bad use several ferrite cores in series Use a shielded cable for the interface cable and make a one point grounding at the function grounding terminal of this instrument together with the functional ground terminal of the personal computer Personal computer Function grounding terminal ON L Data length Baud rate ON sw2 OFF L four wire two wire Stop bit Parity ON I L A
246. hin the limits of the input range In the SPAN menu item the left hand value is the left span and the right hand value the right span Note If you have connected any new strain gauge or changed the measuring range initialization of settings or 1eeurqueds ed 1ndu ay 6umes reconfiguration of the system also changes the measuring range back to its default you must go through initial balancing See Section 5 5 Performing Initial Balancing Initialization on a Strain Input Channel for more information IM DC100 01E 5 11 5 5 Performing Initial Balancing Initialization on a Strain Input Channel INIT BALANCE rum referee O Cer INS DEL Select Function item RANGE ALARM we mem ser ser Entrer runc Operating Procedure Press the FUNC key to enter the FUNC menu Using and select and or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below Toexit any of the following menu items during the procedure press the MODE ESC key This returns to the first item of the menu Note however that your new settings and selections are canceled If you have made changes to any item executable with the FUNC key information on initial balancing may not appear on the display Performing Initial Balancing Main menu item ALARM ACK al INIT BALANCE ENTER gt BALANCE CH 001 010
247. ible however to wire extension bases in such a manner that the total sum of modules already mounted on the subunit and the extension bases being wired exceeds the maximum number of modules four for the DS400 subunit and six for the DS600 subunit allowed for mounting on the subunit Either a 10 channel universal input module DU100 11 or DU100 12 or a 10 channel DCV TC DI module DU200 11 or DU200 12 can be mounted onto each extension base Extension module DV100 011 e o o Qo lnt l1 000 2 lewz o o o Ar lens o o o lers o o o ooo let o o o lws o o o Subunit DS400 600 O Extension Extension cable cable 7 lot number setup switch Select an unused slot number 9o Terminator on off switch Ere p Set this switch to ON for the last extension les base in the connection e z Either a 10 channel universal input module DU100 11 or DU100 12 or a 10 channel Lad DCV TC DI module DU200 11 or DU200 12 ato ile Extension base DV100 012 Note Make sure the subunit power is turned off before connecting to the ext
248. ic files are set automatically as follows MddhhmmZ DAS M Month 1 to 9 X Y and Z X Y and Z stand for October November and December respectively dd day 1to31 hh hour 0 to 23 mm minute 0 to 59 Z Fixed to 7 IM DC100 01E 6 13 ejeg Buia 6 4 Setting Writing Operation of Periodic File Report Data Report file The file names of report files are set automatically as follows Hourly report file yymddhhn RBI Daily report file Dyymddn RBI Monthly report file Myymn RBI yy dd hh D M n Note year 00 to 99 day 1 to 31 hour 0 to 23 Fixed to D for daily reports Fixed to M for monthly reports character 0 to 9 A to W The format of periodic files are the same as that of the measured computed data files The files can be analyzed in the same way as the measured computed data files File Size Report file The file sizes are as follows File Type File Size Area Used on Built in RAM Disk Hourly report 3634 Bytes 4096 Bytes Daily report standard 3634 Bytes 4096 Bytes Daily report extended 15346 Bytes 15360 Bytes Monthly report standard 3634 Bytes 4096 Bytes Monthly report extended 18762 Bytes 19456 Bytes Periodic file The file sizes of periodic files are shown on the next page 6 14 IM DC100 01E 6 4 Setting Writing Operation of Periodic File Report Data seMq 9speroL ELL 5
249. ich the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established Main menu SETUP cc OOQ Lower menu f BURN OUT ENTER 9001 01 BURN OUT OFF D gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 BURN OUT OFF D gt Select Channel No 4 ai 001 01 BURN OUT OFF ENTER OFF DOWN UP i BURN OUT SET ESC 2 RJC ENTER 001 01 RJC INT D gt Select Channel No i 001 01 RJC INT D gt Select Channel No i 001 01 RJC INT ENTER INT EXT 4 CO RJC SET ESC l 001 01 RJC EXT ENTER INT EXT 4 EXT VALUE ___ OuV ENTER gt Ext Value Limit 20000 20000uV 4 RJC SET ESC gt 10 8 IM DC100 01E 10 5 Setting Burn out Reference Junction Compensation Setting Burn out BURN OUT Set the overtravel position for each channel when burn out occurs OFF The burn out function is not actuated DOWN The output extends to the minimum value of the span UP The output extends to the maximum value of the span The default setting is OFF Setting Reference Junction Compensation RJC Set either the internal or the external compensation for each channel INT internal compensation is performed EXT external compensation is performed For external compensation set the voltage to be comp
250. idate protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding Protective Grounding Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent an electric shock before turning ON the power Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of protective grounding terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding and Fuse Do not operate the instrument when protective grounding or fuse might be defective Do not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Fuse To prevent a fire make sure to use fuses with specified standard current voltage type Before replacing the fuse turn OFF the power and disconnect the power source Do not use a different fuse or short circuit the fuse holder Do not Remove any Covers There are some areas with high voltages Do not remove any cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by qualified personnel only External Connection To ground securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to measurement or control unit d IM DC100 01E 7 How to Use this Manual This User s Manual consists of the following fourteen chapters and Index Chapter Title Descript
251. ieesenr mem ser set Entrer Lmrunc Press the MEM SET key to enter the MEM SET menu Select set using the GS keys escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu MEMORY T Lower menu INIT INIT YES NO YES 4 INIT OK Ena of initialization ESC Explanation The internal RAM disk is initialized All the data in the RAM disk will be deleted Thus copy necessary data to a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD before carrying out initialization Note The communication function is suspended during initialization 7 1 0 IM DC100 01E 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches Relevant Keys RECORD gt eor C mar 001 01 1 OFF sm os INS DEL 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 OFF 4 OFF RANGE ALARM Cod FD COPY mem ser enter mrunc Operating Procedure Press the ALARM key to enter the ALARM menu Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you
252. ilization can be displayed in sub display 1 or 2 The remaining capacity of the built in RAM disk is displayed on a bar graph A graph corresponding to the utilization is displayed as a discrete segment bar graph in which the entire file utilization is equally divided into 40 segments The utilization percentage and the built in memory capacity are displayed on the right of the bar graph IM DC100 01E 4 7 Using the BARGRAPH Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation DISP MODE aa START ESC FUNC CO STOP INS DEL RANGE ALARM CP FD COPY MEM SET SET ENTER M FUNC 1 Select the sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select BAR using the MODE key Display 003 0 0172V 1 5000 III NNN Nitti 2 0000 BAR 004 0 0153V 005 0 0123V Bargraph Display Sub display 1 can be turned into a bargraph display The measurement data on the main display are displayed as a bargraph on sub display 1 The bargraph shows a graph corresponding to the measurement value showing the span divided into 40 equal parts The left side of the bargraph shows the left span the right side of the bargraph shows the right span When you are using the linear scaling function the left and right side of the bargraph show the left scaling and right scaling value respectively Engineering units are not displayed When the main
253. ilization display eese 4 9 Filter iniu 2 4 10 4 MU H M 3 38 First channel 575i ce REEF e ERES 5 2 Hlags dcos oe o tT tede 9 11 12 2 Alarm display hold eee 2 10 10 4 C mbputation eee eret repr re ER ette 2 17 D ta saving eoe Rede 2 5 2 6 ll T 2 1 Eyent action es asc et ener ik n ea 2 12 9 1 to 9 11 External in Qutp t ett reitera deret 2 12 Key lock keylock 2 12 9 15 10 12 10 13 Match Time function 8 10 9 9 Measurement input 20 0 eeeeseeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeereeeeee 2 3 2 4 Relay hold See also HOLD NON HOLD 2 8 10 7 Function Grounding Terminal function ground terminal ERE 7 3 9 3 11 3 43 lg UE 5 HOLMER oeiee r RON Ee es 13 2 replacement Of eee eH E 13 2 Group reset Grot p setUng iip tee e ree YR PH TE 12 9 H Handshake n a t Ere i ia RO VY Ln 3 10 14 28 High limit alarm eese See alarm High resolution 14 12 HOLD NON HOLD 2 9 10 7 Hysteresis cete n eR EA 2 8 10 4 AriitializatiOti 7 10 9 17 Input channel eccesso 1 2 1 3 filter Instrument number Integration time See A D converter integration time Interna
254. ilt in RAM disk to a floppy disk whether a file in the copying source is cancelled or not at the same time as copying can be set File Alarm Function If the remaining capacity of the file decreases below the corresponding specified time while writing measured computed data a file alarm is output from a relay see 2 13 IM DC100 01E 2 7 suonounj 2 4 Alarm Function This function will show an alarm on the display or generate an alarm output signal when the measurement conditions of a channel exceed fall below preset values Up to four alarms can be set for each channel Alarms can be set up to 4 items per channel Type of Alarms Six types of alarms are available namely high limit alarm low limit alarm high limit on rate of change low limit on rate of change difference high limit and difference low limit Interval for Rate of Change Alarms In case of high low limit on rate of change alarms variation is measured over a preset interval and if the variation exceeds a preset value an alarm occurs This interval can be set and applies to all channels High limit on rate of change eLow limit on rate of change p Measured Vi variation Measur d Measur ement 2 ement Suan et variation value Set variation valug T T T TT 2 T Y variation to Time t Time _ __ Set interval Set interval t2 t1 t2 ti
255. imately 115 Accordingly thyristor noise can be defined as follows Thyristor noise commercial power supply pulse noise Inverter Commercial power supply is converted to direct current by a rectifier sometimes the thyristor is used as the rectifier to stabilize direct current and then modulated by a switching transistor and finally converted into alternating current at the desired frequency from tens to hundreds of Hz to drive a motor for example If the load to be driven is a fluorescent lamp the frequency is tens of kHz Accordingly inverter noise can be defined as follows Inverter noise commercial power supply pulse noise high density variable low frequency noise Since the density of pulse noise is high compared to that of a thyristor and in addition there is variable frequency noise it is difficult to consider a countermeasure for inverter noise Commercial power supply Rectifier output DC output Inverter output Commercial 35 Rectifier DC filter Inverter Motor power supply OMe Principle of inverter 3 34 IM DC100 01E 3 12 Countering Noise Propagation of Noise INVERTER MOTOR 86 04 10 19 30 SRMPLE 0 05 ms 300 0 V Voltage waveform 300 0 25 00ms 3 2 000 R a D D o 5 Current waveform a 5 2 000 0 00 Voltage current waveforms of an inverter 25 00ms Relay A relay is frequently used to amplify alarm and temperature controller outputs However si
256. in Case of Computation Error and Setting the Time Axis for TLOG Trouble shooting and Maintenance 13 1 Periodic Maintenance and Recommended Parts Replacement Period esses 13 1 13 2 Replacing the Buses za n ento eee e e Pe dE HH RE eet oes 13 2 13 9 Troubleshooting tete eie dile eoe dee ee RE ee ae 13 3 13 4 Error Codes RUE Nd 13 4 13 5 Calibration iere ee eene et etd cie ete eti eee reete eer ener ee 13 6 Specifications 14 1 Specifications of DC100 DS400 DS600 00 eseeecseeseeeeseeseseeecsecseecseescsecseessesaeneesesesseeaeeeeseeaes 14 2 Specifications of Universal Input Module and DCV TC DI Input Module 14 3 Specifications of mA input Module eese eee 14 4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module esee nnne 14 5 Specifications of Strain Input tnt tnnt nnne 14 6 Specifications of Pulse Input Module 14 7 Specifications of Digital Input Module 14 8 Specifications of Alarm Module eeeeeseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeenene tenente PE EE eai E S 14 9 Specifications of DI DO Module eese 14 10 Specifications of Communication Interface Module 14 11 Specifications of the Retransmission Module seen 14 12 Specifications of Extension Module and Extension Base eee 14 13 Dimensional Drawings
257. in continuous channels use the decimal point as follows The decimal point of an alarm value when the continuous channels have different measuring ranges should be in the position determined by the individual measuring range If the decimal point is outside the measuring range an error occurs For example if channels with measuring ranges 20 mV and 2 V and a type T thermocouple channel are all set to an alarm value of 10000 then the alarm values in the respective channels are as follows 10 000 mV in the 20 mV measuring range channel 1 0000 V in 2 V measuring range channel 1000 0 C in the type T thermocouple channel A type T thermocouple has a measuring range from 200 0 to 400 0 C so an error results For details on the decimal point positions in individual measuring ranges see Chapter 14 Specifications 8 2 IM DC100 01E 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches Setting Relays Internal Switches Set which alarm output relay or internal switch should be triggered when an alarm occurs Select the desired alarm output relay or internal switch from among the following The default setting is OFF OFF Alarm output relays and internal switches remain OFF 501 to S60 60 internal switches are provided UMN U Unit number for an alarm module or a DI DO module M Slot number for an alarm module or a DI DO module N Number 0 to 9 For details see page 3 8 Multiple alarm setpoints can be s
258. in menu sET 1 a T Q Lower menu MEDIA ENTER MEDIA FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SCSIO IDENTIFY i FLOPPY DELETE ENTER SAVE LOAD DIR DELETE INFO FORMAT DELETE TYPE DAT ENTER DAT DAS PNL SET CSV RBI 4 DELETE FILE AAA ENTER AAA BBB CCC 4 DELETE YES ENTER NO YES 4 DELETE OK End of setting ESC d Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed SCSILI is the SCSI ID number that is connected Deleting a data file in the SETUP mode A data file can be deleted in the same way as in the SET mode Select MEDIA from the SETUP menu Main menu SETUP oo T Lower menu H MEDIA ENTER MEDIA FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SCSILI IDENTIFY 4 FLOPPY DELETE ENTER SAVE LOAD DIR DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 DELETE TYPE DAT ENTER ii DAS PNL SET CSV RBI DELETE FILE AAA ENTER Ma BBB CCC DELETE YES ENTER NO YES 4 DELETE OK End of setting ESC Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed SCSILI is the SCSI ID number that is connected 11 6 IM DC100 01E 11 4 Deleting a Data File on a Floppy Disk Explanation A file saved on a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD is deleted Type of File to Be Deleted DAT DAS RBI PNL SET CSV Deletes the measured computed data Deletes the periodic file Deletes the report data Deletes the setting data in the
259. ing Range and Span Main menu item 001 01 STRAIN 200k gt 4 001 01 STRAIN 200k D gt Select Channel No 4 001 01 STRAIN 200k D 1 001 01 STRAIN 200k ENTER 2k 20k 200k 4 SPAN 20000 20000 ENTER gt Span limit 20000 to 20000 10 ue 4 SET OK configuration complete ESC Setting Linear Scaling Main menu item 001 01 STRAIN 200k C Select Channel No Submenu items 4 001 01 STRAIN 200k C 001 01 S TRAIN 200k gt Select Channel No nfirms the latest settings L 001 01 SCL STRAIN 200k Press twice ky 001 01 SCL STRAIN 200k ENTER 2k 20k 200k 4 SPAN 20000 20000 ENTER Span limit 20000 to 20000 10u 4 SCL 100 00 _100 00 4 SET OK configuration co ENTER mplete ESC IM DC100 01E 5 4 Configuring the Measuring Range and Span or the Linear Scaling of a Strain Input Channel Explanation Setting the Channel Number Set the channel number for which you want to configure the type of input span and so on In this procedure determine from which channel starting channel to which channel ending channel you want to include in your configuration Starting Channel Number The first three digits on the main display constitute the starting channel number The first digit is the unit number The second di
260. installed on the DC100 and the corresponding system configuration To set the retransmission setting in SET SET3 menu select SET or SET3 in OUTPUT IM DC100 01E 10 19 195 sPunes oiseg 10 10 Selecting Display Update Interval Registering Details Set Selected with SET UP Menu and Terminating SET UP Menu Relevant Keys ODE ESC SETUP DISPLAY in Garten GD GD INS Operating Procedure gt Select Setting Parameter JUT RJC LOCK FUNC_PARM SET_PARM DISPLAY TIT aeuum KD mem ser ser Enter f mrunc Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the CS keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established Main menu SETUP C O Lower menu DISPLAY ENTER AUTO INTERVAL 2 ENTER 2345 4 Eu AUTO INTVL SET ESC
261. insulation off the leadwire The recommended torque for fastening the wi re clip screw is 0 4 to 0 5 Nem IM DC100 01E 3 21 pue uonejeisu 3 6 Connecting the Signal Lines Wiring Diagrams Single phase Two wire Configuration A 4 t SOURCE LOAD SOURCE LOAD Single phase Three wire Configuration power monitor modules for three phase use only Aa SOURCE LOAD y SOURCE v N T LOAD V FUSE v A3 AN LZ Three phase Three wire Configuration dual current dual voltage measurement power monitor modules for three phase use only A SOURCE LOAD 9 ns A _ Three phase Three wire Configuration triple current triple voltage measurement power monitor modules for three phase use only SOURCE LOAD Three phase Four wire Configuration power monitor modules for three phase use only A a SOURCE LOAD 1 R
262. inue computing with the value following 99999999 reset to 0 For details on how to make the selection see Section 12 5 Setting Action to Be Carried Out in Case of Computation Error and Setting the Time Axis for TLOG SUM The result of computing in this context is that resulting from a separate calculation of TLOG PSUM XXXX If you set the computational expression as TLOG PSUM XXXX 100 the above action does not take place even if the result of the calculation TLOG PSUM XXXX 100 exceeds 99999999 If you have made such selection as to continue computing even if the result exceeds 99999999 the value subsequent to 99999999 is reset to 0 If the next measured value is 4 after the result of computing has proved to be 99999999 that value is not reset to O but is counted in sequence from 0 to 3 giving 3 as the result 12 7 uoneyndwoy Bunnooexa3 l POW LIN 24 eiqermeAv 12 3 Setting a Constant SET CONST a Emo GO Ceo INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC CH_C1 s eance acanu 27 mem set Enter mrunc Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the CS keys escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final di
263. ion Chapter 1 System Configuration Explains the position of the DC within DARWIN its configuration etc Chapter 2 Functions Explains the functions of the DC Operating procedures are not explained here Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring Describes cautions for use explains how to install and wire the DC the power cord how to switch ON OFF the DC how to structure system modules how to set the date time explains the noise filter etc Chapter 4 Setting the Monitor Mode Display Explains the display in the monitor mode Chapter 5 Setting the Input Type Span Linear Scaling Explains the operations when setting the input type span and linear scaling function Chapter 6 Writing Measured or Computed Data Explains the operations when writing measured or computed data on the built in RAM disk and the setting procedure for the writing action Chapter 7 Working With Measured or Computed Data File Explains the procedure for copying measured or computed data onto a floppy disk display of directory or file information file deletion in the RAM disk and RAM disk initialization Chapter 8 Executing Alarm Setting or Display and Other Settings Explains how to set an alarm and how to do when an alarm occurs Chapter 9 Event Action Function and Other Functions Explains how to operate the event action function how to copy channel information how to reset alar
264. ion no blank spaces are allowed Note If DATE is selected as file name setting WRITE NAME the writing start time as can be determined form the file name may differ one minute form the actual writing start time File name format when specified by the user FILE 001 DAT Serial number for files 001 to 200 User defined file name 5 characters Serial file numbers are automatically changed only when writing is done continuously with the same name Ifa file with serial number 200 exists during writing in the SINGLE mode this serial file number is not automatically changed Rather the file is given a name with serial number 001 If the same file names exist whether to employ overwriting or to end writing can be set in the SET UP menu ejeg 6 2 Setting a Writing Channel or Writing Operation Writing Period The period in which data are written can be selected from the following INTVL The same as the measuring period Measured computed data are saved without thinning out 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec 4 sec 5 sec 6 sec 10 sec 12 sec 15 sec 20 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min Writing is done with the set period However only those values which are multiples of the measuring period can be selected e LOGIC Only effective if event action is set to action DATA WR Every time an event is generated the dat
265. ion mode 24 When you return to normal measurement after completing calibration turn off the power and then back on Retransmission module Calibrating in CAL EXEC mode 6 Using GS select the CAL EXEC mode ADJUST MODE CAL EXEC S UNIT MODULE No 0 DISPLAY CAL EXEC END 7 Press the ENTER key Selecting the channel to be calibrated 8 Using GS select the channel to be calibrated CAL CH 02 ZERO gt 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 9 Using JD move the cursor 10 Select ZERO or FULL 11 Press the ENTER key CAL OUT 681 gt ZERO Adjust 615 751 12 Set the ZERO value so that 1 V or 4 mA is output The setting rane is from 615 to 751 Set the FULL value so that 5 V or 20 mA is output The setting rane is from 3276 to 3550 13 Press the ENTER key to execute calibration 14 After calibration is completed the following display appears CAL EXECEND gt S UNIT FMODULE No 0 gt CAL CH 02 CAL OUT 681 15 Press the ENTER key IM DC100 01E 13 11 pue 13 5 Calibration Checking calibrated values in the DISPLAY mode Use this mode only for checking the calibrated values It is possible for you to adjust the calibrated value in this mode but depending on the adjustment the instrument may become inoperative For details contact your nearest YOKOGAWA de
266. is a problem take the following measures to reduce the noise Attach a clamp filter ZCAT3035 1330 by TDK to the SCSI cable Insert a filter or an insulation transformer at the power supply of the SCSI device For details see section 3 12 Countering Noise 3 26 IM DC100 01E 3 9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON OFF When Using the Accessory Power Cord DC100 DS400 DS600 when using the accessory power cord Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument AN WARNING e Connect the power cord only after confirming that the voltage of the power supply matches the rated electric power voltage for this instrument e Connect the power cord after checking that the power switch of this instrument is turned off To prevent electric shock or fire always use the power cord supplied by Yokogawa Always use protective grounding to prevent electric shock Connect the power cord of the instrument to a three pole power outlet which has a protective ground terminal Do not use the function grounding marked terminal under the power connecting part as the protective grounding terminal Never use an extension cord that does not have protective grounding otherwise the protection feature will be negated When unplugging the power cord do not pull on the power cord Always hold the plug If the power cord becomes damaged contact your nearest representative listed on the ba
267. is in progress MACH ACK Clears status indication which is displayed in case of incomplete measurement during computation For a detailed description of the FUNC menu refer to 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Reset Timer Reset and Keylock page 9 14 Starting stopping computation using the event action function The event action function can be used to carry out the following operations MATH START Starts computation MATH STOP Stops computation MATH CLEAR Clears data before the first computation is carried out dp o Webs Dac cg Computed data a ne Oe PSOne ee AR eS TAOS Sue d OF ian se Ste SO eim T Start Clear L Measurement interval MATH RESET Clears data after the first computation is carried out TESTSEITE ie 1 i 1 4 1 i Computed data paghi n Qu We Ai ipe eio Ca quoe ong D Op 3o 309 3 t t Start Reset Measurement interval 12 1 0 IM DC100 01E 12 5 Starting Stopping Computation Event action function An example of setting the event action function is given below Set the event action function if you want to reset the results after computation is carried out for a certain period of time then resume computation 1 Set TIMER RST for the MFUNC KEY event 2 Set MATH START for the same MFUNC KEY event 3 Set MATH RESET for TIMER 1 event 4 Set the mode for TIMER No 1 to RELATIVE and TIME to
268. ise in temperature would hinder the measurement accuracy When mounting universal and power modules or DCV TC DI and Power modules together keep the two modules apart at a distance of at least one module width If you mount the power module immediately beside the universal and DCV TC DI module the measuring accuracy of the universal module may fall out of its guaranteed range because of the heat radiating from the power module Noretransmission module can be connected to the right side of universal input module DCV TC DI module since the rise in temperature would hinder the measurement accuracy Verify the type of module by the seal on the top side IM DC100 01E 3 7 Bum pue uonejeisu 3 3 How to Connect the Input Output Modules Location and Location Number Channel Number Alarm Output Relay Number DI DO Number The location numbers correspond to channel numbers for locations where the input module is connected to alarm output relay numbers for locations where the alarm module is connected and to DI DO numbers for locations where the DI DO module is connected Modules are mounted on a unit in slots The number of each module is the same as that of the slot DC100 Stand alone model The location numbers correspond to the location of each module as shown in the figure below DC100 Expandable model As shown below input output location numbers are assigned related to the unit number see the previous page the main
269. itch correspond to the address 10 to 15 respectively IM DC100 01E Bum pue uonejeisu 3 4 Connecting the Interface Cables RS 232 C Communication Settings Communication parameters are set using the three switches located on the RS 232 C modules T 5 Switch 1 p ll Switch 2 Switch 3 ON OFF L Data length Baud rate ON OFF L Baud rate Stop bit Parity m ON m 234 OFF I L Not used Handshake format Switch 1 and No 4 of Switch 2 Baud rate dipswitch No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Switch 2 150 OFF OFF OFF OFF 300 OFF OFF ON OFF 600 OFF ON OFF OFF 1200 OFF ON ON OFF 2400 ON OFF OFF OFF 4800 ON OFF ON OFF 9600 ON ON OFF OFF Default setting 19200 ON ON ON OFF 38400 OFF OFF OFF ON Data length dipswitch No 4 7 OFF 8 ON lt Default setting Switch 2 Parity dipswitch No 1 No 2 NONE OFF OFF ODD OFF ON EVEN ON OFF Default setting Stop bit dipswitch No 3 1 OFF lt Default setting 2 ON Switch 3 Handshake format dipswitch No 1 No 2 No 3 no handshake OFF OFF OFF Default setting XON DTR OFF OFF ON XON RTS OFF ON OFF CTS DTR OFF ON ON CTS RTS ON OFF OFF When the baud rate is set to 38400 there is no handsake Note When you are using the accessory standard software t
270. ized as 0 OFF whereas a closed contact will be recognized as 1 ON The default setting is LEVL DELTA difference between channels Computation can be done only in the same unit Destination channels should lie within the first channel No to the last channel No range The number of the reference channel REF should be lower than the number of the destination channels The default setting for the reference channel is 01 The type of input and the measuring range in the distination channel are the same as for the reference channel After setting the DELTA difference between channels if you attempted to change the type of input and the measuring range setting the difference between channels is released thereby the type of input and the measuring range in the destination channel are returned to their original settings and the span is returned to its initial value RRJC Remote RJC available if the instrument is equipped with the optional MATH function Reference channel RJC Within the setting range of reference channel No TC thermocouple must be selected as the type of input to the reference channel If the channel No or type of input for the reference channel or the type of thermocouple is changed the alarm function will be turned OFF If the type of input for the reference channel or the type of thermocouple is changed the RRJC settings will be cleared and the type of input and measuring range for the reference channel wi
271. ken The measurement values of the second and later measurements will replace these in turn after which the average will be calculated each time IM DC100 01E 2 11 suonounj 2 6 Other Functions Event Action Function Key Lock Function Following the occurrence of an event such as remote control signal 12 alarm internal switch file end signal timer match time or key operation any of the following actions can occur Alarm acknowledge refer to page 2 10 Alarm reset refer to page 2 10 Timer reset This instrument can set six timers There are two timer settings one is the relative time setting and the other is the absolute time setting In the relative time setting a timer is started after the specified numbers of days and hours have elapsed after setting In the absolute time setting a timer is started every specified time interval based on the reference instant A timer reset restores all the relative time setting timers to the state immediately after the setting before the time elapsed Message display A preset message will be displayed on the main display Starting measured computed data writing A file is opened and measured computed data writing starts Suspension restart of measured computed data writing Writing is suspended without closing a file For level action suspension and restart are alternately repeated depending on the event generation or reset Writing start trigger for measured
272. key to enter the SET menu Select set using the C 2 keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear However the new settings selections are canceled New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu sET L 1 Lower menu i OUTPUT ENTER 001 CH D Select the retransmission gt Select Channel No terminal number i 001 CH ENTER Set the measurement gt OFF012345AC computation communication 4 input channel SET OK End of setting ESC Explanation Retransmission terminal number Set the number of the terminal that will enable the retransmission Channel number Set the measurement computation communication input channel number that will be output from the retransmission terminal OFF Retransmission disabled 001 to 560 Measurement channel 001 to 060 for standalone type AXX Computation channel CXX Communication input channel Note If the retransmission module is not detected the OUTPUT items are not displayed After setting the retransmission if the retransmission module is no longer detected during system configuration the retransmission is turned OFF Measurement channels that are not detected by system configuration cannot be specified After setting the retransmission if the measurement channel specified during system configuration is no longer de
273. key to enter the SET menu Select set using the ZS keys ESC RECORD regere CES Ger INS DEL ser set ENTER To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Lower menu COPY RANGE ON OFF ON 4 COPY ALARM ON OFF ON 4 COPY OTHER ON OFF ON COPY 001ch TO 002 10ch COPY 001ch TO 002 10ch COPY 001ch TO 002 10ch SET OK End of setting ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ESC 9 12 IM DC100 01E 9 2 Executing Inter channel Copying Explanation Selecting range copying COPY RANGE ON Copies the type of input measuring ranges spans linear scaling engineering units and tags set OFF The copying of ranges is disabled Selecting alarm copying COPY ALARM ON Copies the type of alarm alarm values and relay internal switch setting OFF The copying of alarms is disabled Selecting copying of other items COPY OTHER ON Copies setting average numbers in moving averages and measured data writing ON OFF OFF The copying of other items is disabled Setting a copy source channel Sets a copy source channel with up to three characters For details on these characters see the figure in Sectio
274. king report AVE Average maximum and minimum over the computing period SUM Sum and cumulative sum over the computing period Sum and Cumulative Sum Sum The total sum over an hour for hourly reports the sum over a day for daily reports or the sum over a month for monthly reports The instrument resets this value each time it makes any of these reports Cumulative sum The total sum up to the preset time to make a report in the case of hourly reports or the sum up to a preset time of the day to make a report in the case of daily reports The instrument resets this value at each preset time or at each preset time of the day for report making The instrument does not perform cumulative summation for monthly reports As an example the following illustrates the process of summation and cumulative summation for hourly reports The example shows the case where the preset time to make a report is 8 00 Results of Le computing 9 00 10 00 11 00 7 00 8 00 9 00 10 00 m Cs Lr A A AAA A Time to make an hourly report A Preset time to make report Unit of Summation SUM UNIT Such input data items as the flowrate that have a unit in sec min hour or day when simply summed give results of computing different from their actual values This occurs because the unit of such a data item differs from that of the measurement interval In that case you can take the output after having converted the unit of summation so it matches that o
275. l ettet eerte tte eoe dee eed eT See RJC Internal switches eese 2 8 8 3 10 5 to 10 7 Interval Display update Eee tne tee ee 2 1 10 20 for scan measurement eseeseeeeeeeee nens 2 4 10 1 for rate of change alarms sess 2 8 10 4 6 6 3 13 Key lock keylock function see 2 13 9 15 setting Of oui e RR 10 12 10 13 KEY LOCK KEYLOCK See Key lock function L Last channel Low limit alarm lower limit alarm eeeees See Alarm Index 4 IM DC100 01E INDEX M MA input module eee 1 7 3 17 14 13 MANUAL I M See Display Match Time function SEMINE Of cusa 8 9 9 9 Measured data Saving 2 5 2 6 Chapter 6 Deleting ze et exe PHP ao e 7 9 11 6 CODI iste te p eio oe ree 2 5 7 1 to 7 5 Measurement input functions eese 2 3 2 4 Measurement interval esee See interval Measurement range retire it erect esee aeree dee 14 2 MEM SET KG 6 3 7 3 7 6 7 8 to 7 10 Memory asta a esee yr hee eee e R eee nee e bent 3 Memory utilization display eese 4 10 Message display eee eed dee eere 8 8 9 10 M FUNC ostentare die ete nadie tia des 9 9 MODE Key tee ert
276. l computer via a communication interface The modules convert them to 1 5 V analog voltage or 4 20 mA analog current signals for output The module cannot be connected to the expanable model s main unit IM DC100 01E 1 2 Product Overview Note When the following handling is done it is necessary to carry out system construction to operate the instrument correctly After executing system construction confirm the module information For details see page 9 16 Connection including addition or replacement removal of subunits or unit number setting see page 3 6 Mounting including addition or replacement removal of modules Example of Connection for the expandable model Main unit DC100 9 zs ai at UND IPS 0 Extension cable 9 amp e oe d Meee 10 ch Universal Input module E D o lello lelo llo T fe Uri Subunit DS600 Up to 6 subunits can be connected
277. l setting or other basic alarm settings see Section 10 3 Select Alarm Interval Hystresis Hold A D Converter integration Timer Filter on page 10 4 For details on interchannel differential computation see Section 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Span on page 5 3 Only H upper limit alarm and L lower limit alarm are available for computation channels Setting alarm values Set one alarm value for each alarm number within the following range depending on the type of input The default value is 0 zero VOLT TC RTD DI and DELTA Within measuring range the related channel DI can be set to either 0 or 1 SCALE Within a linear scaling value Computation channel Within the range specified by the computation function RHand RL VOLT TC RTD DI and DELTA Within 1 to maximum measuring range minus minimum measuring range in the related channel For example set 30000 without using a decimal point if the maximum value exceeds 30000 DI can be set to only 1 SCALE Set 1 to 30000 without using a decimal point dH and dL When the reference channel uses VOLT Within the measuring range When the reference channel uses other than VOLT maximum measuring range minus minimum measuring range to maximum measuring range minus minimum measuring range For the type of input see Section 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Span on page 5 3 Note When setting alarm values
278. lay 2 The current date and time are shown Displaying the Selected Mode To the right of sub display 1 the currently selected display mode is shown for a specific display Status Display Indicators at the right side of the display will light up to show that data saving is in progress refer to page 2 5 alarms are occuring refer to page 2 7 and keys are locked refer to page 2 11 Remote Local Status Display The status of remote local control will be shown on sub display 2 Keys cannot be operated in remote control IM DC100 01E suonounj 2 1 Display Functions Display for Setting the Type of Input Computation and Saving Conditions Menus for setting each of the following functions will be displayed measurement input functions refer to page 2 3 data saving functions refer to page 2 5 alarm functions refer to page 2 7 calculation functions refer to page 2 10 event action function key lock function and external in output function refer to page 2 11 12 Display for Setting Fundamental Functions Menus for performing fundamental settings will be displayed 2 2 IM DC100 01E 2 2 Measurement Input Functions Input Type DC Voltage Measurements can be done after selecting the measurement range per channel The minimum range is 20 mV the maximum range is 50 V Thermocouple Measurements can be done after selecting the type of thermocouple per channel The available types R S B K E
279. lay 2 will appear 4 8 IM DC100 01E 4 5 Using the FILE UTILIZATION Display Relevant Keys DISP MODE KS START ESC FUNC CLOCK CO STOP INS DEL RANGE ALARM CP FD COPY MEM SET SET ENTER M FUNC Operating Procedure FILE UTILIZATION Display for Sub display 1 1 Select sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select FLE using the MODE key Sub display 1 gt lt 50 10100000 4 FLE FILE UTILIZATION Display for Sub display 2 1 Select sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select FLE using the MODE key Sub display 1 and 2 E gt DIINO lt 50 10100000 V FLE F gt lt 50 10100000 Explanation FILE UTILIZATION Display File utilization can be displayed in sub display 1 or 2 File utilization during the present writing is displayed on a bar graph A graph corresponding to the utilization is displayed as a discrete segment bar graph in which the entire file utilization is equally divided into 40 segments The utilization percentage and the corresponding file name are displayed on the right of the bar graph When Saving Report Data and Measured computed Data F gt MIN lt 50 90101010 gt V L L aa ie t Monthly report ON OFF Daily report ON OFF Hourly report ON OFF Measured computed data file name Measured computed data file utili
280. line of the display part EN Writing measured computed data files only EJ Writing periodic file or report file only EX Writing measured computed data file and periodic file or measured computed data file and report file Writing paused EJ Binary copying Restriction During Data Writing The following settings cannot be made during data writing All media source settings except for stopping suspending writing Saving reading set data Measuring range Computation expression constants Group Inter channel copying Media source settings as actions for the event action function IM DC100 01E 6 2 Setting a Writing Channel or Writing Operation Relevant Keys MODE EO START ESC MEMORY WR MODE GO C Operating Procedure Main menu ALARM py INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter CH_SET WR_MODE FL_INFO DIR DELETE CONVT iba DO rowaer mem ser set enter mrunc Press the MEM SET key to enter the MEM SET menu Select set using the GS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Selecting a Writing Channel MEMORY 1 Lower menu H CH
281. ll be set to the one which was in effect before the change was made The span will be set to the initial value of the measuring range mA DC current mA input module This input can be set only for mA input channels The measuring range is 20 mA to 20 mA Setting the Span The measurement range is decided according to the type of input The left and right span must lie within the measurement range However the span is 0 to 1 for the DI input type By setting the span the setting range for the upper lower alarm limit of the rate of change is determined The value on the left side of the SPAN menu shows the left span and the value on the right side of the SPAN menu shows the right span For the remote RJC the setting range for span is the same as that for the reference channel IM DC100 01E 1eeurqueds ed 1ndu ay 6umes 5 2 Setting Linear Scaling and the Span Relevant Keys m ESC 001 10 SCL VOLT 2V elon GO Gey INS DEL gt SKIP VOLT TC RTD DI DELTA SCL koc mem ser ser enter runc Operating Procedure 1 Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu 2 Select set using the GS keys 3 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept 4 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that
282. lower limit difference higher limit difference lower limit higher limit on rate of change lower limit on rate of change Rate of change alarm time interval Can be set to measurement interval x 1 to 15 common to both rising and falling limits Output mode Energize de energize setting AND OR mode setting and output hold non hold setting can be made common to all channels A maximum number of 6 reflash alarm output points can be specified Number of alarm output points Max 300 at subunits up to 300 can be achieved by increasing the number of alarm modules Max number of alarm modules Up to 6 modules can be connected to a subunit 4 in case of DS400 by increasing the number of subunits up to 30 modules can be connected Alarm display Alarm status indication Lights or flashes when an alarm is detected Alarm acknowledge indication Indicator stops flashing by key operation SCSI Interface Standard SCSI Small Computer System Interface ANSI X3 131 1986 Connector Half Pitch 50 pin pin type Connector pin assign ments Unbalanced single end contains a terminator Sapport for SCSI device MO drive 128 230 640 MB Semi IBM format ZIP drive PD drive Standard Computation Functions Kinds of computation Difference between channels linear scaling scaling and moving average Scaling Scalable range DC voltage TC RTD contact Scaling range 30000 to 30000 Measurement accuracy for scaling measurement accuracy for scaling digits
283. m the power failure After the Time of Report Making Before the Time of Report Making Time of Recovery from Power Failure Valid report function start of report making enabled Valid report function start of report making enabled Condition after recovery from power failure Immediately after recovery from power failure Report making Time for report making Data measured up to the point of power failure Data measured over the given period except the power failure time Data included in report making If the power failure time covers the given period of report making no report for that period is made Handling of Faulty Data If data being computed contain any faulty data the instrument treats the data as summarized in the following table depending on the type of computing and faulty data Type of Faulty Data Average Minimum Maximum Instantaneous Value Sum Positive overflow Excluded from Included in computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from computing the result of computing computing Negative overflow Excluded from Included in computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from computing the result of computing computing Channels included in Excluded from Excluded from computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from measurement set to SKIP computing the result of computing computing No channel included Excluded from Excluded from computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from in measurement c
284. main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed Normal operating temperature humidity 20 to 80 RH for 0 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C no condensation Style Number S4 Electrical and mechanical specifications Conform to IEEE Standard 488 1978 Code ISO ASCII code Address 0 to 15 Functions Talker functions Output of measurement values ASCII binary output of setting parameters ASCITI Listener functions Setting of measurement conditions controls of starting and stopping measurement specifying causes of interrupts excluding setting and control of power ON OFF Causes of interrupts Syntax error file end completion of A D conversion operations of internal timer end of data saving incomplete measurement during computation External dimensions Approx 57 W x 137 H x 54 D mm Weight 0 3 kg Style Number S8 Electrical and mechanical specifications Conform to standard EIA RS 232 C Connection method Point to point Communication method Half duplex Synchronization mode Start stop synchronization synchronized by a start and a stop bit Baud rate 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps Start bit Fixed at 1 bit Data length 7 or 8 bits selectable Parity Selectable from even odd or none Stop bit 1 or 2 selectable Transmission distance Max 15m Connector D sub 25 pin IM DC100 01E 14 29 suoneoyioodg 14 10 Specifications of Communication In
285. ment and Release number software package Please refer to these numbers when contacting the dealer Subunit DS400 DS600 Check that the model and suffix code given on the name plate are according to your order Model and Suffix Codes Model Suffix Code Description 08400 4 module connection subunit 08600 6 module connection subunit Type always 00 Power Supply 1 100 240 VAC E 12 28 VDC Power Cord 3 pin inlet w UL CSA cable Part No A1006WD 3 pin inlet w VDE cable Part No AI009WD 3 pin inlet w SAA cable Part No A1024WD 3 pin inlet w BS cable Part No A1023WD 3 pin inlet with screw conversion terminal only when power supply is 1 2 pin inlet with round type connector only when power supply is 2 NO Instrument Number and Style number equipment Please quote these numbers when contacting the dealer IM DC100 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Input Modules Check that the model code given on the name plate is according to your order Model Codes Model Description DU100 11 DU100 21 DU100 31 10 channel universal input module screw type terminal 20 channel universal input module screw type terminal 30 channel universal input module screw type terminal DU100 12 DU100 22 DU100 32 10 channel universal input module clamp type terminal 20 channel universal input module clamp type terminal 30 ch
286. menu is displayed only on models with the M1 option or when the pulse module is installed The REPORT menu is displayed only on models with M3 option The FLAG menu is displayed only on models with the M1 option The SCSIO to SCSI7 menus are displayed only on models with the C5 option From the previous page To the previous page EVT MFUNC KEY ENTER ACT DGE MEMRY DATA WR D ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA WR D m ACT EDGE MEMRY DATALWR ENTER DATA_WR WR_TRIG START PAUSE CP_FDD CP_SCSO CP SCS1 CP_SCS2 CP_SCS3 CP SC84 CP_SCS5 CP_SCS6 CP_SCS7 ACT EDGE ALARM ACK ENTER avo 4 ACT EDGE ALARM RST ENTER C I ACT EDGE TIMER RST ENTER OQ DISP 01 D 4 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 ENTER 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START D 4 avo ACT EDGE MATH START ENTER START STOP CLEAR RESET RST G01 RST G02 RST G03 G04 RST G05 RST G06 RST G07 ACT EDGE FLAG F01 D 4 avo ACT EDGE FLAG F01 ENTER F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE REPORT START D 4 ACT EDGE REPORT START ENTER START STOP ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 D 4 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 ENTER TRG1LD TRG2LD TRGS3 ACT EDGE SCSI0 LD_TRG1 D 4 ACT EDGE SCSI0 LD_TRG1 ENTER LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 L____ ACT LEVL MEMRY P
287. mes uuejvy Bunnoox3 8 6 Setting the Match Time and Moving Average Explanation Setting the Match Time MATCH TIME MATCH TIME No selection of the match time number Three kinds of match times can be set TIME Any time between 00 days 00 hrs 00 min and 31 days 23 hrs 59 min can be set in 1 minute units The default setting is 01 days 00 hrs 00 min If 00 is set to day DD HH MM every day shows the set time If day DD is set to a value other than 00 HH MM of DD day every month shows the set time DD HH and MM give the set numeric values respectively The match time setting is used with the event action function Refer to 9 1 on page 9 1 for details Moving Average MOVE AVE This setting can be set for each channel individually The number of samples used for the moving average can be set from 2 to 64 The default value is 0 which means that no moving average is carried out The result of the moving average is being displayed 8 1 0 IM DC100 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Relevant Keys sequor SN Gaz SET LOGIC CES Ge gt Select Setting Parameter INS DEL MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC CH_CT Pancerna C2 ream mem ser meunc Operating Procedure Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the GS keys
288. mproving quality and efficiency DARWIN is based on a unique new concept to meet these needs The art of measurement is revolutionized by DARWIN which integrates functions of conventional recording and data logging Most existing data acquisition equipment has been the all in one type in which the measurement section and display recording section are contained in one box While this simplifies operation on the one hand it is difficult to adapt to changes in the measurement environment and also makes expansion difficult DARWIN uses a data acquisition engine and remote I O modules which are completely separate from each other It is an entirely new product line which quickly and flexibly copes with various restrictive conditions and changes in specifications There are three instrument series the DA data acquisition instrument series which logs data on a personal computer base the DR series which acquires and records data by connecting various modules to a chart recorder and the DC series which acquires data based on the saving to electronic media Personal computer mE pe a cc FD Subunit Input output modules Extension cables max length 500m IM DC100 01E 1 1 1 2 Product Overview This product is a data collector which can measure and save from small scale 10 ch data up to widely distributed 300 ch multi point data There are two stand
289. ms how to reset the timer how to use the key lock and how to use the external input output function Chapter 10 Basic Settings SET UP Explains functions which usually do not need to be changed and how to set basic functions Chapter 11 Working With a File in SET Mode or SETUP Mode Explains the operations for saving or reading data settings file deletion and floppy disk formatting Chapter 12 Executing Computation Available with the M1 Model Explains the computation function optional Chapter 13 Trouble Shooting and Maintenance Explains maintenance procedures error messages and calibration procedures Chapter 14 Specifications Explains specifications for all features of DC Index Gives the index in main menu and alphabetic order IM DC100 01E Conventions Used in this Manual Used Symbols The following symbol marks are used to attract the operator s attention Affixed to the DC100 indicating that for safety the operator should refer N to the appropriate User s Manual For a list of the User s Manuals refer to page 1 WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent the danger of injury or death to the user Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent damage to the CAUTION po P Note Provides information that is important for proper operation of the DC100 Indicates the relevant panel keys and indicators to carry ou
290. n 4 1 Using the AUTO Display on page 4 2 Setting a destination channel to be copied Sets a channel to which the setting data in the source channel are copied When the COPY RANGE COPY ALARM and COPY OTHER are set to ON individual set data are copied For the setting of a destination channel number see Section 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Span on page 5 2 t is not possible to copy data between measurement channels and computation channels Copying Data from a Computation Channel When copying from an optional computation channel is carried out the following data will be copied When COPY RANGE is ON Computation equation tag When COPY ALARM is ON Alarm When COPY OTHER is ON measured data writing ON OFF Note When writing the measured computed data you are not allowed to copy from channel to channel by setting COPY RANGE or COPY OTHER to ON IM DC100 01E 9 13 pue uonounJ uonoy ueA 3 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Reset Timer Reset and Keylock TIMER_RESET RECORD Emm BS Cr ALARM Func J crock Co stor gt Select Function item DATA WRITE TIMER RESET MATH START MATH 1 Operating Procedure Press the FUNC key to enter the FUNC menu To enter the FUNC menu from the RANGE ALARM MEM SET or SET SET3 menu press the DISP key Select
291. n and process in case of power failure The instrument adds x to the time on an output provided upon recovery from a power failure It does not output the character however if it has been more than 12 hours since the power failure occurred The instrument excludes data occurring during a power failure from its reports If the instrument recovers from a power failure after the time to make a report it makes a report immediately after the recovery f a power failure time is longer than 12 hours the instrument stops report making even if the power is restored The instrument outputs a report for data acquired up to the power failure however immediately after it recovers from the power failure Format of file Binary Hourly 3634 bytes Daily standard 3634 bytes Daily enhanced 15346 bytes Monthly standard 3634 bytes Monthly enhanced 18762 bytes Format of output via communication Binary Number of inputs Stand alone model max 40 Expandable model max 300 Media for data save Buffer memory internal SRAM Capacity 1 MB standard 2 MB or 4 MB option Data backup Around 10 years backup with lithium battery at room temperature while power is off Memory usage Total memory length must be within 1 MB Applicable data Measured values and computed values only possible when optional math function is specified Saving to floppy disk or SCSI device Copies data stored in the buffer memory to the floppy disk or SCSI device
292. n the order of slot 0 slot 1 as viewed facing the rear from right to left Ex 1 When the alarm module is mounted in slot 3 31 to 40 Ex 2 The DI DO module is mounted in slot 4 41 to 42 The default setting is OFF After REFLASH setting when the alarm module or the DI DO module becomes unrecognized as the system of this instrument the relay setting becomes OFF Setting AND OR AND This can be set either to the relays or the internal switches However the relay cannot be set unless the alarm module or DI DO module is mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument Selection of Internal Switch Relay S internal switch is set I 0 to 5 relay is set For the stand alone model setting values other than 0 cannot be selected The default setting is S Setting AND OR The relays or the internal switches are set to AND in up to the set range and set to OR in the range exceeding the set range For internal switches set from 01 01 to 01 60 Forone alarm module 01 01 to 01 60 can be displayed However if this option is installed in slot 4 01 41 to 01 50 is the effective setting range For one DI DO module 01 01 to 01 60 can be displayed However if this option is installed in slot 5 01 51 to 01 52 is the effective setting range Fortwo alarm modules 01 01 to 01 60 can be displayed However if one module is installed in slot 3 and another is installed in slot 5 01 31 to 01 60 is the effective
293. n the wiring This will lower the chances of blowing the internal fuse Fuse 250 V T2 5 A to T4A time lag 20 mm glass tube fuse 12 5 to 32 Recommended A1350EF 250 V T2 5 l t212 5 SCHURTER FST0034 3121 NENNEN Connecting procedure 1 Check thst the power switch is turned off 2 Connect the accessory DC power terminal connector part No A1105JC to the power wire and the DC100 DS400 DS600 Use a power wire with a cross sectional area of 0 3 mm 22AWG or more Install the clamp filter standard accessory near DC100 of power wire Soldering gt DC100 Rated supply voltage 12 to 28 V DC Operating supply voltage 10 to 32 V DC Power consumption About 30 VA max 0 V DC 10 to 32 V DC DS400 DS600 Rated supply voltage 12 to 28 V DC Operating supply voltage 10 to 32 V DC Power consumption About 25 VA max DC100 DC power supply model DS400 DS600 DC power supply model DC power terminal DC power terminal X connector DC power Clamp filter terminal IM DC100 01E 3 29 pue uonejeisu 3 9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON OFF AN DC100 DS400 DS600 when using AC adapter This applies only to products with power supply 2 suffix code Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned off to prevent electric shock
294. nal lines at right angles to the power lines If the power lines are not shielded separate the signal lines and power lines where they cross using steel sheeting at least 1 6 mm thick n Signal lines 2 Power lines Separate analog signal lines and communication cables in the same manner as from power cords When there is influence from a magnetic or electrical field an increase of impedance Step 1 Keep the noise source as far away as possible Magnetic field strength 2 2nr ME 400 Am Example 12 400 A The influence of the external magnetic field on the measuring instrument 400 A m or less IM DC100 01E 3 39 Bum pue uonejeisu 3 12 Countering Noise Step 2 Change the position of the noise source A Leakage magnetic flux of transformer KA f xul MA SSS gt 7477 Move the instrument to location where the influence from magnetic flux is weak B Sparks strong electromagnetic radiation weak electrogmagnetic radiation Move the instrument to a location where the influence from electro magnetic radiation is weak e Grounding a decrease of impedance The grounding method is the point of common mode noise suppression Equipment under measurement EUM The instrument lt 0 7 The difference in the potenti
295. nce Performance Criteria A 0 15 80 MHz 10 V Effect on accuracy Universal input module and DCV TC DI input module 10 of range except for 50 OV range 20 of range 50 V range When the extension module is used 20 of range except for 50 V range 40 of range 50 V range Strain input module 10 of range except for 2000 ue range 50 of range 2000 ue range Other input modules 10 of range IM DC100 01E 14 9 suoneoyioodsg 14 1 Specifications of DC100 DS400 DS600 Main unit installation Desk top floor installation Rack mounting Supplied fittings are used Regardless of which installation method you use be sure to install the units in an upright position Subunit installation Floor mounting Use the feet at the bottom of each unit Direct panel mounting Screw the unit directly to the panel at the specified points DIN rail mounting Use the dedicated mounting brackets Rack mounting Use the dedicated mounting brackets Regardless of which installation method you use be sure to install the units in an upright position Materials Steel plate aluminium plate plastic moldings Color Main unit Display Slate Gray light equivalent to Munsell 0 1 PB 4 6 0 2 DC100 main unit Ice White equivalent to Munsell 6 6 Y 7 9 0 5 Subunit Slate Gray light equivalent to Munsell 0 1 PB 4 6 0 2 Lamp Black equivalent to Munsell 0 8 Y 2 5 0 4 External dimensions DC100 stand alone model approx 338 W
296. nce a counterelectromotive force counter e m f is produced by coil inductance when the relay is turned off and the e m f becomes noise care must be taken Due to chattering at the relay contact tens to hundreds of kHz noise occurs mainly in bursts Thus the noise energy often becomes high Transceiver In large scale plants transceivers are often used for communications between the field and the control room Although W G of the Japanese Electric Measuring Instruments Manufacturers Association recommends to use transceivers covering a wave band of 27 MHz smaller sized transceivers for the 140 or 470 MHz wave band are often used Noise Simulator To test the immunity to pulse noise mainly thyristor noise a noise simulator is often used A test noise of approximately 1 kV for 0 8 us is used synchronously with the power supply frequency Since data acquisition equipment is often used for measurements of equipment subjected to the pulse noise test the influence of noise must be considered Noise is propagated in the following three ways Conduction noise is conducted through a power line input wiring etc Electrostatic induction noise leaks through capacitances between wires and instruments Electromagnetic induction a loop in the input line etc induces an AC voltage by detecting the AC magnetic field In real applications the above three propagation paths are not independent of each other Their combination propagates noise t
297. ng is ENERG Setting Relay Hold HOLD This is a menu which cannot be displayed unless the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument However the internal switches are set simultaneously with relays OFF No relays internal switches hold ON all relays internal switches hold The default setting is OFF Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 20 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 20 IM DC100 01E 10 7 195 sPunes oiseg 10 5 Setting Burn out Reference Junction Compensation SETUP BURN_OUT gt Select Setting Parameter ALARM A D_INTG FILTER RELAY BURN_OUT1 Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure sequo CJ INS DEL a muera CD mem ser ser enter mruwc 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the GS keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to wh
298. nly for the M3 option 14 2 IM DC100 01E 14 1 Specifications of DC100 DS400 DS600 Trigger condition All Trigger conditions are configured with the event action function such as key operation remote control signal alarm status and file end Pretrigger 0 to 100 can be specified in 10 intervals Filename when saving data Measured computed values Selectable from automatic setting and user setting For user setting 5 ASCII characters input last 3 letters are set automatically from 001 to 200 Setting values 8 ASCII characters input Display Display method VFD 5 x 7 dot matrix 3 rows Number of characters Main display 22 large characters 1 row Sub display 1 and 2 40 small characters 2 rows Displayed contents Digital value display data for freely selected channels can be displayed on each row 1 channel per line max 5 rows channel No or tag up to 7 characters alarm search measurement values engineering unit Bargraph display measurement data of the main display are displayed as a bargraph Auxiliary data clock alarm status alarm relay status keylock ON OFF data saving operation file utilization memory utilization Alarms when equipped with Alarm module Number of settings Up to four alarms can be set for each channel Kind of alarms selection from higher limit lower limit difference higher limit difference lower limit higher limit on rate of change lower limit on rate of change Rate
299. nt Setting the Unit Number of each Subunit only for the use with the DC100 expadable model When connecting subunits to the DC100 expandable model it is necessary to assign a distinctive unit number to each subunit This number can be selected from 0 to 5 the setting 6 and up will not be recognized and is set as shown in the figure below by a setting switch rotary dipswitch Note When you connect an input output module at the location of the setting switch the switch can not be operated anymore Therefore make sure you set the switch before connecting any input output module there It is convenient for confirming unit numbers to write each unit number setting on the gray concave surface at the top of DS600 subunit or on the left side of DS400 subunit Connecting Method Verify that power to the DC100 DS400 DS600 has been turned OFF Remove the cover of the location where the module will be connected Do not remove any N cover of locations where no module will be connected Ww Hold the module so that the male part of the connector at the back side of the module matches the female part of the receiving connector Then connect the module Fasten the module by fastening the two accessory M3 screws Cover Switch for setting the unit number settable from 0 to 5 7 0 wv 9 the unit number P Screws to fasten the module 3 6 IM DC100 01E 3 3 How t
300. ntact When power is OFF When power is on When power is on c and no alarm has and an alarm has a occurred occurred a 7 NO C NO C NO C When power is OFF When power ison When power is on and no alarm has and an alarm has occurred occurred NO C NO C NO C C contact When power is OFF When powerison When power is on and no alarm has and an alarm has zh occurred occurred NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC Relay contacts in case of de energizing When power is OFF When powerison When power is on and no alarm has and an alarm has A occurred occurred NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC AND OR Setting When a group of alarms share the same internal switch or alarm output relay you can select how the internal switches alarm output relays will be operated AND will be operated when all alarms are occurring OR will be operated when at least one alarm is occurring Alarm occurrence Channel 1 Alarm status Alarm occurrence Channel 2 Operation Alarm output AND f l relay status OR Operation HOLD NON HOLD Setting You can select whether to hold the operating status of operated internal switches or alarm output relays This setting applies to both the internal switches and the alarm output relays Alarm status l Alarm release Alarm release Operation of L 1 Internal switch sir DUET E Iweringl output Alarm reset rey Refer to page 2 10 Reflashing Alarm Setting When several
301. nus are displayed only on models with the C5 option From the previous page alo EVT ALARM 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR 4 pu DATA_WR 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR DATA WR WR_TRIG START PAUSE CP FDD CP SCS0 CP_SCS1 CP_SCS2 CP_SCS3 CP SC84 CP_SCS5 _5 56 CP_SCS7 ACT EDGE ALARM ACK avo ACT EDGE ALARM RST ACT EDGE TIMER RST ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 n Ao ACT EDGE MSG 015 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START ACT EDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET RST G01 RST G02 RST_G03 RST G04 RST G05 RST G06 RST_GO7 ACT EDGE FLAG F01 n ACT EDGE FLAG FO1 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE REPORT START n ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 4 a ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE SCSIO LD TRG1 4 ACT EDGE SCSI0 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE 4 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE 4 a9 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE 1 ACT LEVL MATH CK 4 I ACT LEVL FLAG F01 4 ACT LEVL FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 FOS F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 4 ACT LEVL REPORT To the next page ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
302. o CMRR 20Log dB Since the actual CMRR is expressed using the ratio of an error component output caused by common mode noise to common mode noise it contains the normal mode rejection ratio NMRR expressed by the following equation Eo NM Normal mode rejection ratio NMRR 20Log dB The NMRR is a value that shows the ability to reject the output error normal mode noise component by normal mode noise Thus this is also a very important value which shows the resistance to noise characteristics of the measuring instrument Bum pue uonejeisu Basics of Anti Noise Measures part 2 Decreasing and Increasing Impedance As described in the previous section conversion of common mode noise into normal mode noise causes an error in the measured output In other words prevention of such a conversion is the key to anti noise measures As can be understood from the previous section it is important to take the following measures to reduce normal mode noise reduce the wiring resistances R and including the resistance of the wires increase the coupling impedance of common mode voltage Ecw These are called the decrease and increase of impedance as basics of anti noise measures In the above discussions anti noise measures have been described on the assumption that common mode noise has already been given In real applications common mode noise often occurs owing to grounding resistance as shown in the figure belo
303. o Connect the Input Output Modules Modules Which Can be Used DC100 stand alone model Input module alarm module DI DO module communication interface module or retransmission module Number of total modules that can be connected 4 Number of DI DO modules that can be connected is up to 1 Number of input modules lt 4 maximum number of input channels 40 Number of input modules number of alarm modules number of DI DO modules number of communication interface modules number of retransmission modules lt 4 DC100 expandable model Not more than one DI DO module can be connected to all units Main unit Alarm module DI DO module or communication interface module Note The input module or retransmission module cannot be connected Number of total modules that can be connected 4 Number of alarm modules number of DI DO modules number of communication interface modules lt 4 Subunit DS400 DS600 Input module alarm module DI DO module or restransmission module Number of total modules that can be connected 4 for DS400 6 for DS600 maximum number of input channels 300 DS400 Number of input modules number of alarm modules number of DI DO modules number of retransmission module lt 4 DS600 Number of input modules number of alarm modules number of DI DO modules number of retransmission module lt 6 Note No alarm module or DI DO module can be connected to the right side of an input module since the r
304. o skip any consecutive number of channels enter the range of those channel numbers When you move the cursor from the starting to the ending channel number the ending channel number becomes the same as the last two digits of the starting channel number Setting the Wiring Method Select from the following methods Single phase two wire 1Ph2W Single phase three wire 1Ph3W three wire input modules only Three phase three wire 2 Voltage 2 Current 3Ph3W 2I three wire input modules only Three phase three wire 3 Voltage 3 Current 3Ph3W 3I three wire input module only Three phase four wire 3Ph4W three wire input modules only Setting the Input Range Select from the following ranges 250V 0 5A 250V 5A 25V 0 5A 25V 5A This setting is common to all channels Any change to this setting also changes the settings of the rest of the channels Impose a voltage or current signal to the input module within the limits you set here Note If the connection method or input range is changed alarm setting is turned off Setting the Parameter Being Shown and Saved A power monitor module measures the voltage or current through the respective channels The values that are shown and saved are not those of the voltage and current being actually measured through each channel but the values of the parameters you set here A combination of parameters being measured is fixed for each group of channels 1 2 3 4 and 5 6 within the same module For example setting
305. o the retransmission terminal a averte e sends EE APO P Od eet eee e rose eden ie risiede 5 15 Writing Measured or Computed Data 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 Starting Stopping the Writing of 22 nne nne nne nnt nnns 6 1 Setting a Writing Channel or Writing Operation eese nene 6 3 Starting Writing Using Event or Action Functions eese nete 6 9 Setting Writing Operation of Periodic File Report Data essent 6 11 Working With Measured or Computed Data File 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 T 7 6 Copying a Data File Copying after Conversion of the Data to ASCII Data Displaying File Information ne a eaae oe EE ee 7 6 Displaying Directory seen or 7 8 Deleting Data File Initi lizing RAM DISK secnm epe e HEURE IR HERREN A EU ed 7 10 Executing Alarm Setting or Display and Other Settings 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches eee 8 1 Acknowledging Alarm Display esent eene nennen nenne 8 4 Setting the Engmeermg Urit 5s axo ER ede eee hh ies 8 5 Setting the Timers oae Ute ee tte d etes 8 6 Setting Tag and Message iet Oed eee ava D pte nidos 8 7 Setting the Match Time and Moving Average cccssssesscseseesseseeeeseeeestessecseeasseescaeseeessessceesseeaseeaes 8 9
306. o the equipment and causes problems Examples of noise propagated through each of these paths are given below Conduction inverter noise relay noise thyristor noise and noise caused by surface temperature measurement of a power transistor etc Electrostatic induction commercial power supply noise such as the hum of audio equipment relay noise etc Electromagnetic induction leakage magnetic flux from a power transformer or motor magnetic field from a high frequency induction furnace the rotating magnetic field of a power generator 10 etc The figure on the next page shows the propagation paths using practical examples IM DC100 01E 3 35 3 12 Countering Noise Example of a high frequency induction furnace Due to electromagnetic induction current i flows through the conductor creating joule heat which heats the furnace J i2r Furnace Inverter power supply 20 to 3500 kW Power supply 0 2 k to 10 kHz Electromagnetic induction noise E Electrostatic induction noise inside Room furnace temperature Hot line conduction noise Electromagnetic induction noise Electrostatic induction noise Line noise The instrument Power supply Inputs Basics of Anti Noise Measures part 1 Common Mode Noise and Normal Mode Noise Signal source resistances Normal m
307. ode noise BY mend CH 77 Floating amp Signal component I Signal A g gt To voltage E T R2 1 t ill epee w ori Circuit Output h NDS common Enm 23 22 21 in Case Normal mode noise A component Common mode noise 7 Ecm Common Mode Noise Ecm Noise generated between the signal source and the ground of a measuring instrument Since it is applied to both the H and L input terminals in phase with one another it is also called in phase voltage Normal Mode Noise Enm This is an unfavorable noise that is superimposed on a signal voltage Since it is a voltage between the H and L terminals it is also called the line voltage or since it is a voltage in series with the signal voltage it is sometimes called the series mode voltage 3 36 IM DC100 01E 3 12 Countering Noise In the figure on the previous page due to common mode voltage Ecm noise currents i and i2 flow through the impedance to grounds 71 and 72 and coupling impedance Z3 resulting in the generation of normal mode noise between input terminals and L Like this common mode noise is converted to normal mode noise The amp is equipped with a built in filter and in case of output Eo the normal mode noise will be eliminated This rate of conversion is called the common mode rejection ratio and expressed by the following equation Eo CM Common mode rejection rati
308. of Range 10ug Two gauge 1000 to 1000 ug 0 596 of Range 0 1 pe 10000 to 10000 ug 0 396 of Range 1 pe 100000 to 100000 ug 0 396 of Range 10ug Four gauge 500 to 500 ue 0 596 of Range 0 1 pe 5000 to 5000 ue 0 396 of Range lue 50000 to 50000 ue 0 3 of Range 10 pe For the accuracy and resolution of the DU500 12 and DU500 13 models do not include the influence of the internal and contact resistance of the jumper setup switch 14 20 IM DC100 01E 14 5 Specifications of Strain Input Module Accuracy of bridge resistors 0 01 5 ppm C excluding contact resistance of the jumper setup switch Contact resistance of the jumper setup switch 100 mQ Input resistance 10 MQ minimum Filter Third order sinc filter moving average Withstanding voltage Across channels 50 V DC except for DU500 14 Across output terminals and ground 1 500 V AC 1 min excluding DU500 14 Normal operating temperature humidity range 0 to 50 C 20 to 80 RH for an ambient temperature range of 0 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C no condensation Power consumption Included in the value of a system s installed main unit or subunit Dimensions DU500 12 DU500 13 Approx 114 3 W x 137 H x 88 D mm 0500 14 Approx 114 3 W x 137 H x 77 D mm Weight Approx 1 kg Installation category overvoltage category CAT II IEC1010 Accessory Bridge box 319300 120 Q IM DC100 01E 14 21 suoneoyioodg
309. of change alarm time interval Can be set to measurement interval x 1 to 15 common to both rising and falling limits Output mode Energize de energize setting AND OR mode setting and output hold non hold setting can be made common to all channels A maximum number of 6 reflash alarm output points can be specified Number of alarm output points Max 300 at subunits up to 300 can be achieved by increasing the number of alarm modules Max number of alarm modules Up to 6 modules can be connected to a subunit 4 in case of DS400 by increasing the number of subunits up to 30 modules can be connected Alarm display Alarm status indication Lights or flashes when an alarm is detected Alarm acknowledge indication Indicator stops flashing by key operation SCSI Interface Standard SCSI Small Computer System Interface ANSI X3 131 1986 Connector Half Pitch 50 pin pin type Connector pin assign ments Unbalanced single end contains a terminator Sapport for SCSI device MO drive 128 230 640 MB Semi IBM format ZIP drive PD drive IM DC100 01E 14 3 suoneoyioodsg 14 1 Specifications of DC100 DS400 DS600 Standard Computation Functions Kinds of computation Difference between channels linear scaling scaling and moving average Scaling Scalable range DC voltage TC RTD contact Scaling range 30000 to 30000 Measurement accuracy for scaling measurement accuracy for scaling digits measurement accuracy digits x
310. omputing the result of computing computing Error Excluded from Excluded from computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from computing the result of computing computing Output of data disabled Excluded from Excluded from computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from computing the result of computing computing Notes on daylight savings time When the function to shift the time scale between standard time and daylight savings time is specified the report for the day to shift from standard time to the daylight savings time seemingly includes data for only a 23 hour day and at the same time the report for the day to shift daylight savings time to standard time seemingly includes the data for a 25 hour day If you specify the time to make a report at the same time as the shift from standard time to daylight savings time or vice versa the report will be generated based on the time scale after the shift Display During Report Start 15 displayed on the sub display lowest section on the display while the report is started Note If SETUP mode is entered while the report is started a report file is created immediately after entering the SETUP mode and the report is stopped In this case the file is not copied even if the FILE END of the event action function is set IM DC100 01E 10 13 Changes the SCSI ID number of the DC100 c3 SETUP SCSI ID Goren GD CA INS DEL gt
311. on From the previous page EVT TIMER 1 4 EVT TIMER 1 123456 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR 4 ACT EDGE MEMRY DATA_WR DATA_WR WR_TRIG START PAUSE CP_FDD CP_SCS0 CP_SCS1 CP_SCS2 CP_SCS3 CP_SCS4 CP_SCS5 CP_SCS6 CP SCS7D ACT EDGE ALARM ACK avo I I LL E ACT EDGE ALARM RST ACT EDGE TIMER RST ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 4 ACT EDGE MSG DISP 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ACT EDGE MATH START 4 ACT EDGE MATH START START STOP CLEAR RESET RST G01 RST G02 RST G03 RST G04 RST G05 RST G06 RST G07 ACT EDGE FLAG F01 4 ACT EDGE FLAG F01 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 ACT EDGE REPORT START 4 ACT EDGE REPORT START START STOP ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 4 ACT EDGE FLOPY LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT EDGE SCSI0 LD_TRG1 4 ACT EDGE SCSI0 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE 4 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE 4 ACT LEVL MEMRY PAUSE To the next page ENTER ENTER ENTER To the previous page From the following page 9 6 IM DC100 01E 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Selection of event MFUNC KEY actions The MATH
312. on on the stand alone DC power supply model or the subunit DS400 DS600 of a DC power supply model IM DC100 01E 14 1 suoneoyioodsg 14 1 Specifications of DC100 DS400 DS600 Data Saving Function Number of inputs Stand alone model max 40 Expandable model max 300 Media for data save Buffer memory internal SRAM Capacity 1 MB standard 2 MB or 4 MB option Data backup Around 10 years backup with lithium battery at room temperature while power is off Memory usage Specify division into 2 4 8 or 16 or a data length Specifiable data length 10 data ch to 100000 data ch Total memory length must be within 1 MB 3 5 inch floppy disk Number of drives 1 Disk types 2HD 2DD Supported formats 1 2 MB 1 44 MB and 720 KB Applicable data Setting values measured values and computed values only possible when optional math function is specified Saving to floppy disk Measured computed values Copies data stored in the buffer memory to the floppy disk Setting values Directly saved to the floppy disk Loading from floppy disk Measured computed values Not able to be loaded to the buffer memory Setting values Directly loaded from the floppy disk Data save format Setting values ASCII Measured computed values binary except ASCII CSV Format is also possible when saving to floppy disk Data capacity Setting values Stand alone model max about 20 KB when saving the setting values of an operation mode with 40
313. one model Set up data for the SET mode Approx 20 KB max for 40 measurement channels and 30 computation channels Set up data for SETUP mode Approx 5 KB max for 40 measurement channels and 30 computation channels For the expandable model Set up data for the SET mode Approx 80 KB max for 300 measurement channels and 60 computation channels Set up data for SETUP mode Approx 20 KB max for 300 measurement channels and 60 computation channels Note Saving will be displayed during saving During this period key board operations are not possible No saving is allowed during computing The communication function remains suspended during saving 11 2 IM DC100 01E 11 2 Reading Set up Data Relevant Keys Reading set up data for the SET mode SET MEDIA RECORD ALARM gt Select Setting Parameter MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC CH CT KEYLOCI Operating Procedure Main menu Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the O keys ESC INS oce JC DEL mem ser ser enter f mrunc To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting
314. one model or A01 to A60 for the expandable model Each computing equation can be used once When specifying HOLD A B or RESET A B A and B are channel numbers or computing equations These can be used once in the beginning of the computing equation Computation channel Stand alone model A total of 30 computation channels are available A01 to A30 Expandable model A total of 60 computation channels are available A01 to A60 Constant Stand alone model A total of 30 constants can be set K01 to K30 Expandable model A total of 60 constants can be set K01 to K60 Flag F01 to F16 Flags can be set in computing equations as constants 1 or 0 Flags are normally 0 but it is set to 1 when a certain event occurs according to the event action function For example if the computing equation is set to NOTF01 TLOG SUM 001 and FLAG F01 is set as an edge action of an event action F01 becomes 1 when the event occurs This causes NOTFO1 to become 0 and the SUM of channel 001 to become 0 Computation range If the result exceeds 1008 during computation an overflow will occur Data applicable for computation The following data is used for computation Measured data Specified by channel No 001 to 040 for the stand alone model or 001 to 560 for the expandable model Computed data Specified by computation channel No A01 to A30 for the stand alone model or A01 to A60 for the expandable model e Constant Value sp
315. onverted to ASCII data and copied The identifier is CSV Conversion channel CONV CH Used to select a channel whose data is to be converted to ASCII data Measurement channels and computation channels are arranged in the order of 001 002 560 A01 A02 A60 For instance if 559 A02 is specified data for channels 559 560 01 and A02 will be converted Conversion data CONV DATA Used to specify the conversion range for the channels specified by CONV CH Enter the conversion start data No and end data No Copy Destination CONV DRIVE Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed Select the copy destination from the built in floppy disk of the DC100 external MO ZIP or PD For MO ZIP and PD select using the SCSI ID Data capacity When measured computed data is converted to ASCII data 12 bytes will be used for each data set Thus the data capacity can be calculated as follows Data capacity 178 20 x number of conversion channels 2 24 12 x number of conversion channels 1 x number of data sets to be converted Copying is not possible if the destination s disk capacity is insufficient IM DC100 01E 7 2 Copying after Conversion of the Data to ASCII Data Data format ASCII converted data is saved in the following format Sample by Stand alone Trigger Time 96 02 14 15 05 07 Sample Rate Sec 2 Trigger date time Writing interval Start Data No 1 ASC
316. oot absolute values common logarithm natural logarithm power logical product logical sum exclusive OR logical negation statistical operation relational operation Up to 30 channels for the stand alone model or up to 60 channels for the expadable model can be used for computation It is also possible to use the event action function to start stop computation or clear data for computation channels Furthermore up to 4 levels of alarm upper limit alarm lower limit alarm can be set for computation channels RRJC Remote RJC available if the instrument is equipped with the optional MATH function In cases where the object is located in distance for temperature measurement using thermocouples the temperature of the object can be measured without using a number of expensive thermocouples if a junction terminal is installed near the object This method requires the object to be connected to the terminal via a thermocouple and the terminal to this instrument via copper lead wires Furthermore the junction terminal needs to be connected to an input terminal of this instrument via a thermocouple The temperature of the junction terminal is then measured to carry out compensation for the reference contact point used for measurement of temperature of the object then finally temperature of the object is measured Junction terminal This instrument to be provided by the customer o Thermocouple Reference channel Copper
317. op computation and clear computation channels in case an event takes place For a detailed description of the event action function refer to 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions page 9 1 IM DC100 01E 12 3 uoneinduio2 Bunnoexa3 Iepow LIN 24 eiqermeAv 12 1 Overview of the Computation Function Actions to be taken in case of overflow and computation error Actions to be taken in case of an error during computation can be specified Error display or OVER is displayed Error data during TLOG or CLOG The operator is asked to select whether to display the data as a computation error or ignore the error and continue computation Overflow data during TLOG or CLOG The operator is asked to select whether to display the data as a computation error or ignore the error and continue computation The operator is also asked to select whether or not the data be used as the upper lower limit value Description of the upper lower limit value is given below Measurement channels to which linear scaling is applied Specified scaling upper lower limit Measurement channels to which no linear scaling is applied Upper lower limit of the measuring range Computation channels Specified LEFT RIGHT value Group Reset By using the event action function you can reset the computed values of computed channels registered in the group 12 4 IM DC100 01E 12 2 Setting a Computation Equation Relevant Keys
318. out These replacement periods indicate where the instruments have been used under normal operating conditions When replacing parts refer to these replacement periods taking the actual operating conditions into consideration When replacing parts other than fuse please contact your nearest Sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Part Part number Replacement Description period in years Display B9233KJ 3 4 30 000 hours Fuse A1350EF 2 For AC power supply 2 5A time lag fuse A1354EF 2 For DC power supply 6 34 time lag fuse Lithium battery B9234XZ 10 For backup of information that has been set pue IM DC100 01E 1 3 1 13 2 Replacing the Fuse A WARNING The fuse must be of the specified rating current voltage type to prevent a fire hazard Turn off the source of the DC power supply Also on the DC power supply model remove the DC power supply connector from the DC power supply terminal Never short circuit the fuse holder Fuse Rating The fuse must have the following specifications For models with AC power supply Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 2 5 A Type time lag Standard IEC VDE certified Part number A1350EF For models with DC power supply Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 6 3 A Type time lag Standard IEC VDE certified Part number A1354EF Replacemen
319. ow limit alarm Select 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 or 1 0 The default setting is 0 596 Selection of Alarm Display Hold ALARM HOLD Select whether the alarm display is held or not when the alarm is reset OFF hold ON not hold The default setting is OFF Selection of A D Converter Integration Time A D INTG Select each A D converter integration time for each unit Select it from the following AUTO the frequency of 50 60 Hz is automatically switched corresponding to the power frequency of this instrument However AUTO does not function on the stand alone DC power supply model nor on the extension type using the subunit of the DC power supply model 50 Hz the integration time is set to 20 ms 50 Hz 60 Hz the integration time is set to 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms the integration time is set to 100 ms 10 Hz The default setting is AUTO However if the instrument is a stand alone DC power supply model the default setting is 20 ms 50 Hz Selection of Filter FILTER Select whether the input filter is operated or not Select it from the following OFF Not operated ON Operated The default setting is OFF Note In order to make the set or selected contents effective the contents must be registered For details see page 10 20 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 20 10 4 IM DC100 01E
320. owing When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then SKIP will be displayed When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected appears Engineering Units Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 3 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to SKIP then no engineering unit will be displayed IM DC100 01E Aejdsiq spo 34 6umes 4 3 Using the PAGE Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation DISP MODE EN START ESC FUNC cLock 0 STOP INS DEL RANGE ALARM p FD COPY MEM SET sET ENTER M FUNC 1 Select the main display using the DISP key 2 Select PGE using the MODE key Sub display 1 002 0 1936V 003 0 0995V APGE 3 Select the required set of five channels page using the CS keys Display 006 0 0173V 007 0 0197V 008 0 0074V APGE 009 0 0162V 010 0 0102V PAGE Display for the Main Display When this display is selected the measurement values of five consecutive channels will be displayed using sub display 1 and 2 also Channel No Difference between Channels delta and Alarms Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 Measurement Values Same as for the AUTO display refer to page 4 2 except for the following When the input type of the channel is set to
321. p on tool must be one specified by the crimp on lugs manufacture and that the crimp on lugs and tool must be matched to the wire size To avoid electrical shock ALWAYS attach the terminal cover in place after the completion of wiring to the terminals so that the terminals cannot be accidentally touched N CAUTION Do not apply an input voltage exceeding the following levels to each terminal of the module Otherwise the internal circuits may be damaged Universal DCV TC DI and digital input modules Allowable input voltage 2 VDC range or less RTD TC and DI CONT 10 VDC 6 to 20 VDC range DI LEVEL 60 VDC Max common mode noise voltage 250 VAC rms 50 60 Hz mA input module 5 VDC Strain input module Don t input voltage to the termial Pluse input module 5 VDC Digital input of DI DO module 2 VDC to 7 VDC The contact capacity of the alarm module and the digital out of DI DO module is as follows 250 VDC 0 1 A with a resistor load 250 VDC 2 A with a resistor load 30 VDC 2 A with a resisitor load The overvoltage category of each input module is CAT II IEC 1010 1 1 Check that the power switch of this instrument is turned off 2 Remove the terminal cover the figure below shows DU100 11 Terminal cover e __ Screws for fastening the cover 3 Fasten the signal wires to the terminals as shown in the figure on the next page 4 Re appl
322. play see Section 13 4 Error Codes If servicing is necessary or if the instrument is not operating correctly though the following corrective actions have been taken please contact Yokogawa Engineering Service Corporation Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action Collector does not operate Power switch is off Turn on the power Power supply is not connected properly Connect properly Supplied power does not meet power requirements Use power meeting its requirements Fuse blown Replace fuse If the fuse blows immediately after turning on the power servicing will be required Output beyond its limits Fluctuating indication Input specifications are not correct Correct input specifications Incorrect measuring range or span Change measuring range or span Noise superimposed Connect input wiring far away from noise source Ground collector Ground measurement object Isolate thermocouple from measurement object Use shielded wiring for input line Change A D integral times Use moving average Use input filter No countermeasure taken against ambient temperature changes Install input terminal cover properly Protect collector from blowing air of fan Keep temperature changes near input terminals small Input connected improperly Connect
323. ple burnout 2 5 sec for a measurement period of 0 5 sec in all other cases each measurement interval Detection timing for thermocouple burnout The burnout condition is detected at each measurement interval However with a 10 ch universal input module connected and a measurement interval of 0 5 sec the minimum interval of the burnout detection becomes 2 5 sec Power consumption Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed External dimensions and weight Model External dimensions W x H x D mm Weight kg DU100 11 apporox 57x137x88 0 5 DU100 12 apporox 57x137x88 0 5 DU100 21 apporox 114x137x88 1 0 DU100 22 apporox 114x137x88 1 0 DU100 31 apporox 172x137x88 1 5 00100 32 172 137 88 1 5 00200 11 apporox 57x137x88 0 5 00200 12 57 137 88 0 5 00200 21 114 137 88 1 0 00200 22 114 137 88 1 0 00200 31 172 137 88 1 5 00200 32 172 137 88 1 5 IM DC100 01E 14 13 suoneoyioodg 14 3 Specifications of mA input Module Style Number S5 Model Number of Input Channels Terminal Type and Shortest Measurement Interval Model Number of Channels Terminal Type Shortest Measurement Interval DU300 11 10 Screw 0 5 5 00300 12 10 0 5 5 The minimum measurement interval in the case where these modules mixed with other inpu
324. r be read or written and a Quick format on disks which have been used previously 11 10 IM DC100 01E 11 7 Detecting MO ZIP PD Disk Drive Relevant Keys RECORD ESO SET MEDIA mee GO Carer INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC _ 1 55 ww SET Enter mrunc J Operating Procedure Main menu SET C A MEDIA ENTER Explanation Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the O keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Lower menu MEDIA IDENTIFY ENTER FLOPPY SCSIO IDENTIFY 4 Identifying IDENTIFY OK Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed SCSILI is the SCSI ID number that is connected MO ZIP PD disk drives can also be detected using Media under the SET UP mode Detects the MO ZIP PD disk drive MO ZIP PD disk drives that are turned on while the DC100 is in use are not detected by the DC100 In this case perform this manual detection IM DC100 01E 11 11 epo dN LAS 10 LAS e YUM 12 1 Overview of the Computation Function
325. r metal pipe or such protect the peg on top of the plug by covering it with tape Forextension cables of longer than 50 m connect the plug with copper foil directed towards the main unit DC100 Applying it in reverse direction might increase noise Fasten the cabels in such a way that no force is applied to the connector or the plug To prevent the wire from snapping etc do no apply a tensile force of more than 70N Furthermore do not bend the cable in a radius of 3 centimeters or less For the environmental conditions for wiring refer to Section 3 12 Countering Noise page 3 34 Note When several subunits are connected and the power is turned off of one of them the other connected sub units which are further away from the main unit will not be recognized anymore 3 14 IM DC100 01E 3 6 Connecting the Signal Lines A WARNING To prevent electric shock always make sure that the power supply is turned OFF before connecting When 30 VAC or 60 VDC and more is applied to the output terminal of the alarm module or the output terminal of the DI DO module use double insulated wires withstand voltage performance more than 2300 VAO for those wires which apply 30 VAC or 60 VDC and more All other wires can be basic insulated withstand voltage performance more than 1350 VAC Furthermore use crimp on lugs for 4 mm screws with insulation sleeves for connecting to the screw terminal Make sure that the crim
326. rature 23 2 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH supply voltage 90 to 250 V AC AC power supply 10 to 32 V DC DC power supply power supply frequency 50 60 Hz 1 AC power supply warm up time 30 minutes minimum no effect on instrument operation due to vibration etc Count 1 pulse for integration 1 scan 1 second at the start of measurement and 1 scan 1 5 seconds at the end of measurement Turn on time 100 ppm accuracy for judgment of one second interval sampling for integration 1 second 1 scan at the start of measurement and 100 ppm of rdg 1 5 seconds 1 scan at the end of measurement Module to module error 3 seconds 1 pulse for count and 200 ppm 3 seconds for turn on time Note It takes a maximum of 2 seconds for normal measured values to be output when the power is turned on when the measurement mode is changed or when the setting for turning on off the filter is changed The instrument indicates a value representative of data on the display or 8005H for the binary format or a faulty data value for the ASCII format in the case of output to the communication line until the normal measured values are output Filter Removes chatter of up to 5 ms can be turned on or off on a channel basis Input signal levels Open contact 200 Q maximum Closed contact 100 kQ minimum Normal operating temperature humidity range 0 to 50 C 20 to 80 RH for an ambient temperatur
327. re de ERR MESI e a e Pede PRA Ue 9 10 CPES CS OTO CP 3S CS ee pe ces eed ped 9 11 LOO o 3 27 D DataiCapaciby te pa E EESTI 6 7 7 4 11 2 Data format e preti RR ER eatin 7 5 er tien ine ere Oed 3 10 3 12 DC voltage rester ete yere e 2 3 5 3 DCV TC DI input module eee 4 1 7 3 15 Deleting a character or numerical eee V v eR See Inserting deleting a character or numerical Destination channel for difference between channels 2 11 5 3 DE digital input oer steer eee ee 2 3 5 3 DUDO module uei dece eter RED M CU M 4 1 9 3 15 Difference between channels 2 11 5 3 4 2 5 3 Difference high low limit eee See Alarm Digital input module serene Ves 14 24 DISP k y eet Chapter 4 Chapter 10 11 2 11 4 12 14 Display eerte een See also Functions 1 4 1 5 4 2 4 3 PNE ort 4 2 4 3 hold f unctlol ss rae ttr cire ste 2 10 10 4 In formation e rentes eere 2 10 8 4 Alarm Search e s tiene eint P ee Ra 2 1 4 7 4 8 A latin ee od verre dar 2 1 4 12 AUTO p 2 1 4 1 to 4 3 CHANT er NE e Usb Re E ed RE 4 2 4 3 Clock c RM is e e 2 1 4 15 Condition eee tee ends 2 1 differen
328. red data of group G04 Average value CLOG AVE CLOG AVE GO5 Obtain the average value of the measured data of group G05 Statistical computation of the measured data of the input channel within the same group measured at the same time every specified interval When combining with each of the operators MAX MINO SUMO and AVEO the value that can be specified in is limited to the group number Special operators Type Operator Example Description Previous value PRE PRE 001 Obtain the previous measured data of channel 001 Hold HOLDO HOLD 001 TLOG SUM 002 When the measured value of channel 001 changes from 0 to a nonzero value maintain the displaying integrated value of the measured data of channel 002 while the measured value of channel 001 is nonzero Reset RESET Q RESET 001 TLOG SUM 002 When the channel 001 nonzero reset the integrated value of the measured data of channel 002 Previously measured data or computed data In the case of computed data the value is set to 0 when the computation is reset At the start of the computation if the computation was reset the value is 0 If it was not reset the value is the last value of the previous computation The value that can be specified in O is limited to the input channel number 001 to 040 for the stand alone model or 001 to 560 for the expadable model or the computation channel number A01 to A30 for the stand al
329. ring period after changing the measuring period the writing period is automatically changed to 1 min If the sampling period and measuring period are not synchronized the measured data immediately following the specified time for saving to the periodic file are saved These measurement data are saved Measuring period as periodic files Mar ar Sampling period mi gt 6 12 IM DC100 01E 6 4 Setting Writing Operation of Periodic File Report Data Up Time UP TIME Sets the time for creating the files HOUR Create files on the hour measured data over an hour DAY Create files at the specified time every day measured data over a day The time of creation is the same as the time for creating daily report MONTH Create files at the specified time every month measured data over a month The date and time of creation is the same as the date and time for creating monthly report For the setting procedure see section 10 12 Setting Conditions for Creating Reports Conditions to Start Writing Data Pressing the START key starts the writing If the measured computed data are to be written writing also starts for these data Fora report file writing does not start unless the report operation is in the start condition Start the report operation at the screen that appears when the FUNC key is pressed or by setting REPORT START in the action of the event action function Youcan also s
330. riting Measured Computed Data for One Scan Using the event action function measured computed data for one scan held in key operations or in generating an event can also be written Saving Reading Setting Data In SET or SETUP mode each setting data item can be saved on a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD or read from a floppy disk MO ZIP or PD to the instrument Setting data in Monitor mode can be read using the event action function in addition to key operations Method of Specifying File Name Measured computed data Whether a file name for measured computed data is set automatically or freely specified by the user can be selected A file name for setting data is freely specified by the user The file extension is set automatically depending on the file content Report Data Periodic File File names are set automatically Operation in File Saving File Alarm Function Continuing Operation if the Writing Mode is REPEAT In saving data by dividing the built in RAM disk area with the writing mode set at REPEAT if there is no free area whether or not to continue writing by clearing the file with the oldest data and time can be set five oldest files for periodic files Overwriting Operation If Files with the Same Name Exist If there are files with the same name at the start of measured computed data writing whether the file is overwritten or the writing operation is suspended can be set File Cancellation When Copying is Done When copying files in the bu
331. riting Operation Writing can also be started using the event action function For an example of an event action setting see Section 6 3 Starting the Writing Using Event or Action Functions page 6 9 Stopping Suspending Writing WRITE STOP Select whether to stop suspend writing or not e YES This closes a file and stops writing PAUSE This suspends writing The file remains open NO This does not stop suspend writing By selecting YES and pressing the ENTER key writing is stopped The word RECORD indicating the status in the display goes off By selecting PAUSE and pressing the ENTER key writing is suspended The word RECORD indicating the status in the display remains lit Writing can also be suspended restarted using the event action function If PAUSE is set as a level action for alarm relay or remote events using the event action function suspension restarting through a key operation cannot be done PAUSE is available for the measured computed data and the peridic file Writing Data for One Scan A measured data item for one scan one per channel retained when the ENTER key is pressed is written in the measured computed file This operates separately from the writing period This can also be executed using the event action function This function is available for the measured computed data Display During Data Writing One of the following statuses is displayed in sub display 2 the lowest
332. rmation Explanation The measured computed data file report file or periodic file information saved in the built in RAM disk is displayed File Type DAT Measured Computed data file DAS Periodic file RBI Report file Displaying the contents of the file The following information is displayed Measured computed data file and periodic file r Sample rate data writing period r Date time at which writing starts Date time at which a trigger event is generated in the case of the trigger mode r Model type on which data is saved r Number of pieces of data per channel Data No in effect when the trigger event is generated Always 1 if saving is carried out using FREE MODE or WRITE or without setting PRE TRIGGER P2MODEL EXPANDABLE 497 07 07 00 00 LENGTH 200000 gt SAMPLE 10 Sec TRIG DATA No 1 ENTER key gt CHANNEL 201 60 gt ON 201M BB EBB B REE SERRE Bee gt ON mg 231 SERB Changing this digit enables another set of channels to be displayed Status of channel Nos 201 to 230 Data available 1 No data available Status of channel Nos 231 to 260 Data available 0 No data available f there is no computation option in the stand alone model additional channels cannot be displayed Repor
333. rt trigger WR_TRIG to the action in the event action function 6 6 IM DC100 01E 6 2 Setting a Writing Channel or Writing Operation Data Format The measured computed data are saved in the binary format Data Capacity The data capacity is determined by the following formula Measured data 2 bytes data item Computed data 4 bytes data item For stand alone model Header 256 64 x number of measuring channels number of computing channels bytes Data capacity 256 64 x number of measuring channels number of computing channels number of measuring channels x 2 number of computing channels x 4 6 x data length For expandable model Header 576 64 x number of measuring channels number of computing channels bytes Data capacity 576 64 x number of measuring channels number of computing channels number of measuring channels x 2 number of computing channels x 4 6 x data length For example in the case of a stand alone model if the number of measuring channels 10 number of computing channels 5 data length 5k the data capacity is as follows Data capacity 256 64 x 10 5 10 x 2 5 x 4 6 x 5k 231216 bytes Since the data is saved to the built in RAM disk in units of 1024 bytes the actual capacity used is 231424 bytes Measuring Time for Each File The summary of the measuring time for each file is shown below Stand alone Type Number of measuring CH 30 Compu
334. s Mocking Bird MO640 made by Fujitsu ZIP Drive ZIP drives that connect to SCSI can be used Recommended ZIP drive Jomegazip made by Iomega PD Drive PD drives that connect to SCSI can be used Recommended PD drive Panasonic LF 1600JP made by Panasonic IM DC100 01E 3 25 pue uonejeisu 3 8 Connecting SCSI Devices Using the devices CAUTION Never remove the disk while the SCSI device is being accessed It may damage the SCSI device or destroy the data on the disk Use OS device driver and interface card that support semi IBM format Contact the provider or manufacture to find out whether your OS device driver and interface card support the semi IBM format Do not connect a personal computer to the SCSI chain as it may cause the DC100 to operate improperly Note When connecting multiple SCSI devices in a chain attach a terminator to the device at the end of the chain Keep the total length of the SCSI chain to 6 m or less SCSI devices that are turned off will not be detected To detect the device turn it on and then perform manual detection according to Section 11 7 Detecting MO ZIP PD Disk Drive Connect the SCSI cable securely Otherwise the operation becomes unstable and can cause operation errors error message numbers 120 121 131 135 If these errors occur turn OFF the SCSI device and connect the SCSI cable securely Then check that the SCSI device information is displa
335. s instrument Use a capacitor from a hundred oL to thousands of pF which can D C t withstand high voltages and must be grounded Step 2 Rejection of pulse noise when grounding is impossible cd n n s instrument USe capacitor from a hundred 1 1 oL pees to thousands of pF TL Ferrite beads T 1 Insert the ferrite beads as necessary 3 42 IM DC100 01E 3 12 Countering Noise Relay noise suppression lt DC relay gt To prevent noise and protect the contact connect the diode to the relay coil terminal directly In addition to the above measure reduce the rated voltage of the relay circuit as much as possible for higher reliability It is necessary to choose a diode that matches the relay Generally a diode whose rated rectifying current is at least three times the current flowing through the relay coil must be used And the rated reverse voltage must be at least three times the operating voltage DC external power supp Contact ly Diode ord directly Relay connect to the relay coil terminal socket the relay coil rating must be as low as possible Note Across the relay or solenoid coil a counterelectromotive force is produced by an inductive load This phenomenon may damage the contact or as the noise source cause a malfunctioning of the equipment and have an unfavorable effect on the entire system AC relay
336. s on the display When the alarm display hold function is ON selecting the ALARM ACK menu results the alarm display changing from flashing to lit and will turn off when the alarm is released This setting applies to all alarms You can reset the internal switches and alarm output relays and the corresponding displays The previously mentioned alarm acknowledge function has the same function as resetting the alarm display here Resetting the internal switches and alarm output relays when the relay hold function is set to ON has the following affects and depends on the alarm status when alarms occur continuously the internal switches alarm output relays will turn to their non operative status for a short period but soon change into their operation status when alarms are released the internal switches alarm output relays turn to their non operative status IM DC100 01E 2 5 Standard Computation Functions Standard computations such as difference between channels and linear scaling can be set with measurement input settings A moving average computation is also available Difference between Channels Linear Scaling Moving Average This function computes the difference between the measurement values of a selected channel reference channel and any other channel destination channel This can be applied to each channel in the same unit The computation formula is as follows Result of difference between channels comp
337. scaling span digits measurement span digits 2 digits Numbers below the decimal point are rounded up Example Measurement accuracy when the following settings are made Measuring range 6 VDC Measurement span 1 000 to 5 000 V Scaling span 0 000 to 2 000 Measured value 5 V 0 05 x 5 2 x 20000 4000 2 3 125 Measurement accuracy 4 digits 0 004 Moving average Moving average results for between 2 to 64 scans are computed Optional Math Function Computation types Types Four arithmetical operations SQR square root ABS absolute value LOG common logarithm LN natural logarithm EXP exponent statistical computation logical computation AND OR NOT and XOR relational computation exponentiation previously measured value reference hold and reset l Statistical computation CLOG Computation process of simultaneously measured values within a group total maximum minimum average and maximum minimum TLOG Computation process of a specific channel over time axis total maximum minimum average and maximum minimum Statistical computation interval Set by the event action function Hold Temporary suspending of computation and temporary hold of the computed result During statistical computation resume the computation from the hold point after the hold is released Number of channels for computing Number of channels that can be allocated for computational purposes 60 ch maxim
338. se rejection Also exponential averaging functions as a noise filter Applications Practical Measures Reducing noise itself The basics of this practical measures dictates using the instrument in conditions where noise is suppressed as much as possible for power lines an increase of impedance Separate the power lines for noise source equipment inverter thyristor etc from those for the measuring instrument 3 38 IM DC100 01E 3 12 Countering Noise for input lines an increase of impedance Always separate the input line from the noise source lines power and alarm lines Step 1 Install a separator Separator 2 Signal SONG lines lines OOOO Special class 3 ground 10 Q or less Step 2 Keep the signal cables at least 15 cm above the power lines using a bracket If the power lines are not shielded the operating voltage is 220 or less and the operating current is 10 A or more the distance between the signal cables and power cords must be 60 cm or more Signal lines Power at least 15 cm Step 3 Leave clearance of at least 15 cm between the signal lines and power lines If the power lines are not shielded the operating voltage is 220 V or less and the operating current is 10 A or more the distance between the signal cables and power cords must be 60 cm or more at least 15 cm Signal gt Power CAES COE Step 4 Lay the sig
339. set using the ZS keys INS DEL RANGE ALARM CD ser ser ENTER mrunc To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept There may be some menus that are not displayed by basic settings in Chapter 10 Main menu yo ALARM ENTER C O ALARM RESET ENTER C O TIMER RESET ENTER O C MATH START ENTER a gt MATH CLR START ENTER E MATH STOP ENTER ACK ENTER ev CA Lower menu KEY LOCK ON ENTER A CODE NUMBER 2888 ENTER 1 Displayed when computation is not in progress i e when stopped 2 Displayed when computation is in progress i e when started 3 Displayed only when incomplete measurement occurs during computation Note Operating status If MATH is selected as a level action MATH START MATH CLR START and MATH STOP will not be displayed IM DC100 01E 9 3 Alarm Acknowledgment Alarm Reset Timer Reset and Keylock Explanation Any of the following functions are executed by pressing the ENTER key After that the instrument returns to the operation mode Alarm acknowledgment ALARM ACK When the alarm display hold ALARM HOLD on page 10 4 is set to ON the alarm acknowledgment menu appears For the
340. setting Main menu 001 01 VOLT 2V gt Select Channel No Lower menu 4 001 01 VOLT 2VO O 001 01 VOLT 2V gt Select Channel No OQ L 001 01 SCL VOLT 2V 001 01 SCL VOLT 2V 4 001 01 SCL VOLT 2V 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V 4 SPAN 2 0000 2 0000V Span limit 2 0000 2 0000V avo 4 SCL __ 0 00 100 00 4 GET OK 001 01 SCL TC R D 4 001 01 SCL TC R ENTER RSBKEJTNWLUKP 4 SPAN ____0 0 _1760 0 C ENTER gt Span limit 0 0 1760 0 C 4 SCL ___0 00 _100 00 ENTER 4 GET OK ESC To the next page 5 4 IM DC100 01E 5 2 Setting Linear Scaling and the Span Explanation From the previous page 001 01 SCL RTD PT1 D 4 001 01 SCL RTD PT1 ENTER PT1 PT2 JPT1 JPT2 PT50 NI1 NI2 CU1 CU2 CU4 PT1S PT2S JPT1S JPT2S J263B 4 SPAN 200 0 _600 0 C ENTER gt Span limit 200 0 600 0 C Sc L __ 0 00 100 00 ENTER SET OK ESC 001 01 SCL DI LEVL D 001 01 SCL DI LEVL ENTER LEVL CONT SPAN 0 1 ENTER Span limit 0 1 Sc L __ 0 00 100 00 ENTER SET OK ESC The setting of the channel number is the same as explained in 5 1 on page 5 2 The following explanation assumes that you already carried out the channel setting and that you selected SCL
341. setting range No relay is in the range from 01 41 to 01 50 In either case above if all are to be set to OR or reset set NONE The default setting is NONE 10 6 IM DC100 01E 10 4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay Internal Switch Setting Energizing De energizing ENERG This is a menu which cannot be displayed unless the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument The internal switches cannot be set Relay Setting Set the object relays from one number relay first relay to another number relay end relay Set it under the condition that the first relay number lt end relay number First relay number The first character is a unit number For the second and third characters a number from 01 to 60 can be set but the effective setting range is as shown in the following examples Check which slot the alarm module or the DI DO module is mounted in using the model number of mounted modules and their mounted positions Slot numbers are set in the order of slot 0 slot 1 as viewed facing the rear from right to left Ex 1 When the alarm module is mounted in slot 3 31 to 40 Ex 2 The DI DO module is mounted in slot 4 41 to 42 End relay number The same settings of the second or third characters in the first relay number The default setting is 001 01 Selection of energizing de energizing ENERG energizing DE EN de energizing The default setti
342. splay of that setting Main menu SET Lower menu CONST ENTER gt CONST No K01 ENTER K01 2 K04 K06 K07 K08 K09 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 K17 K18 K19 K20 K21 K22 K23 K24 K25 K26 K27 K28 K29 K30 C O 1 K01 9 9999E 29 ENTER va d GET OK End of setting ESC Up to 60 constants K01 to K60 can be set 30 constants KO1 to K30 for the stand alone type The number of significant digits is 5 excluding the decimal point If exponent is used the mantissa and exponent must consist of 5 digits and 2 digits respectively Configurable ranges 1 0000E 35 to 1 0000E 35 0 1 0000E 35 to 1 0000E 35 12 8 IM DC100 01E 12 4 Setting Groups Relevant Keys aS RECORD ESC SET GROUP Ee GO Ger INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter TAG MESSAGE MATCH TIME MOVE_AVE GROUPT 08 CO Operating Procedure Main menu SET 1 mem set Enten Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu Select set using the GSN keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Lower menu GROUP ENTER Explanation
343. st be registered For details see page 10 20 To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode select END in the main menu For details see page 10 20 Ifthe writing period is not an integer multiple of the scan interval the writing period is changed to INTVL when executing STORE IM DC100 01E 1 0 1 dn 195 sPunies oiseg 10 2 Selecting Channel Number or Tag Indication aS SETUP CH TAG us Cedere GD Gr INS D gt Select Setting Parameter SCAN_INTVL CH TAG MEM_SET MATH MEDIA A1 am Gc Q mem ser ser LEwrER f mrunc Operating Procedure Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure 1 When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP menu first turn off the power switch 2 Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key for about 5 seconds Select set using the O keys If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway press the MODE ESC key The display returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs However newly set or selected contents are canceled When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end the newly set or selected contents are established Main menu SETUP i E C O Lower menu I CH TAG ENTER CH OR TAG CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL TAG 4 CH
344. sults are set The computed results if they overreach these limits are handled as over data The setting range is from 9999999 to 99999999 The decimal point can be placed in five positions as represented in XX XXX XXX XX XXXX X xxxxx The unit specified in 8 3 Setting the Engineering Unit page 8 5 will be used LEFT Sets the lower limit value RIGHT Sets the upper limit value Note If the computation ON OFF computation equation or span setting is changed the alarm setting for the corresponding channel will be reset 12 6 IM DC100 01E 12 2 Setting a Computation Equation Example of Settings of CLOG When computing the maximum minimum maximum minus minimum sum and average of data measured at the same time on multiple channels you must configure groups beforehand Example of settings where the averages for channels 001 002 003 004 006 and 008 are computed Configuration of groups In the SET menu assign channels 001 002 003 004 006 and 008 to group G01 as shown below SET GROUP GROUPNo G01 01 001 004 006 008 Define the computational expression that computes the average of group 1 as shown below CALC CLOG AVE G01 Computation on Pulse Input Channels For pulse input channels you can define the operator TLOG PSUM XXXX evev if the instrument does not have the optional MATH function M1 option The type of computation is the integration of the count if the measurement mod
345. sword verification appears to prevent the key lock to be used by unauthorized operators IM DC100 01E 2 6 Other Functions External Input Output Function alarm module or DI DO module is required Alarm Output This output can be performed from the internal relay in the alarm module or the DI DO module These relays will be operated when an alarm occurs For details concerning their settings and their relation with alarms refer to page 2 9 2 10 Fail Output One transfer contact in the DI DO module is used for fail output This relay will change to the de energized status when a failure of the recorder occurs Usually In case of failure In case of power OFF Dd tw Js NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC File Alarm Output One transfer contact in the DI DO module is used for file alarm output When the remaining capacity of a file decreases below the corresponding specified time the function is activated The relay will change to the energized status Usually In case of File alarm In case of power NO Cc NC NO C NC NO C NC Controlling Data Savinfg Functions by Remote Control The data saving functions can be controlled by inputting up to 12 contact signals to the DI DO module You can choose one of the following operations for each of the 12 signals The remote control function can be one of the events of the event action function described on the previous page Alarm acknowledge Alarm reset Timer reset Message display
346. t DT500 11 Approximately 0 35 kg DT500 21 Approximately 0 3 kg Installation category overvoltage category CAT II IEC1010 14 32 IM DC100 01E 14 12 Specifications of Extension Module and Extension Base Style Number S5 Model Extension module DV100 011 Extension base DV100 012 Units to which extension modules are connected DS400 DS600 Input modules connectable to an extension base Universal input modules DU100 11 or DU100 12 10 channels DCV TC DI input modules DU200 11 or DU200 12 10 channels Maximum mountable number of extension modules One each on a subunit Maximum connectable number of extension bases Up to three to each extension module It is not possible however to wire extension bases in such a manner that the total number of modules already mounted on the subunit and the extension bases being wired exceeds the maximum number of modules allowed for mounting on the sub unit Overall length of wiring 30 m maximum The maximum overall length of cable measured from the extension module to the farthest extension base Normal operating temperature humidity range 10 to 60 C 20 to 80 RH for an ambient temperature range of 10 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C no condensation Insulation resistance Depends on the input module installed Withstanding voltage Depends on the input module installed Power consumption Included in the value of
347. t file r File type gt TYPE DAILY gt 98 01 01 00 00 00 gt EXPAND COUNT 24 Date and time the file was created Number of extended data for daily and monthly reports IM DC100 01E Jo painseay Buon 7 4 Displaying Directory Relevant Keys meque GS MEMORY DIR a amen QD INS gt Select Setting Parameter CH SET WR MODE FL INFO DIR DELETE CONV mem ser ser LEwrER Press the MEM SET key to enter the MEM SET menu Select set using the CS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu MEMORY pF OQ Lower menu DIR ENTER MEMORY 20000BYTE ENTER gt FILE001 DAT 97 06 01 06 30 gt FILE002 DAT 97 06 02 10 00 4 DIR END Ena of setting ESC Explanation The directory and the free space available on the built in RAM disk are displayed Directory File names and file creation dates are displayed File names are displayed by switching using the e or key 7 8 IM DC100 01E 7 5 Deleting Data File Relevant Keys
348. t modules is the measurement interval of a module having the maximum measurement interval Method of input Non balanced floating input with isolation between channels separated channels Resolution of A D conversion 20000 Integration time of A D conversion Manual or automatic selection between 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz and 100 ms 10 Hz Except auto switch does not function on the stand alone DC power supply model or the subunit DS400 DS600 of a DC power supply model Shortest measurement interval and cutoff frequency When the lowpass filter is turned off Cutoff frequency 50 60 Hz 10 Hz Shortest measurement interval 0 5 s 4s When the lowpass filter is turned on Cutoff frequency 50 60 Hz 10 Hz Shortest measurement interval 3s 12s Normal operating temperature humidity range 10 to 60 C 20 to 80 RH for an ambient temperature range of 10 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C no condensation Maximum input voltage 5 VDC Maximum normal mode noise current 24 mA peak value including 50 and 60 Hz signal components Equivalent voltage of 2 4 V Normal mode rejection ratio equivalent voltage 40 dB minimum 50 60 Hz 0 1 Maximum common mode noise voltage 250 V AC rms 50 60 Hz Common mode rejection ratio equivalent voltage 120 dB minimum 50 60 Hz 0 1 Maximum noise across channels 150 V AC rms 50 60 Hz Measuring range accuracy Measured under the following stan
349. t or turn on time over a given period of time Instantaneous Count Mode RATE Select this option when determining the count for one second Instantaneous Turn on Time Mode GATE Select this option when detecting the on off states by means of variations in the instantaneous value every second Span SPAN Set the upper and lower limits of the pulse count and turn on time The maximum configurable value is 30000 Scale SCL Configure this menu item when converting the scale values to those of a system of units suited for your purpose The maximum configurable range is 0 30000 excluding the decimal point Scale Upper100 Revolution rpm Scale Lower 0 0 3000 Span Lower Count sec Span Upper Filter On Off PULSE FILTER Set this menu item to ON when eliminating chatter up to 5 ms Unit UNIT Configure this menu item when assigning a unit to the measured value See Section 8 3 Setting the Engineering Unit on page 8 5 for more information on how to assign the unit IM DC100 01E 5 7 Assigning the measurement computation channel or communication input channel to be output to the retransmission terminal Relevant Keys ESC RECORD SET OUTPUT GO Co INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST OUTPUT TIMER LOGT eas MEM SET SET ENTER M FUNC Operating Procedure Press the SET
350. t procedure To replace the fuse proceed as follows For models with AC power supply 1 Turn off the power switch 2 Turn off the source of the DC power supply 3 Unplug the power cord from the power outlet 4 Remove the fuse holder below the power connector on the rear panel 5 Remove the blown fuse from the holder 6 Insert a new fuse into the holder and then install the holder in place For models with the screw type power terminals or DC power supply 1 Turn off the power switch Turn off the source of the DC power supply Or for DC power supply model unplug the DC power supply connecter from DC power supply terminal 2 Disconnect the power connections 3 Use a standard screwdriver to turn the fuse holder screw counterclockwise located next to the power terminals Then remove the fuse holder 4 Remove the blown fuse from the holder 5 Insert a new fuse into the holder and then install the holder in place Screw type power terminal DC power supply model Note The fuse is located in the subunit This fuse may not be replaced by the customer For replacement contact your nearest representative The fuse ratings are 250V2A time lag fuse certified by IEC VDE for an AC power supply It is a 250V 6 3A time lag fuse certified by UL CSA for a DC power supply 1 3 2 IM DC100 01E 13 3 Troubleshooting If an error code appears on the dis
351. t resistor Note For 4 to 20 mA input shunt resistance value should be 250 Q 0 19 TC input RTD input 250 b B A I Compensation lead 10 Q max leadwire Three wire resistances should be approx equal for Cu10 Q 3 16 IM DC100 01E 3 6 Connecting the Signal Lines Wiring DC Current Input Signal Lines mA input Module Diagrams of Terminal Blocks and Wiring Screw type terminal CH1 CH2 CH10 CH2 CH4 CH10 Clamp type terminal SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS cH CH3 E il DC current input 1 1 CH9 Wiring Strain Input Signal Lines to Strain Input Module Diagrams of Terminal Blocks R Model with Built in Bridge
352. tage Category CAT II IEC 1010 IM DC100 01E 14 25 suoneoyioodg 14 8 Specifications of Alarm Module Style Number S2 Model Number of outputs Contact mode Terminal type Model UNE Contact mode Terminal type DT200 11 4 Transfer contact NO C NC screw DT200 21 10 Make contact NO C screw Normal operating temperature humidity range 20 to 80 RH for 0 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C no condensation Output updating rate Every measurement interval Contact mode Make contact normal open common contact type Transfer contact normal open common normal close type Energize de energize Switchable Hold non hold Switchable Reflash alarm Up to 6 contacts can be specified Contact capacity 250 V DC 0 1 A with a resistor load 250 V AC 2 A with a resistor load 30 V DC 2 A with a resistor load Dielectric strength Between the output terminal and ground 2300 V AC 50 60 Hz for one minute Power consumption Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed External dimensions and weight Model External dimensions W x H x D mm Weight kg DT200 11 apporox 57x137x68 0 3 DT200 21 apporox 57x137x68 0 4 14 26 IM DC100 01E 14 9 Specifications of DI DO Module Style Number S2 General Specifications DO Alarm output DO Failure output Terminal type Screw Normal operating temperature humidity 20
353. tage and current that can continuously be imposed on an AC input module are as follows Voltage 250 V rms current 5 A rms To avoid electrical shock ALWAYS attach the terminal cover in place after the completion of wiring to the terminals so that the terminals cannot be accidentally touched CAUTION In wiring use double insulated leadwires that have sufficient withstanding voltage and current carrying capacity margins against the voltage and current being measured and meet the ratings at which they are used ALWAYS clamp measuring leadwires with the wire clips to prevent the wires from being disconnected from their terminals As the measuring leadwires use wires 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG14 to 25 thick so they can be fastened securely with the wire clips The power monitor module is a product belonging to Installation Over voltage Category CAT Il Diagrams of Terminal Blocks Wire clip St ALWAYS clamp the leadwire with the wire clip Single phase Model Three phase Model Wire clip a v1 ZB V2 On e 12 On e o e I3 Wire clip rip 9 mm of
354. tart writing with the event action function For details see section 9 1 Setting Event Action Functions Note Writing of periodic file sometimes fails if the start stop and restart operations of the periodic file are all executed within one minute Execute these operations so that each operation do not fall within the same minute Since the first periodic or report file saves the data from the time the writing started to the first date and time for creating the periodic report file the data length may be shorter than the designated length Copy Periodic files can be converted to ASCII format when copying the data from the built in RAM disk to the floppy disk or MO ZIP PD disk Writing Method Periodic files and report files are created until the built in RAM disk becomes full You can also have the old files be overwritten with new files with the SET UP mode setting For report files the oldest file is deleted If deleting the oldest file does not free enough space for the new file the next oldest file is deleted If deleting the five oldest files does not free enough space for the new file the writing is aborted Note For periodic files sometimes new files cannot be written after changing the conditions for writing the periodic files when old files are present in the built in RAM disk In this case copy the remaining periodic files to the disk and delete them from the RAM disk File Name Periodic file The file names of period
355. tected the retransmission is turned OFF The retransmission module outputs 0 V or 0 mA in the following cases When the retransmission is turned OFF Immediately after turning on the power While displaying the setup menu During calibration mode excludes when the retransmission module is being calibrated During initial balancing of the strain input module Immediately after changing the measurement range or the wiring of the measurement channel being retransmitted If a measurement dropout occurs due to the load such as the number of modules that are connected the computational expression of the computation option and the external storage medium the output value of the retransmission does not change For setting the retransmission filter see section 10 3 IM DC100 01E 5 1 5 Buieos 1eourq ueds ed 1ndu ay 6 1 Starting Stopping the Writing of Data Relevant Keys Starting Restarting Writing Operating Procedure Press the START key to start writing the measured or computed data Relevant Keys Stopping Suspending Writing WRITE STOP NO gt Select Setting Parameter NO YES PAUSE oa Operating Procedure Press the STOP key to enter the STOP menu Select set using the CS keys Main menu WRITE STOP YES ENTER gt Select Setting Parameter NO YES PAUSE i Monitor Mode Relevant Keys Writing Measured Computed Data for
356. terface Module Handshaking Hardware transmission and reception control by DTR RTS CTS signal enabled Software transmission control by XON and enabled Capacity of receiving buffer 200 bytes Escape sequence For reception only Functions Talker functions Output of measurement data ASCII binary and setting parameters ASCII Listener functions Setting of measurement conditions control of measurement start and stop excluding the setting and control of power on off specifying causes of ESC S output of a status byte Contents of status Syntax error file end completion of A D conversion operations of internal timer end of data saving incomplete measurement during computation External dimensions Approx 57 W x 137 H x 54 D mm Weight 0 3 kg RS 422 A RS485 Module Style Number S8 Electrical amp mechanical specifications Conform to the EIA RS 422 A and EIA RS 485 Standard Connection method Multi drop 1 n n 16 for RS 422 A n 31 for RS 485 Communication method Half duplex Synchronization mode Start stop asynchronous transmission synchronized by start stop bit Baud rate bps 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400bps selectable Start bit 1 bit fixed Data length 7 or 8 bits selectable Parity Even Odd or None selectable Stop bit 1 or 2 bits selectable Connector 6 point screw type terminal uses M4 screws Minimum response
357. the operation The procedure is explained by a flow diagram For th meaning of each operation refer to the example below Th operating procedures are given with the assumption that yo are not familiar with the operation Thus it may not b necessary to carry out all the steps when changing settings Describes settings and restrictions relating to the operation IM DC100 01E Contents Foreword gt RUE eee BH REG ESA eh ed aA REUS 1 Checking the Contents of the Package 0 cccccccccssssssssssseseesesesscsscsecsecscesesscsucsucsscsessecsessecsecuecueausaeseeseeneses 3 Safety Precautions 2 pce n e mte nd ec etii e e bd RR EE 7 How to Use this Manual coerente tette tente tente treten tette tente tinte 8 Conventions Used in this Manual sse tette tette tte tette tette ts 9 List of Menus and Set up Data Chapter 1 System Cofiguration Ll Abot DARWIN estenensa erexit pte ete esiste e tee eee E E 1 2 Product Overview 1 3 Names Parts poo o et pepe db eb Ye Eb ee E ea barn E L4 Disk PP EAR gp baee ie re epe Eo e e ed Chapter 2 Functions Qui Display Functions aee eet eere re re date ee iE i rE 2 1 2 2 Measurement Input Functions i aene teet t Ete eee rete 2 3 2 3 Data Saving PUnDCUOB ce nec ree ha Hee eR OH EO REDE E Re YEA CE br Ee LER IEEE IR eves rea eU 2 5
358. the two coils are equal the induced voltages of the coils offset each other and total induced voltage becomes zero em coil 1 coil 2 The above two principles are combined as a twisted pair Even though a shielded twisted pair is used a proper grounding method is still important If the signal source is grounded Signal source twisted pair shield Connected equipment If the signal source is not grounded Signal A Source twisted pair shield connected equipment Ground the signal cable shields collectively but separately from the power line ground If the separation of grounds is impossible use the guard terminal IM DC100 01E 3 41 Bum pue uonejjesul 3 12 Countering Noise Insertion of noise filter and noise killer If the influence from noise cannot be eliminated by the methods described before use noise filter or noise killer Power line noise rejection Step 1 Insert an isolation transformer into the power line Increasing impedance to high frequency Power supply 1 A 3 E The Most of the noise is instrument high frequency noise 100 V AC with shield which is grounded Step 2 Insert a power line noise filter available on the market High frequency noise is divided by decreasing impedance to ground through C and increasing impedance to high frequency through L Power L supply mm mm
359. time 0 10 20 50 or 100 ms selectable Reception buffer length 250 bytes Escape sequence Trigger Status call Open and Close Electrical characteristics SDA SDB RDA RDB SG Between the signal terminal and the main internal circuit is insulated functionally Communication distance 1 2 km maximum Terminator Internal resistor 120 Q 1 W switch with the slide switch External dimensions Approx 57 W x 137 H x 68 2 D mm Weight Approx 0 3 kg 14 30 IM DC100 01E 14 10 Specifications of Communication Interface Module Ethernet Style number S8 Electrical and Mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE802 3 Frames are not supported Communication method Ethernet Transmission specifications 10BASE T CSMA CD 10Mbps Baseband Transmission speed 10 Mbps Protocols TCP IP UDP ARP ICMP Maximum number of connections 4 Input data ASCII Supporting RS 232 C commands Output data ASCII Binary External dimensions Approx 57 W x137 H x 57 D Weight 0 3 kg IM DC100 01E 14 31 suoneoyioodg 14 11 Specifications of the Retransmission Module Style number S10 Model code number of output points output signal output range terminal type Model Number of Output Points Output Signal Output Range Terminal Type DT500 11 10ch 1 to 5 VDC 0 8 to 5 4 VDC screw DT500 21 2ch 4 to 20 mADC 3 2to 21 6 mADC screw Load resistance DT500 11 10 kQ or more DT500 21 600
360. ting CH OFF Built in RAM disk capacity 1037312 bytes 2084864 bytes 4178944 bytes Number of partitions on the built in RAM disk 2 2 4 Data length 7817 Data 15761 Data 15792 Data File size 518098 bytes 1042402 bytes 1044448 bytes 0 5s Measuring 2 S period 30s 60 min g Measurin time 1hr5 min8s 4 hr 20 min 32s 65 hr 8 min Os 325 day 16 hr 0 min 0 s 2 hr 11 min 20s 8 hr 45 min 20s 5 day 11 hr 20 min 0 s 656 day 16 hr 0 min 0 s 2 hr 11 min 36 s 8 hr 46 min 22s 5 day 11 hr 35 min 30 s 659 day 23 hr 0 min 0 s File size 256 64 x number of measuring channels 2 x number of measuring channels 6 x data length Extended Type Number of measuring CH 300 Computing CH OFF Built in RAM disk capacity 1037312 bytes 2084864 bytes 4178944 bytes Number of partitions on the built in RAM disk 2 2 4 Data length File size 822 Data 517908 bytes 1687 Data 1042098 bytes 1630 Data 1043916 bytes 0 5s g Measuring 2 S period 30s 60 min Measurin time 6 51s 27 min 22s 6 hr 50 min 30 s 34 day 5 hr 0 min 0 s 14 min 3s 56 min 12 s 14hr 3 min 0s 70 day 6 hr 0 min 0 s 14 5s 56 18s 14 hr 4 min 30 s 70 day 9 hr 0 min 0 s File size 576 64 x number of measuring channels 2 x number of measuring channels 6 x data length IM DC100 01E ejegq
361. to 250 0 W 250 0 to 250 0 W 2500 to 2500 W P13 Active power 37 50 to 37 50 W 375 0 to 375 0 W 375 0 to 375 0 W 3750 to 3750 W PO Apparent power 0 00 to 12 50 0 0to 125 0 VA 0 0to 125 0 Oto 1250 VA VA1 VA2 VA3 Apparent power 0 00 to 25 00 0 0to 250 0 0 0t0250 0 VA 0 to 2500 VA VA13 Apparent power 0 00 to 37 50 0 0 to 375 0 VA 0 0to375 0 VA 0 to 3750 VA VAO Reactive power 0 00 to 12 50 var 0 0 to 125 0 var 0 0 to 125 0 var Oto 1250 var Varl Var2 Var3 Reactive power 0 00 to 25 00 var 0 0 to 250 0 var 0 0 to 250 0 var 0 to 2500 var Var13 Reactive power 0 00 to 37 50 var 0 0 to 375 0 var 0 0to 375 0 var to 3750 var Var0 Power factor 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 1 00 to 1 00 PFi i 1 2 3 13 0 Phase 80 0 to 80 0 deg 80 0 to 80 0 deg 80 0 to 80 0 deg 80 0 to 80 0 deg i 1 2 3 13 0 Frequency 45 00 to 65 00 Hz 45 00 to 65 00 Hz 45 00 to 65 00 Hz 45 00 to 65 00 Hz FREQ suoneoyioodsg IM DC100 01E 14 17 14 4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module Ranges of indication Measured Data Item 25 V 0 5A 25 V 5 A 250 V 0 5 A 250 V 5 A Effective voltage Vi i 1 2 3 13 0 0 00 to 26 25 A rms 0 00 to 26 25 A rms 0 0 to 262 5 A rms 0 0 to 262 5 A rms Effective current Ii i 2 1 2 3 13 0 0 0000 to 0 5250 A rms 0 000 to 5 250 A rms 0 0000 to 0 5250 A rms 0 000 to 5 250 A rms Active power 13 75 to
362. to 80 RH for 0 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C no condensation Power consumption Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed Dielectric strength Between input terminal remote and ground 1500 V AC 50 60 Hz for one minute Between output terminal alarm fail file alarm and ground 2300 V AC 50 60 Hz for one minute External dimensions Approx 57 W x 137 H x 68 D mm Weight 0 35 kg Output update rate Every measurement interval Contact mode Transfer contact NO C NC Energize de energize Switchable Hold non hold Switchable Reflash alarm Can be set Contact capacity 250 V DC 0 1 A with a resistor load 250 V AC 2 A with a resistor load 30 V DC 2 A with a resistor load Function The output relay for a failure becomes de energized when an error is detected in the system of the DC100 main unit or the DA DR DC subunit which is connected to the module Contact mode Transfer contact NO C NC Energize de energize Not switchable Contact capacity 250 V DC 0 1 A with a resistor load 250 V AC 2 A with a resistor load 30 V DC 2 A with a resistor load DO File alarm Output Function The output relay for file alarm becomes energized when the remaining file capacity becomes below the one corresponding to the specified time Contact mode Transfer contact normal open common normal close type Energize de energize Not switchable Contact capacity 250
363. to make two measurements for the value of the retransmission to be stabilized When a computation error or a burnout occurs the output voltage or current will be the OVER level or the OVER level depending on the Set Up mode settings The maximum time that takes to search out a burnout by using the universal input module or the DCV TC DI input module is 2 5 seconds The values being output during this period from the transmission output module are unstable if a burnout occurs Wiring Input Signal Lines to Universal DCV TC DI and Digital input modules Terminals Screw type terminal Clamp type terminal DC voltage TC contact 1 There are no RTD b B A input terminals on the DCV TC DI and Digital input module 6 6 91 CH1 CH2 E Eg Y 2 There is no clamp CH2 o ue 5 type terminal for CH A CH3 Digital module QUEUE Rol STIS u 1 ene N K amp 7 cho CH10 0 0 CH9 Q Wiring Diagrams DC voltage input DI input contact DC input DC voltage input DC current input Shun
364. tocol 100 No equation option Not possible to make any computation settings 101 Invalid code in the equation Set the equation correctly 102 Incorrect number of in the equation Set the correct number of 103 Syntax error Set the equation correctly 104 Illegal character s or code s is used before Set the equation correctly or after an operator 105 The right and left spans are the same Change the span 106 Attempted to make range setting during Stop making range setting computation 110 Syntax error for computation constant Set the constant correctly 111 Out of constant setting range Set the constant within the range 120 Floppy disk not inserted or not formatted Insert a formatted floppy disk into the drive 121 Insufficient memory Delete unnecessary files 122 Incorrect file name or volume name Set the correct file name or volume name 13 4 IM DC100 01E 13 4 Error Codes 123 Attempted to make settings which are not Stop making the settings allowed to be made during saving of measured data 124 Too many files in the media Delete unnecessary files 125 Attempted to read data which was saved Select data which has been saved by another instrument model by DR DA DC 127 Attempted to save data in a write protected file Cancel write protection 128 No event action has been set Set the desired action 130 Incorrect channel found during saving of Set the correct channel measured data
365. tolerance is 396 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm IM DC100 01E 14 39 suoneoyioodsg 14 13 Dimensional Drawings DI DO Module Alarm Module unit mm e 57 GP IB Module RS 232 C Module 136 7 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm 14 40 IM DC100 01E 14 13 Dimensional Drawings RS 422 A RS 485 Module unit mm 40 137 E E E E 9 Ethernet Module If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm IM DC100 01E 14 41 suoneoyioodsg 14 13 Dimensional Drawings 1 5 V Retransmission Module 69 57 48 ere Al 4 20 mA Retransmission Module 57 69 48 ere If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm unit mm 136 7 JHH 136 7 14 42 IM DC100 01E 14 12 Dimensional Drawings Extension Module Extension Base EXTENDER UF AUF g 917
366. ts at the generation of an event trigger using the event action function trigger mode FREE Writing starts when the START key is pressed Default setting is FREE Note If data are written using TRIG the saving operation is also required to start using the START key or through the event action function Selection of Writing Data WRITE DATA Select the data to be written from the following ALL All measured computed data are written ALARM Measured computed data in all channels are written only when an alarm is generated Default setting is ALL Setting of File Name WRITE NAME Select the specifying method of a file name from the following DATE Automatically set based on the date SET Freely set by the user up to 5 characters Default setting is DATE When DATE is selected the file name is set automatically in the following form Form of file name at automatic setting 61010000 DAT i File serial number 0 to 9 A to 2 Writing start time min Writing start time hour Writing start date day Writing start date month 1 to 9 X Y 2 2 The serial number follows with A to Z after to 9 and returns to 0 after Z 2 X Y and Z represent October November and December respectively When SET is selected the user can freely set the first 5 characters Characters that can be used for file names are only those that can be selected from the display In addit
367. u SETUP OQ Lower menu 1 MEDIA ENTER MEDIA FLOPPY ENTER FLOPPY SCSIO IDENTIFY 4 FLOPPY DIR ENTER SAVE LOAD DIR DELETE INFO FORMAT 4 FREE 20000BYTES ENTER FILEOO1 DAT 97 06 01 06 30 gt FILE002 DAT 97 06 02 10 00 4 DIR END End of setting ESC Displayed when the SCSI option C5 is installed SCSILI is the SCSI ID number that is connected Explanation The floppy disk MO ZIP or PD directory and the free space available on the built in RAM disk are displayed Directory The file name and file creation date are displayed File names are displayed by switching using the C 2 key IM DC100 01E 11 5 PON dNLIS 10 LIS e YUM 11 4 Deleting a Data File on a Floppy Disk Deleting a data file in the SET mode SET MEDIA imas Func crock CO stop INS DEL gt Select Setting Parameter MEDIA UNIT MATH CONST TIMER LOGIC CH CT ES rancejaiann MEM mem ser LewreR Lmrunc Press the SET key to enter the SET menu Select set using the GS keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Ma
368. udes those data If you have defined timer and match time signals as events using the event action functions so the time report making starts matches the time the report is created data items included in the first round of report making are one data item greater in number than those included in the second or any subsequent round of report making Processing Against Absence of Measurement Measurement may not take place if the instrument is loaded beyond its processing capability If absence of measurement occurs the instrument compensates for the missing data with the data it measures immediately after recovering from the absence of measurement the data for the period with no measurement thus match those acquired immediately after recovering from the absence of measurement IM DC100 01E 10 27 10 12 Setting Conditions for Creating Reports If Power Failure Occurs While Report Function Is Active The instrument takes different actions depending on the length of a power failure If the power failure time is longer than 12 hours The instrument makes a report immediately after it recovers from the power failure and then stops making reports Results of computing The instrument computes data measured up to the point immediately before the power failure Time of report making The time when the power failure occurred If the power failure time is less than 12 hours The instrument takes different actions depending on the time it recovers fro
369. um Computation interval Every measurement interval except when the computation becomes too difficult to be processed every measured interval in which case an alarm is generated Significant digits during computation 10308 Significant digits of the computed result 9 999 999 to 99 999 999 Decimal point can be set to have 1 to 4 digits on the right of the decimal point Input from communication interface Digital value ASCII numerical array input from the communication interface can be handled as computational data Computation start stop Can be controlled by communication commands M FUNC key operation and event action function such as M FUNC key operation remote control signal time specified and alarm status Other functions included in the math function Remote RJC Input type Thermocouple TC Accuracy Twice the measurement accuracy of the standard thermocouple input temperature difference between the terminal of the remote terminal section and thermocouple section for measuring the remote terminal temperature Thermocouple burnout not selectable 14 4 IM DC100 01E 14 1 Specifications of DC100 DS400 DS600 Report Function feature of the suffix code M3 this optional function will be available in the future Report channels 60 channels from R01 to R60 Types of reports Hourly report Hourly every hour statistical information Daily report Statistical information for a day starting at a specified time Monthl
370. unding Pulse input module esee 1 2 3 19 5 14 Q R Rack mount kit rack mounting eene 6 3 3 RAM disk Directory display 4 5e ee eere rii te 7 8 File information display esses 7 6 Initialization ec pee I PRESS 7 10 RANGE OE toaster Chapter 5 Re failure or re alarm See Alarm reflashing Reference channel for difference between channels 2 11 5 3 Reference junction compensation eee See RJC REFLASH Reflashing alarm eee 2 9 10 6 Registration of details set selected with SET UP menu 10 20 RELATIVE relative time eese 2 12 8 6 Relay for alarm Outputs 4 aere dnt See Alarm energizing de energizing setting 2 9 10 7 Remote control REMOTE 2 13 3 19 9 9 Replacement period for parts seen 13 1 Report ON OBEE tee e tee oet b e ee dires 10 23 START erii 9 11 10 27 9 11 10 27 See Alarm Cini See Group reset RORIS See Timer reset Resistance temperature detector esee See RTD Retransmission module eese en ii B tento 1 2 1 10 2 14 3 6 3 20 13 11 14 32 14 42 MH M 2 3 10 9 2 14 5 3 2 Dite osse e Hiep DR 2
371. ure an internal circuit can be selected or compensation by a fixed compensation voltage value external can be set IM DC100 01E 2 2 Measurement Input Functions Scan Interval A D Integration Time Input Filter Span The duration of time one scan in which the measurement of all channels is carried out is called the scan interval This interval can be set to any value from 0 5 second to 60 seconds The shortest is 40 ch 500 ms for the stand alone model or 300 ch 500 ms for the expandable model varies with the shortest measurement period of the input module This instrument measures the input signal after putting it through an A D converter In order to minimize the noise imposed on the input signal specific integration times exist The integration time can be selected from 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz and 100 ms 10 Hz When AUTO is selected the integration time will be automatically decided according to the 50 60 Hz frequency of the power supply AUTO does not function if the instrument is a DC power supply model Selecting AUTO will set the A D integration time to 20 ms 50 Hz If you are using the instrument on a 60 Hz power supply set the A D integration time to 16 7 ms 60Hz or 100 ms 10 Hz A filter can be set ON OFF to reduce normal mode noise Effects on normal mode noise are as follows depending on the filter being ON OFF theoretical values Frequency 1Hz 10Hz 50Hz100Hz 30
372. urs the action is executed See Section 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches on page 8 1 for setting alarms RELAY If the selected internal switch or relay is operating the action is executed When the alarm module or the DI DO modules are not recognized as system modules see page 9 17 the relay is set to OFF See Section 8 1 Setting Alarms and Relays including internal switches on page 8 3 for setting internal switches and relays FILE END When the end of file the time when the writing operation is terminated and the file is closed is detected the action is executed TIMER f the selected timer s set time is up the action is executed Six timers are available Select any from among these timers See Section 8 4 Setting the Timer on page 8 6 for the timer setting provided earlier in this manual n combination with the level action the action is repeated alternately between executing and stopping each time the timer s set time is up MFUNC KEY When the M FUNC key on the operation panel is pressed the action is executed n combination with the level action the action is repeated alternately between executing and stopping each time the M FUNC key is pressed MATCH TIME When the set time is reached the action is executed There are three types of applicable MATCH TIMES Select any of them For details see Section 8 6 Setting the Match Time and Moving Average on page
373. ut 10 years at an ambient temperature of 23 C If the settings cannot be held because the lithium battery has run down please contact your nearest sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of the manual DS400 DS600 When the side of the power switch is pressed the power is turned on and when the O side of the switch is pressed the power is turned off When the power is turned on the status indicator see the figure on page 3 27 lights Note Before turning the power on check that each unit is properly mounted and the power cord is correctly connected If the status indicator does not go on when the power switch is turned on turn off the power and check the following s the power cord properly connected s the supply voltage within the range noted on the previous page If the problem still cannot be fixed there may be an equipment problem please contact your nearest sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of the manual If the status lamp flashes it means that there is an internal error Turn off the power switch and check the same items as for the DC100 If the problem still cannot be fixed there may be an equipment problem please contact your nearest sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of the manual If the power of a subunit is turned on and off with multiple subunits connected subunits connected subsequently to the end from the subunit
374. ut data If the same error occurs again the module to be calibrated may be defective When calibrating a strain input module first calibrate zero ZERO and then the span SPAN pue IM DC100 01E 1 3 1 3 13 5 Calibration DISPLAY mode to display and adjust the calibrated value Use this mode only for checking the calibrated value In this mode you can adjust the calibrated value but if it is invalid the instrument may be inoperative For details contact your nearest Sales representative Calibrated value display items Calibrated value display items vary depending on the type of module to be calibrated For use with universal input modules display calibrated value display items in the following order 20 mV ZERO 20 mV SPAN 60 mV ZERO 60 mV SPAN 200 mV ZERO gt 200 mV SPAN 52 V ZERO gt 2 SPAN gt 6 V ZERO gt 6 V SPAN gt 20 V ZERO gt 20 V SPAN gt 50 V ZERO gt 50 V SPAN 9 Pt 1 mA ZERO 9 Pt 1 mA SPAN gt Pt 2 mA ZERO Pt 2 mA SPAN Pt 1 mA H SPAN Pt 2 mA H SPAN gt Cu 2 mA ZERO gt Cu 2 mA SPAN For a mA input module show the calibrated values in the order 20 mA ZERO and 20 mA SPAN For a strain input module show the calibrated values in the following order 2k ZERO 2k SPAN 20k ZERO 20k SPAN 200k ZERO and 200k SPAN For a digital input module show the calibrated values in the following order 60 mV ZERO 60 mV SPAN 6
375. utation measurement values of destination channel measurement values of reference channel This function changes the left and right span set with the span to left and right scale values which are converted to a different physical quantity This can be applied to each channel and a different engineering unit can be entered for display Example where voltage values are converted into linear scaling values 1 Measured data Pd Left span 2V Right span 2V Left scale 0 1A Right scale 1 1A This function computes a moving average over a preset number of K measurement values This function is useful for displaying and saving of unsteady measurement values The computation formula is as follows Dm Mm K 1 Mm K 2 Mm 2 Mm 1 Mm K where Dm m th average value Mm K 1 the measurement value of the K 1 th measurement before the m th measurement Mm K 2 the measurement value of the K 2 th measurement before the m th measurement Mm 2 the measurement value of the second last measurement before the m th measurement Mm 1 the measurement value of the last measurement before the m th measurement Mm the measurement value of the m th measurement K number of samples and an integer ranging from 2 to 64 At the first computation the measurement value of the first measurement will be multiplied by the number of samples after which the average will be ta
376. w H Signal source The instrument One point grounding 7 7 7 7 7 7 Grounding resistance and Ecm Ground current In such a case perform one point grounding as indicated by the dotted line as an extreme example of decreasing impedance to equalize the potentials of the signal source and the instrument Rejecting common mode noise in this way is the basics of anti noise measures Anti Noise Measures in the Instrument Itself Pulse width modulation type A D converter PWM type A D This instrument uses a feedback pulse width modulation type A D converter and has the following features Linearity and stability are good because of the feedback effect Integration type A D converter ensures excellent noise suppression If the integration time is equal to the noise period the positive and negative sides of the shaded part in the figure below cancel each other out and thus the average value becomes zero IM DC100 01E 3 37 3 12 Countering Noise Anti Noise Measures Balance each other Input voltage instantaneous value lX DC voltage average value integration time Normally an integration time of 20 ms 50 Hz or 16 7 ms 60 Hz is selected depending on the commercial power supply frequencies A 100 ms integration mode is added to the instrument to achieve superior noise rejection However when using the 100 ms setting the smallest measurement
377. wer consumption 90 VA AC adapter rated output voltage 12 VDC AC adapter maximum rated output current 2 6 A DC100 DS400 DS600 DC power supply connector Power connector for AC power supply 2 E Power cord for AC power supply AC adapter AC adapter Power cord for AC power supply Functional grounding When using the AC adapter noise may be reduced if the functional ground is connected to the earth GND Use the functional ground terminal as necessary 3 30 IM DC100 01E 3 9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON OFF Switching the Power ON OFF DC100 The power switch is a push button the power is turned on when pressed once and turned off when pressed again Power switch Note Before turning the power on check that each unit is properly mounted and the power cord is correctly Bum pue uonejeisu connected If nothing appears on the display when the power switch is turned on turn off the power and check the following Is the power cord properly connected Is the supply voltage within the range noted on the previous page Is the power fuse blown see page 13 2 If the problem still cannot be fixed there may be an equipment problem please contact your nearest sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of the manual The device takes about 30 minutes to warm up The service life of the lithium battery used to save the settings is abo
378. whose power is turned off will not be recognized temporarily The device takes about 30 minutes to warm up IM DC100 01E 3 31 3 10 Structuring System Modules Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Main menu OQ RE_SYSTEM BI s ALARM INS DEL gt Select Function item T MODULE INF RE SYSTEM RAM INIT in CO ser Press and hold the FUNC key for about three seconds to enter FUNC3 menu To enter the FUNC menu from the RANGE ALARM MEM SET or SET SET3 menu press the DISP key Select set using the SN keys To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept Lower menu RE SYSTEM ENTER RE SYSTEM NO ENTER Operating status soa O C L RE SYSTEM YES ENTER Explanation 4 SYSTEM RESTRUCTING After about 15 seconds System configuration RE SYSTEM When you use this instrument for the first time after its purchase or if the system has been changed system structuring is necessary Each module is recognized as a system of this instrument after the system configuration NO Modules are not recognized as system modules YES Modules are recognized as system modules It takes about 15 seconds to recognize system mo
379. wing two STORE Stores data in the internal nonvolatile memory ABORT Cancels the storage of data in the internal nonvolatile memory 13 14 IM DC100 01E 14 1 Specifications of DC100 DS400 DS600 Style Numbers DC100 S8 DS400 DS600 S8 Available Modules for the DC100 Stand alone Model Input modules universal DC voltage TC RTD contact DCV TC DI mA Power monitor Strain Pulse Alarm modules 4 ch output transfer contact or 10 ch output make contact the number of channels can be increased by adding modules Communication interface modules Selectable from GP IB RS 232C and RS422 A RS 485 DI DO modules 2 ch alarm output transfer contact 1 ch fail output 1 ch file alarm output and remote control signal input for data saving functions 12 points Number of modules which can be connected 4 DI DO module not more than one Input module max four Input module alarm module DI DO module communication interface module max four Connecting Subunits to the DC100 Expandable Model Types of Subunits Subunit DS400 four modules Subunit DS600 six modules Number of Subunits which can be connected Up to six units can be connected either DS400 or DS600 Connection method Using dedicated cables Available Modules for the DC100 Expandable Model Main Unit Communication interface modules Selectable from GP IB RS 232 C and RS 422 A RS 485 DI DO modules 2 ch alarm output transfer contact 1 ch f
380. writing channel page 6 3 CH COPY gt copying channel information page 9 12 SET3 menu SET ____ 1 c Q WR MODE setting of writing operation page 6 4 TAG setting tags page 8 7 FL INFO EST Displ f file inf ti 7 6 udi uL a 1 MESSAG E gt Entering messages page 8 7 lt 2 C A DIR gt display of a directory page 7 8 MATCH TIME Setti tch ti 8 9 paa etting match time page 8 9 DELETE Deletion of a data file page 7 9 A OD MOVE setting moving average page 8 9 O2 CONVERT copying after converting data to ASCII format A D page 7 3 GROUP setting groups page 12 9 MEM INIT nitialization of the built in RAM disk page 7 10 ALARM menu 001 01 1 0FF Setting alarms and relays including internal switches page 8 1 xepu IM DC100 01E Index 1 Main Menu FUNC menu SET UP menu DATA WRITE writing data for one scan page 6 1 SET OQ ALARM ACK gt alarm acknowledgment page 9 14 A D A D converter integration time 10 3 CSKA c Q ALARM RST gt alarm reset page 9 14 SCAN INTVL selecting scan interval page 10 1 CSKA c 2 TIMER RESET rimer reset page 9 14 MEM SET setting file alarm time page 10 10 OQ ke MATH STARTostarting computation page 12 10 MEDIA gt saving reading set up data chapter 11 CSKA c lt MATH_CLR_START gt Re starting computation after CH TAG
381. y report Statistical information for a month starting at a specified date and time These types of report making can be turned on or off separately Output of the results of computing for reports The instrument outputs the results to a communication line Output formats of the results of computing for reports Hourly report Standard format Daily report Standard format or enhanced format Standard format results of computing daily reports Enhanced format results of computing daily reports plus results of computing hourly reports Monthly report Standard format or enhanced format Standard format results of computing monthly reports Enhanced format results of computing monthly reports plus results of computing daily reports The enhanced format applies to either daily reports or monthly reports only Either the average instantaneous value or sum in each computing of a report Types of computing for reports AVE Average maximum and minimum over a preset interval INST Instantaneous value at the time of report making SUM Sum and cumulative sum over a preset interval Sum Cumulative Sum Hourly report Hourly sum Sum over 24 hours resets at the time to make up a daily report Daily report Daily sum Sum over a month resets at the time to make up a monthly report Monthly report Monthly sum Not applicable Unit conversion SUM only When inputs over a unit of time are integrated the unit conversion compensates for any dis
382. y the terminal cover and fasten the screws IM DC100 01E 3 15 uonejeisu 3 6 Connecting the Signal Lines Note Make sure that the equipment connected to the signal input output conforms IEC CSA 950 or IEC CSA 1010 Also make sure to use cables that conform to IEC CSA standards In case you are using an internal RJC in case of thermocouple input the following considerations are necessary to stabilize the temperature at the terminals Always make sure to re apply the terminal cover The thermal capacity of the wiring should be small cross sectional area of less than 0 5 mm Minimize outside temperature fluctuations as much as possible To prevent noise make sure to ground each unit at the function grounding terminal below the power switch together at one point Refrain from wiring the input signals parallel However if you do then the following considerations are necessary Ground all equipment at the same point Do not turn the power of other equipment ON OFF during operation Do not use the burnout function If communication is disrupted while outputting the value of the communication input channel from the retransmission module the retransmission module holds the value that was output immediately before the disruption occurred After the power is turned ON or the retransmission or input channel settings are changed it may take apporoximately twice teh measurement interval amount of time needed
383. yed by following the steps described in section 11 5 Displaying Floppy Disk Information Also do a disk check on the personal computer because sometimes the disk becomes corrupt Make sure to set or attach a terminator to the furthest SCSI device from the DC100 Otherwise the operation becomes unstable and can cause operation errors error message numbers 120 121 131 135 If these errors occur turn OFF the SCSI device and set or attach the terminator Then check that the SCSI device information is displayed by following the steps described in section 11 5 Displaying Floppy Disk Information Also do a disk check on the personal computer because sometimes the disk becomes corrupt Do not turn OFF the SCSI device remove the disk or disconnect the SCSI cable while the SCSI device is being accessed If you accidentally do so turn OFF the SCSI device and check that the SCSI device information is displayed by following the steps described in section 11 5 Displaying Floppy Disk Information Also do a disk check on the personal computer because sometimes the disk becomes corrupt If there are more than 1000 files on the SCSI device copying files takes time In addition copying of files sometimes fail if you are copying with the event action function Because the SCSI device is a data storing device for the computer noise countermeasure may not be adequate Be careful of the environment in using the SCSI device If noise
384. ys Operating Procedure Explanation DISP MODE C START ESC FUNC CLOCK CO STOP INS DEL RANGE ALARM wy FD COPY decori ue elas MEM SET SET ENTER M FUNC 1 Select the sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select CLK using the MODE key Sub display 1 and 2 005 0 8210V 006 0 0095V WCLK Dec 30 95 13 16 19 Clock Display The date and time can be displayed on sub display 2 According to the set time in 3 10 Setting the Date and Time see page 3 29 the current date and time is displayed The display shows the month day year and hour minute second in this sequence IM DC100 01E 4 15 Aejdsig spo 34 6umes 5 1 Setting the Type of Input and Span Relevant Keys 001 10 VOLT 2V SPAN 2 0000 2 0000V SKIP VOLT TC RTD DI DELTA SCL MODE EO START ESC m une CO Gre set enter mrunc Operating Procedure 2 Select set using the CSN keys 1 Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu 3 To escape from a lower menu press the MODE ESC key Its main menu will appear although new settings selections will not be kept 4 New settings selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting Main menu 001 01 VOLT 2V gt gt Sel
385. ys FUNC key KEY LOCK ON Section 9 3 Start report FUNC key REPORT START Section 10 12 Stop report FUNC key REPORT STOP Section 10 12 Display module settings Press the FUNC key for MODULE INF Section 9 4 about three seconds Display communication settings Press the FUNC key for COMM INF Section 9 4 about three seconds System configuration Press the FUNC key for RE SYSTEM Section 3 9 about three seconds Initialize setting information Press the FUNC key for RAM INIT Section 9 4 about three seconds Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key see section 10 9 Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key see section 10 8 IM DC100 01E 1 1 About DARWIN Created from a completely new concept that is based on modular architecture this group of next generation data acquisition systems is called DARWIN Data Acquisition and Recording Windows Today many data acquisition networks are increasingly being linked together More than ever before large volume high speed accurate easy to use communication functions are essential in many disciplines In the world of measurement and control where the number of measurement points has increased sharply the ability to acquire information from a large number of points easily and economically uiejs S is crucial Interfacing to a personal computer allows simplified utilization of the information while i
386. zation Measured computed data file utilization bar graph When Saving Periodic Data and Measured computed Data E MINI 5096 90101010 gt III lt 25 9010101Z 4FLE L 1 Periodic file name Periodic file utilization Periodic utilization bar graph Measured computed data file name Measured computed data file utilization Measured computed data file utilization bar graph When Saving Report Data F gt Hourly Daily O Monthly FLE L 1 L 1 L Monthly report ON OFF Daily report ON OFF Hourly report ON OFF IM DC100 01E 4 9 Aejdsig spo 34 6umes 4 6 Using the MEMORY UTILIZATION Display Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation DISP MODE KS START ESC FUNC STOP INS DEL RANGE ALARM kop FD COPY MEM SET SET ENTER M FUNC MEMORY UTILIZATION Display for Sub display 1 1 Select sub display 1 using the DISP key 2 Select MEM using the MODE key Sub display 1 M gt lt 50 0 1M MEM MEMORY UTILIZATION Display for Sub display 2 1 Select sub display 2 using the DISP key 2 Select MEM using the MODE key Sub display 1 and 2 M gt lt 50 0 1M Y M gt lt 50 0 1 MEMORY UTILIZATION Display Memory ut

DC100 Data Collector Instruction Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents